Using Adobe® Scene7®

Using

ADOBE

®

SCENE7

®

Using Adobe

®

Scene7

®

Publishing System

This user guide is protected under copyright law, furnished for informational use only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by Adobe Systems Incorporated. Adobe Systems Incorporated assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in the informational content contained in this guide.

This user guide is licensed for use under the terms of the Creative Commons Attribution Non-Commercial 3.0 License. This License allows users to copy, distribute, and transmit the user guide for noncommercial purposes only so long as (1) proper attribution to Adobe is given as the owner of the user guide; and

(2) any reuse or distribution of the user guide contains a notice that use of the user guide is governed by these terms. The best way to provide notice is to include the following link. To view a copy of this license, visit http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc/3.0/us/

Adobe, the Adobe logo, Adobe Premiere, Acrobat, Flash, Illustrator, Photoshop, PostScript, and Scene7 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe

Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

Apple, Macintosh, and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and other countries. Microsoft, OpenType, and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/).

This software is based on part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.

This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org)

This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]).

Portions Copyright 1988-1997 Sam Leffler.

Portions Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics.

Portions Copyright 1995-2004 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler.

Adobe Systems Incorporated, 345 Park Avenue, San Jose, California 95110, USA.

Notice to U.S. Government end users: The Software and Documentation are “Commercial Items,” as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. §2.101, consisting of

“Commercial Computer Software” and “Commercial Computer Software Documentation,” as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §§227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and

Commercial Computer Software Documentation are being licensed to U.S. Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein. Unpublished-rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.

Adobe agrees to comply with all applicable equal opportunity laws including, if appropriate, the provisions of Executive Order 11246, as amended, Section 402 of the Vietnam Era Veterans Readjustment Assistance Act of 1974 (38 USC 4212), and Section 503 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended, and the regulations at 41 CFR Parts 60-1 through 60-60, 60-250, and 60-741. The affirmative action clause and regulations contained in the preceding sentence shall be incorporated by reference.

Last updated 5/21/2010

Contents

Chapter 1: Introducing Adobe Scene7

What’s new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

System requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Adobe Scene7 editions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Adobe Scene7 Publishing System desktop application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Adobe Scene7 Media Portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Using Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Training and other resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Chapter 2: Getting started

Adobe Scene7 platform overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Signing in and out

Navigation basics

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Setup basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

About rich media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Chapter 3: Setup

Personal Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Application Setup

Publish Setup

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Administration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Media Portal groups and reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Bandwidth, storage, and error reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Chapter 4: Upload and publish assets

Uploading files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Publishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Checking job files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Chapter 5: Managing assets

Working with asset folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Viewing assets in the Browse Panel

Selecting assets in the Browse Panel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Searching assets

Previewing assets

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Moving, renaming, or deleting assets

Working in Detail view

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Adding and exporting metadata

Exporting assets from SPS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Printing assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Managing the Trash folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Organizing your work with Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Last updated 5/21/2010 iii

USING SCENE7

Contents

Chapter 6: Image Sizing

Quick Start: Image Sizing

Uploading master images

Setting up Image Presets

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Publishing master images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Linking URLs to your web application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Chapter 7: Zoom

Quick Start: Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Uploading zoom images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Creating zoom targets for Guided Zoom

Setting up Zoom Viewer Presets

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Previewing images with different Zoom Viewers

Publishing zoom images

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Linking Zoom Viewers to your web page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Chapter 8: eCatalogs

Quick Start: eCatalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Uploading the PDF files

Creating an eCatalog

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Creating eCatalog Image Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Managing Info Panel content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Setting up eCatalog Viewer Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Previewing eCatalogs in the eCatalog Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Publishing eCatalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Linking an eCatalog to a web page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Chapter 9: Image Sets

Quick Start: Image Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Preparing Image Set assets for upload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Creating an Image Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Including zoom targets and Image Maps in Image Sets

Viewing Image Sets

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Linking an Image Set to a web page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Chapter 10: Swatch Sets

Quick Start: Swatch Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Preparing Swatch Set assets for upload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Creating a Swatch Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Including zoom targets and Image Maps in Swatch Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Viewing Swatch Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Linking a Swatch Set to a web page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Chapter 11: Spin Sets

Quick Start: Spin Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Creating a Spin Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Setting up Spin Set Viewer Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Previewing a Spin Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

iv

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Contents

Publishing a Spin Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Linking a Spin Set to a web page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Chapter 12: Template Basics

Quick Start: Template Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Uploading template files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Creating a template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Creating template parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Publishing templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Linking a template to a web page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Chapter 13: Template Publishing

Quick Start: Template Publishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

About variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Designing templates in Illustrator or InDesign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Supported design features for FXG templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Upload files for Template Publishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Build an FXG template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Manually define variables in Scene7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Preview and update template variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Publish FXG templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Linking an FXG template to a web page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Chapter 14: eVideo Serving

Quick Start: eVideo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Uploading the video files

Video Viewer presets

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Publishing videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Linking a video to a web page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Chapter 15: eVideo Streaming

Quick Start: Video streaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Uploading files for streaming video

Creating Video Recuts

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Info Panel content for Video Recuts

Video Viewer presets

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Publish a streaming video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Link a streaming video file to a web page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Chapter 16: Video Sets

Quick Start: Video Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Preparing to upload videos for Video Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Creating a Video Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Setting up Video Set Viewer Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Link a Video Set to a web page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

v

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Contents

Chapter 17: Mixed Media Sets

Quick Start: Mixed Media Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Creating a Mixed Media Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Setting up a Mixed Media Set Viewer Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Link a Mixed Media Set to a web page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 18: Master files

Editing images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Creating Image Maps

Cropping an image

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Sharpening an image

Adjusting an image

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Image editing options at upload

Working with PDFs

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Working with PSD files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Working with PostScript and Illustrator files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Working with vignette, window covering, and cabinet files

Working with Viewer SWF files

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Chapter 19: Support files

ACO files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

ICC profiles

XML files

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

XSL files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Chapter 20: FXG Elements Guide

Type of elements and attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Common attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Element types and their private attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

vi

Last updated 5/21/2010

Chapter 1: Introducing Adobe Scene7

Welcome to Adobe® Scene7®, the leading on-demand rich media platform. Using Scene7, businesses can streamline dynamic content to any channel and enhance the online shopping experience. Scene7 solutions include the following:

• Dynamic Imaging features (zoom, sizing, Image Sets, Swatch Sets, Spin Sets, Video Sets, Mixed Media Sets, and basic Templates)

• eCatalogs

Media Portal

• Desktop application

• eVideos (progressive and streaming delivered videos, Video Recuts, and Video Sets)

• Visual Configurators

Web-to-Print (Template Publishing)

• Targeted e-mail and print

What’s new

To review the latest Adobe Scene7 release information, including new features and enhancements, see www.adobe.com/go/learn_s7_new_en .

System requirements

Before using Scene7 Publishing System, make sure that your system meets the Scene7 system requirements and recommendations. For the most current requirements, see www.adobe.com/go/learn_s7_system_reqs_en .

Note: If your browser does not have Flash Player version 10, you can download it from Adobe at www.adobe.com/go/learn_s7_flash_upgrade_en .

Adobe Scene7 editions

Scene7 offers several editions to meet your requirements. Scene7 Small Business and Enterprise editions vary in features, scalability, support, and fees.

To find out which edition of Scene7 you have, choose Help > About.

For a full list of the features available in the Small Business, Enterprise, and Enterprise Unlimited editions, see www.adobe.com/go/learn_s7_editions_en .

1

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Introducing Adobe Scene7

Adobe Scene7 Publishing System desktop application

The Adobe Scene7 Publishing System desktop application is an Adobe AIR application that lets you run SPS and

Media Portal from your desktop without a web browser. You can use the SPS desktop application to upload files and folders by dragging them directly from your desktop.

2

Adobe Scene7 Media Portal

Scene7 Media Portal allows companies to easily acquire, control, and distribute approved assets to partners, channels, and internal business users. All Media Portal administrative tasks are available through the SPS Setup screen. Users have access to the different features within SPS according to the user role they are assigned. For more information on

Media Portal, see www.adobe.com/go/learn_s7_media_info_en .

Using Help

Adobe Scene7 offers the Help program and onscreen Help.

Help program

The Scene7 Help system is designed to direct you to information for completing all tasks. To access Help in the Scene7

Publishing System, choose Help > Help. The Help system opens to a page that explains the Scene7 screen you are currently viewing.

To use the Help program:

Contents search

Select Contents and then select the Plus icon next to content titles and subtitles to find information.

You can click the Minus icon to collapse subtitles.

Search by keyword

Select Search and enter a search term in the box. You see a list of pages from the Help system with the word you entered. Select a page to open it.

Hypertext link cross-references

Throughout the Help system are many hypertext link cross-references. Select a hypertext link to open the Help program to a page with more information or background information about the task you want to do.

Note: You can access the Scene7 Help system without opening Scene7 first. To open the Help system in your web browser, see www.adobe.com/go/learn_s7_help_en . To obtain a printed copy of the Help system, see www.adobe.com/go/learn_s7_help_pdf_en .

Onscreen Help

Scene7 offers onscreen Help:

Tool tips

You see a tool tip when you move the cursor over buttons, menus, and navigation links. Tool tips tell you the names of these onscreen items so you can identify them quickly.

Onscreen instructions

Some screens present getting-started instructions in the form of a text overlay that explains how to accomplish a task. In addition, some screens also offer these icons:

Instructions icon

Click the Instructions icon icon to read brief task instructions.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Introducing Adobe Scene7

Question Mark icon

Click the Question Mark icon next to specific buttons or controls to get an explanation of a button or control.

3

Support

Technical support offerings are designed to meet the needs of any size company. This table outlines the access levels, resources, and contact information for your Scene7 edition (including trial companies).

Support

Case limit

Response time

Free live web training and video tutorials

E-mail support

Services

2 per month

2 business days

Included

Small Business Editions

2 per month

2 business days

Included

Enterprise/Unlimited Editions

Unlimited

4 hours

Included

Live telephone support [email protected]

Japan: [email protected]

US/Canada: [email protected]

Europe: [email protected]

Japan: [email protected]

US/Canada: [email protected]

Europe: [email protected]

Japan: [email protected]

Not available Additional per-incident fee:

$40 per single incident

$175 per 5-incident pack

US/Canada: (800) 898-9743, or (415)

884-9910, M-F, 6am-6pm (PT)

Europe: +44(0) 20 86061140, M-F,

0900-1800 (UTC/GMT)

When reporting issues to Technical Support, include this information:

• Company name

Your name, phone number, and e-mail address

• Scene7 application, platform, and version

Issue description and the steps necessary to reproduce the problem

• Error message (if any)

Browser type and version (if applicable)

• Adobe® Flash® Player version (if applicable)

Training and other resources

Scene7 offers training in the form of web conferences, video tutorials, and Scene7 University.

Training options

Scene7 offers training in the form of web conferences, video tutorials, and Scene7 University.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Introducing Adobe Scene7

Web conferencing

Scene7 offers free interactive web conference training covering the fundamentals of Scene7. These classes are publicly broadcast web sessions moderated by an instructor who answers questions and delivers instructional presentations and demonstrations. The basic format is a one-hour web training presentation with a Q&A session. For more information about web conferences, see www.adobe.com/go/learn_s7_webtraining_en .

Video tutorials

View video tutorials covering the basics of getting started with Scene7. Video topics include platform overview, navigation, setup, asset management, and building rich media. To access all the getting-started video tutorials, choose

Help > Tutorials. To access the video tutorials online, see www.adobe.com/go/learn_s7_videos_en .

Demos

To watch demos of Scene7 features, go to the Scene7 website. For more information, see www.adobe.com/go/learn_s7_demos_en .

Scene7 University

Scene7 provides in-depth, customized classroom training designed for your organization. The training sessions can be tailored for beginning to advanced users, end users, administrators, and IT staff. For more information about Scene7

University, see www.adobe.com/go/learn_s7u_en .

For scheduling and pricing of classroom and customized workshops, contact Scene7 at [email protected]

Getting Started chapter of Help

The Getting Started section of the Help system presents instructions for users who are new to Scene7. It explains the

basics of the platform, navigation, setup, asset management, and building rich media. See “ Getting started ” on page 6.

Integration overview

Scene7 provides an integration document that describes how Scene7 can be easily integrated with your web pages and commerce or content-management systems. By using URL calls to the Scene7 platform, you can upgrade your website to leverage dynamic rich-media features. For more information, see www.adobe.com/go/learn_s7_integration_en .

Module documentation

Scene7 provides documentation for the latest major version of each Scene7 software module. Module documents are available for Scene7 Image Authoring, the Scene7 Publishing System, Image Server, Render Server, and Viewers. They are also available for the Scene7 Web Services API.

Release Notes are also available for each module. Release notes provide details on the release, including enhancements, new functionality, tips, troubleshooting advice, and known outstanding issues. Release Notes also offer interactive examples of rich-media features and how to activate them. In addition, Release Notes offer installation and configuration instructions for clients with licensed software.

Reference Guides to the Image Server, Render Server, and Viewers describe the HTTP protocols for these server modules. Website developers who want to further customize and leverage Scene7 rich media for a website or custom application can use these guides. Scene7 assumes that the reader is familiar with the Scene7 system, general HTTP protocol standards and conventions, and basic imaging terminology.

4

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Introducing Adobe Scene7

Image Authoring

Document

User Guide

Release Notes

Web address

Contact Scene7 technical support for this documentation.

Contact Scene7 technical support for this documentation.

Scene7 Publishing System

Document

Online Help

PDF version of Help

Release Notes

Web address

www.adobe.com/go/learn_s7_help_en www.adobe.com/go/learn_s7_help_pdf_en

Windows: Contact Scene7 technical support for this documentation.

Linux

®

: Contact Scene7 technical support for this documentation.

Linux Enterprise: Contact Scene7 technical support for this documentation.

Web Service API Documentation: Contact Scene7 technical support for this documentation.

Image Server

Document

Release Notes

Reference Guide

Web address

www.adobe.com/go/learn_s7_image_server_notes_en www.adobe.com/go/learn_s7_image_server_guide_en

Render Server

Document

Release Notes

Reference Guide

Viewers

Document

Release Notes

Reference Guides

Skinning Basics Guide

Web address

www.adobe.com/go/learn_s7_render_server_notes_en www.adobe.com/go/learn_s7_render_server_guide_en

Web address

www.adobe.com/go/learn_s7_viewers_notes_en www.adobe.com/go/learn_s7_viewers_guides_en www.adobe.com/go/learn_s7_viewer_skinning_en

5

Last updated 5/21/2010

Chapter 2: Getting started

Adobe® Scene7® lets you upload media assets to the Scene7 Publishing System (SPS), build rich media, and publish your work to Scene7 Image Servers. You can upload many different types of assets such as images, PDFs, PSD files, videos, graphics, and fonts. As part of the publishing process, Scene7 generates the URLs you need for your websites and applications.

Scene7 Publishing System (SPS) Media Portal allows users to share company assets internally, as well as distribute assets to partners and channels. Using Media Portal, users can browse, search for, preview, export, and upload assets.

Rich media tools include image sizing, Zoom Sets, eCatalogs, Image Sets, Spin Sets, Swatch Sets, Video Sets, SWF Sets,

Mixed Media Sets, basic Templates, FXG Templates, and videos.

To view video tutorials, best-practice guidelines, downloads, training information, and schedules, see www.adobe.com/go/learn_s7u_en .

Adobe Scene7 platform overview

Scene7 is an integrated, rich media management, publishing, and serving environment. Rich media can be delivered to all marketing and selling channels, including the web, print material, e-mail campaigns, web portals, desktops, and devices.

Workflow process

The key Scene7 workflow steps are:

Upload and manage your assets

Upload your media assets to SPS. You can organize, browse, and search for assets on the system. You can also apply metadata to assets. If you install Adobe Scene7 Publishing System desktop application, you can upload files and folders by dragging them from you desktop to an upload folder.

Create rich media

Create different configurations of your assets such as zoom targets, eCatalogs, Spin Sets, Image Sets,

Templates, and viewers. For example, create Zoom targets that people can click to zoom in on product details with rollover links to product pages. You can preview media as you create it.

Publish and administer

Publish assets to Scene7 Image Servers, as well as monitor the status of assets when they are published, administer user rights, and maintain security.

Serve

Deliver media from Scene7 Image Servers to your web pages or applications; the media are performanceoptimized and are delivered with CDN caching. Scene7 provides you with a URL for each asset. Once you publish the asset, the URL becomes active.

6

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Getting started

CREATE BUILD & PUBLISH DELIVER

Digital camera or Scanner (images)

Web

Create Scene7 Asset Types

Scene7 Image Authoring (VNTs)

Print

Flash (video & skins)

Photoshop, Illustrator, InDesign

Adobe Scene7

Publishing

System

Adobe Scene7

SAAS

Infrastructure

eMail

Acrobat

Build: eCatalogs,

Image Sets,

Templates,

Guided Zoom

Publish:

Image Server,

Render Server,

Video Server,

FMS, IDS, etc

Desktop

Devices

Adobe Fonts (OTF, TTF, Type 1)

The Scene7 workflow process.

Single master images and single URL calls

Scene7 is fundamentally different from other systems because you can use Scene7 to deliver media dynamically from single master assets and URL calls.

The URL strings you generate with Scene7 include instructions that tell the server how to display the asset when it is delivered. For example, the same master image can be delivered in different sizes, formats, weights, colors, and zoom views. As part of building and publishing media assets with Scene7, you visually configure the effects. In so doing, you create the URL calls that correctly tell the server how to present your master asset to applications.

7 eMail

Scene7 can deliver the same master image to different mediums in different sizes and formats.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Getting started

Content caching

The images that Scene7 generates dynamically are cache-friendly; in most cases, they are JPEG images with unique

URL calls that identify them. The images are delivered on the content delivery network (CDN), a system of servers that are networked together on the Internet to deliver content faster. The images are distributed from servers located globally, and then to computers. When implementing a caching mechanism using any CDN vendor, you simply change the server name to point to the CDN-enabled Scene7 Image Server. All Scene7 editions include bundled CDN caching.

8

Signing in and out

Upload, building, and publishing with the Scene7 Publishing System requires meeting certain user prerequisites and system requirements. You identify yourself to SPS by signing in. When you have finished using Scene7, sign out.

Make sure that you have the following before using Scene7:

Setup

You must have been set up to use Scene7 by your administrator.

URL

You must have the URL location for accessing Scene7. You get this URL via the “Welcome” e-mail or from your

Scene7 administrator.

Login name

You use your e-mail address as your login name.

Password

You obtain your temporary password in a “Welcome” e-mail from Scene7 or from your Scene7 administrator. The first time you sign in, you are prompted to change this temporary password.

Sign in

The Welcome e-mail you received from your administrator provides you with the sign-in URL, your username, and a temporary password.

1

Start your web browser.

2

Go to the Scene7 sign-in URL (from the Welcome e-mail). Alternatively, you can sign in from the Scene7 website

( www.scene7.com

) by selecting the Client Login button.

3

Enter your e-mail address in the Username box.

4

Enter your password in the Password box.

5

Optionally, you can make your computer remember your e-mail address by selecting the Remember My Username option.

6

Click Sign In.

More Help topics

“ Personal Setup ” on page 13

Sign out

Click Sign Out, located on the right side of the Global Navigation bar.

• Exit your browser.

Note: After 30 minutes of inactivity, the Scene7 Publishing System signs you out automatically.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Getting started

Important: Because SPS is web-based, going to a different website exits the system. For example, if you click the Back button in your browser window, you exit Scene7.

9

Navigation basics

The Scene7 Publishing System screen includes three major areas: Global Navigation bar, Asset Library, and Browse

Panel/Build Panel.

B C D E

A

Main Scene7 areas

A. Global Navigation bar B. Asset Library C. Filters tab D. Browse Panel E. Media Cart (Media Portal only)

Important: Because SPS is web-based, going to a different website exits the system.

Global Navigation bar

The Global Navigation bar, located along the top of the screen, offers buttons for performing different tasks:

Application Chooser

Choose the application you want to work with from the menu, if you are licensed to use more than one Scene7 application. Users licensed to use Scene7 Media Portal, for example, can open it by selecting the

Application Chooser button and choosing Scene7 Media Portal on the menu. If you are not using another Scene7 application, the Application Chooser button doesn’t appear.

Select Company or Media Portal account

Choose the company or Media Portal account you want to access from the menu. This button isn’t available if you’re working with one company.

Upload

Opens the Upload screen so you can upload files from your computer or network to SPS. You can upload files

from your desktop or via FTP. See “ Uploading files ” on page 35.

Build

Choose a Build task from the menu. The options are eCatalogs, and in the Enterprise edition, Image Sets,

Templates, and Spin Sets. The Build panel opens so you can create these asset types.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Getting started

Publish

Opens the Publish screen so you can publish rich media assets to Scene7 Image Servers and the rest of the

Scene7 SAAS Infrastructure. See “ Publishing ” on page 41.

Media Cart

Opens the Media Portal cart. Media Portal users use the Media Cart to export assets from SPS. See “ Export assets using the Media Cart ” on page 60.

Jobs

Opens the Jobs screen so you examine records of upload and publish jobs.

Setup

Opens the Setup screen where you can choose setup and administration options for optimizing your use of

Scene7. See “ Setup ” on page 13.

Help

Choose a Help option:

Help > Help On This Topic

doing.

Opens the Help system to a page with information about the task you are currently

Help > Video Tutorials

publishing workflow.

Accesses videos on specific topics to demonstrate how to get started with each rich media

Help > Help Contents

Opens the Help system to the Introduction page. You can click through the Table of

Contents to find and view different topics.

Help > About

Tells you which edition of Scene7 you are running.

Sign Out

Exits the Scene7 Publishing System.

Asset Library

Use the Asset Library to organize the assets you are working with. You can create folders and subfolders for organizing your assets in the Asset Library.

At the top of the Asset Library panel are commands for locating assets. You can search for assets as well as open the

Filter by Asset Type menu to filter the contents of the Asset Library by asset type. Click the Trash icon at the bottom of the Asset Library to examine assets you deleted.

In the Build Panel, the Asset Library includes a column of thumbnails or names displaying the current folder contents.

You can drag these thumbnails or names to build eCatalogs, Image Sets, Templates, and Spin Sets. This column is available only if your monitor resolution is set to 1280 x 1024. To change the list between thumbnails and columns, choose Grid or List from the Default Asset Library View option in Personal Setup.

Note: You can click Asset Library controls to open or close the Asset Library and get more room to work onscreen. Select the Expand/Collapse control to expand or close the panel. These controls are located on the left side of the panel.

More Help topics

“ Managing assets ” on page 49

Browse Panel/Build Panel

The Browse/Build Panel is where you do much of your work. What appears in this panel depends on whether you are working in Browse mode or Build mode:

Browse mode

Select a folder in the Asset Library to view and work with its contents in the Browse Panel. This panel offers the File, Select, and Sort menus for working with assets. You can also view assets in different ways by moving the slider or selecting the Grid View , List View , or Detail View button. Selecting the Detail View button or double-clicking an asset opens the asset in Detail view, where you can perform asset-dependent file operations.

10

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Getting started

Build mode

Select a Build option to start building an eCatalog, and if you are an Enterprise Edition user, an Image Set,

Template, or Spin Set. Enterprise Unlimited users and Enterprise users who have the eVideo streaming add-on can also create Video Recuts. You can select the assets you want to work with before or after you enter Build mode.

More Help topics

“ Managing assets ” on page 49

“ Viewing assets in the Browse Panel ” on page 50

“ Selecting assets in the Browse Panel ” on page 50

“ Searching assets ” on page 50

11

Setup basics

Use the Scene7 Publishing System Setup screen to enter your personal settings. If you are an administrator, set up your company settings. To open this screen, click the Setup button on the Global Navigation bar.

The settings available to you on this screen depend on your status as a user or administrator:

Users (and Media Portal contributors) can only access Personal settings and the accounts of companies of which they are a member; they cannot perform any administrative tasks.

• Administrators can access Personal settings, as well as view and administer their own company accounts. They can also perform all application setup functions, and all administration functions, including adding administrators and users.

Administrators can also set up Image Presets and Viewer Presets in the Application Setup screen:

Image Presets

Image Presets are saved formats for displaying master images at different sizes with optimized sharpening. Scene7 offers four preconfigured presets; they cannot be changed or deleted.

Viewer Presets

Viewer Presets determine how you see your rich media when you zoom it or view eCatalogs.

More Help topics

“ Setup ” on page 13

“ About different user roles ” on page 26

“ Image Presets ” on page 16

“ Viewer Presets ” on page 19

About rich media

Scene7 offers many tools for creating rich media. You create these rich media by clicking Build and choosing a rich media type.

Image sizing

Dynamically serve images at any size and format throughout your website. Instead of manually creating many images at different sizes, you only use one master image. As Scene7 delivers the requested image, it optimizes

the image for highest-quality results in size, format, weight, quality, and sharpening. See “ Quick Start: Image Sizing ” on page 64.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Getting started

Zoom

Allow customers to zoom in, zoom out, and pan images using the configurable viewers that come with Scene7.

Customers can quickly and interactively view high-resolution product details. See “ Quick Start: Zoom ” on page 71.

eCatalog

Present an interactive web version of your catalog or other print material. Create clickable areas (called

Image Maps) that show rollover content and allow customers to turn pages, zoom, pan, and attach sticky notes to

pages. See “ Quick Start: eCatalog ” on page 79.

Image Sets

Deliver an interactive shopping experience in which users can view products in multiple views. You can combine zoom, multiple views, and color swatches for an integrated viewing experience. (Enterprise Edition only.) See

“ Quick Start: Image Sets ” on page 91.

Swatch Sets

Deliver an interactive shopping experience in which users can view products in different colors and patterns. You can combine zoom, multiple views, and color swatches for an integrated viewing experience. (Enterprise

Edition only.) See “ Quick Start: Image Sets ” on page 91.

Spin Sets

Sequence images to spin them horizontally. Spin Sets allow visitors to your website to turn products and

view them from different sides. (Enterprise Edition only.) See “ Quick Start: Spin Sets ” on page 101.

Video Sets

Combine multiple videos, images, or both in one viewing experience. You can choose from three Video Set

Viewer presets: Standard, Carousel, and Grid. The Standard Video Set Viewer includes the standard video controls, such as Pause, Rewind, Volume, and a Timeline track for maximum interaction with the user. the Carousel Video Set

Viewer displays video thumbnails in one row, and the center thumbnail plays automatically. You can roll over or click other thumbnails to play them. the Grid Video Set Viewer displays video thumbnails in a grid pattern and autoplays

videos as you click or roll over their thumbnail. See “ Setting up Video Set Viewer Presets ” on page 156.

Mixed Media Sets

Provide a mix of image sets, spin sets, swatch sets, zoom targets, video, and audio in one presentation. You can set up Mixed Media sets with tabs to separate video from images. You can also specify where, and how to display swatches and zoom targets and give users a full multimedia view of your products or services. See

“ Quick Start: Mixed Media Sets ” on page 160.

Templates

Create data-driven templates that combine fonts, images, and graphics for monogramming, online personalization, and promotions. For example, layer sale or other promotional graphics onto product images or place the names of customers on T-shirts or coffee mugs. Customers can see their names in e-mail messages or print

brochures you send to them. (Enterprise Edition only.) See “ Quick Start: Template Basics ” on page 106.

Video

View product demonstrations, training and educational material, advertising clips, movie clips, and usergenerated content in video format (Enterprise Edition only) and streaming video format (Enterprise Unlimited users

and Enterprise users who have the eVideo streaming add-on). See “ Quick Start: eVideo

” on page 128 and “ Quick Start:

Video streaming ” on page 133.

12

Last updated 5/21/2010

Chapter 3: Setup

Adobe® Scene7 offers the Setup screens so you can customize Scene7 for your company and administer users:

• Open the Personal Setup screen to change personal settings, such as your Browse Panel settings and your password.

Open the Application Setup screens to enter general application settings, create Image Presets, create Viewer

Presets, and define metadata.

• Open the Administration Setup screens to administer users and access usage reports.

To open the Setup screens, click the Setup button on the Global Navigation bar and choose the type of settings you want. In the Setup screen, you can display different Setup options by selecting the expand/collapse controls.

Important: All users can change settings on the Personal Setup screen, but the Application and Administration screens are reserved for administrators.

Personal Setup

All users can change settings on the Personal Setup screen. To open the Personal Setup screen, choose Setup > Personal

Setup.

Note: The Personal Setup screen lists which user role you have in the Scene7 Publishing System: Company Administrator,

Administrator, or User.

The Personal Setup settings control the default behavior of the Browse Panel, how you receive e-mail, and password settings. Select the Save button after you change these settings.

My Account Information

Lists your company, name, e-mail address, and user role.

Desktop Version

If your administrator has allowed downloading of SPS Desktop, click the Install Now button to install it onto your local hard drive.

Browser

Thumbnail Size

Determines the default size of thumbnail images in Grid view in the Browse Panel.

Default Asset Library View

Determines whether the assets in the Asset Library for build sets appear as thumbnails or by name. If you are working with large quantities of assets in the Asset Library, you can view the assets by name. For example, if you are building a large eCatalog with many PDF files, you can view the assets by name to make the list shorter.

Default Browse Sort Order

Determines the order in which assets appear by default in the Browse Panel. Choose a sort criterion on the menu and whether you want an ascending or descending sort.

Default Browse View

Determines whether Grid view or List view is the default view you see when you first open the

Browse Panel.

Splash Screen Display

Determines whether you see any splash screens, including the Welcome splash screen.

13

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Setup

Show ToolTips

Determines whether tool tips appear when you move the pointer over buttons, menus, and navigation links. Tool tips describe onscreen items.

Checkerboard Background

Displays a checkerboard layer behind images, letting you easily see the transparent areas of an image that has an alpha channel.

Show MediaPortal Features

(Available only for Media Portal Administrators) Select this option if you want to see

Media Portal features, such as Media Cart.

Email

Email Options

Choose how you want Scene7 to inform you by e-mail when upload and publish jobs are completed.

You can receive job completion notices only if warnings or errors occurred.

Email Scope

Determines whether you receive all job e-mail for your company or only e-mail about upload and publish jobs you initiate.

Email Types

Determines whether you are informed when upload jobs and publish jobs are completed.

Password

New Password

Enter a new password (it must be at least six characters long).

Re-Type Password

Re-enter the new password to confirm that you are entering it correctly.

Password Expiration

Determines whether your password expires after 72 days as a security measure. If you select Yes, you are asked to create a new password after 72 days.

14

Application Setup

The Application Setup screens are for entering general settings, creating Image Presets, creating Viewer Presets, and defining metadata.

Important: Only administrators can change settings on the Application Setup screens.

Application General Settings

The Application General Settings screen displays the assigned Scene7 Image Servers to which you publish assets. It also determines whether you use Projects to organize your files.

To open the Application General Settings screen, choose Setup > Application Setup.

Server

On account creation, Scene7 automatically provides the assigned servers for your company. These servers are used to construct URL strings for your website and applications. These URL calls are specific to your account.

Published Server Name

This server is the live CDN server used in all system-generated URL calls specific to your account. Do not change this server name unless you are instructed to do so by a Scene7 support technician.

Origin Server Name

This server is used for quality assurance testing only. Do not change this server name unless instructed to do so by a Scene7 support technician.

AGM Server Name

This server is used for web to print templates. This server is set on a company-wide basis. Do not change this server name unless instructed to do so by a Scene7 support technician.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Setup

Show URL For Unpublished Assets

Select this option if you want Scene7 to display a URL when previewing any asset, whether it has been published. If the asset has not been published, the URL does not work, but you can use it for planning or organizational purposes.

Allow AIR Install

Select to allow user to download SPS Desktop to their local hard drive. Once downloaded, users can install it using the Install Now button, located in the Desktop Configuration section of the Personal Setup window.

Projects

Show Projects

Determines whether Projects are available as a means of organizing your Scene7 assets. See “ Organizing your work with Projects ” on page 62.

Upload

Overwrite Images

Scene7 does not allow two files to have the same name. Each item's SPS ID (the image name minus the filename extension) must be unique. Because of this rule, the Upload dialog box has an Overwrite option. The exact effect of this option depends on the specified Overwrite Images option. These options specify how replacement images are uploaded: whether they replace the original images, or become duplicate images. Duplicate images are renamed with a “-1” (for example, chair.tif is renamed chair-1.tif). These options affect images uploaded to a different folder than the original or images with a different filename extension from the original (such as JPG, TIF, or PNG). (See

“ Using the Overwrite Images option ” on page 16.)

Overwrite in current folder, same base image name/extension

This option is the strictest rule for replacement. It requires that you upload the replacement image to the same folder as the original, and that the replacement image has the same filename extension as the original. If these requirements are not met, a duplicate is created.

Overwrite in current folder, same base asset name regardless of extension

Requires that you upload the replacement image to the same folder as the original, however the filename extension can be different from the original. For example, chair.tif replaces chair.jpg.

Overwrite in any folder, same base asset name/extension

Requires that the replacement image has the same filename extension as the original image (for example, chair.jpg must replace chair.jpg, not chair.tif). However, you can upload the replacement image to a different folder than the original. The updated image resides in the new folder; the file can no longer be found in its original location

Overwrite in any folder, same base asset name regardless of extension

This option is the most inclusive replacement rule. You can upload a replacement image to a different folder than the original, upload a file with a different filename extension, and replace the original file. If the original file is in a different folder, the replacement image resides in the new folder to which it was uploaded.

Retain Publish Field

Specifies whether a replacement image uploaded to Scene7 retains the Ready To Publish setting of the image it is replacing, or you specify that setting on upload.

Default Color Profiles

Specifies the color profiles applied as part of Use Default Color Behavior when adding CMYK images.

Image Map Editor

Default Image Mapping href

Defines the default URL used for the image mapping href column. This URL is the default URL you see when you create new image maps.

Default Image Mapping Template

Defines the default JavaScript for the image mapping href template. You can set custom code here to be executed whenever you click an image map.

Other settings

Adjust Zoom Target Fields

Specifies the default size used by any zoom viewer preview in Scene7 and for the preview used in the Zoom Target tool. The maximum Viewer size is 4000 x 4000.

Last updated 5/21/2010

15

USING SCENE7

Setup

Trash Can Clean Up Warnings

Assets in the Trash are automatically removed within seven days. Select this option if you want notifications sent to company administrators when assets that are in the Trash are four days away from being

permanently deleted. (See “ Managing the Trash folder ” on page 61.)

Using the Overwrite Images option

Scene7 does not allow two files to have the same name. Each item's SPS ID (the image name minus the filename extension) must be unique. Because of this rule, the Upload dialog box includes Overwrite Images options. The exact effect of this option depends on a setting for each company's SPS Internal Settings.

If you previously uploaded images and then changed the original files (or replaced them), the chosen Overwrite option specifies how Scene7 replaces the images. No information about the image changes, but the new image replaces the old one. If the folder also contains images that aren't already in Scene7, these images are added.

Use this option if images you have uploaded have changed in some way (image has been altered) but the reference to the image remains the same. Overwrite is also helpful when uploading and ripping Adobe® PDFs. To fine-tune how

Scene7 rips the image, adjust the ICC color profile options in the Upload dialog box and re-upload using the Overwrite feature.

The Scene7 IDs that are used to access images from the production servers are derived from the image filenames. The use of uppercase and lowercase characters in the filename is important, both in the replacement of existing files and for the Scene7 IDs used to access the image. Be sure the use of uppercase and lowercase characters in filenames is correct before uploading into Scene7 to avoid Scene7 IDs that differ only in case for the same image.

If you deselect this option, all images with the same filenames as existing images are treated as duplicates and are not added.

Image Presets

The Image Presets screen is for creating and editing Image Presets. Image Presets enable Scene7 to deliver images dynamically at different sizes from the same master image. Each Image Preset represents a predefined collection of sizing and formatting commands for displaying images. Creating an Image Preset entails choosing a size for image delivery. It also entails choosing formatting commands so that the appearance of the image is optimized when the image is delivered.

Media Portal administrators can create presets for exporting assets. Users can simply choose a preset when they export images and in so doing reformat images to the specifications administrator specifies.

To open the Image Preset screen, choose Setup > Image Presets.

More Help topics

“ Setting up Image Presets ” on page 66

Create and edit Image Presets

1

Choose Setup > Image Presets.

2

Create a new preset or start from an existing one:

Creating an Image Preset

Select the Add button.

Creating an Image Preset from an existing preset

Select the Image Preset that is most like the one you want to create and select the Edit button.

3

On the Add (or Edit) Preset screen, enter a name for the preset.

16

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Setup

4

Choose Preset options. See “ Image Preset options ” on page 17.

5

Select the Save button, or if you started from an existing preset, select the Save As button.

6

To preview the preset with your own image, click Browse and select an image. To preview with the default image, click Reset.

You can edit an Image Preset by selecting its name on the Image Presets screen and selecting the Edit button. To delete an Image Preset, select it, and then select the Delete button.

Image Preset options

The Add Preset and Edit Preset screens offers these options for creating and editing Image Presets:

Preset Name

Enter a descriptive name without any blank spaces. Include the image-size specification in the name to help users identify this Image Preset.

Width and Height

Enter in pixels the size at which the image is delivered.

Format

Choose a format from the menu. Choosing the GIF or JPEG format brings up additional options:

• GIF Color Quantization Options

Type

Choose Adaptive (the default), Web, or Macintosh. If you choose GIF With Alpha, the Macintosh® option is not available.

Dither

Choose Diffuse or Off.

Number Of Colors

Drag the slider to enter 2–256.

Color List

Enter a comma-separated list. For example, for white, gray, and black, enter 000000,888888,ffffff.

• JPG Options

Quality

Controls the JPEG compression level. This setting affects both file size and image quality. The JPEG quality scale is 1–100.

Enable JPG Chrominance Downsampling

Because the eye is less sensitive to high-frequency color information than high-frequency luminance, JPEG images divide image information into luminance and color components.

When a JPEG image is compressed, the luminance component is left at full resolution, while the color components are downsampled by averaging together groups of pixels. Downsampling reduces the data volume by one half or one third with almost no impact on perceived quality. Downsampling is not applicable to grayscale images. This technique reduces the amount of compression useful for images with high contrast (for example, images with overlaid text).

Sharpening

Select the Enable Sharpening option to apply a basic sharpening filter to the image after all scaling takes place. Sharpening can help compensate for blurriness that can result when you display an image at a different size. (For

more information about sharpening, resample modes, and unsharp masking, see “ Sharpening an image ” on page 171.)

Resample Mode

Choose a Resampling mode option. These options sharpen the image when it is downsampled:

B-Linear

The fastest resampling method; some aliasing artifacts are noticeable.

Bi-Cubic

Increases CPU usage on the Image Server, but yields sharper images with less noticeable aliasing artifacts.

Sharpened

Image Server.

Can produce slightly sharper results than the Bi-Cubic option, but at even higher CPU cost on the

Tri-Linear

Uses both higher and lower resolutions, if available; recommended only when aliasing is an issue. This method reduces JPEG size due to reduced high-frequency data.

17

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Setup

Unsharp Masking

Choose these options to fine-tune sharpening:

Amount

Controls the amount of contrast applied to edge pixels. The default is 0.0. For high-resolution images, you can increase it to as high as 5.0. Think of Amount as a measure of filter intensity.

Radius

Determines the number of pixels surrounding the edge pixels that affect the sharpening. For highresolution images, enter from 1 through 2. A low value sharpens only the edge pixels; a high value sharpens a wider band of pixels. The correct value depends on the size of the image.

Threshold

Determines the range of contrast to ignore when the unsharp mask filter is applied. In other words, this option determines how different the sharpened pixels must be from the surrounding area before they are considered edge pixels and are sharpened. To avoid introducing noise, experiment with values between .02 and 0.2. The default value of 0 sharpens all pixels in the image.

Color Space

Determines whether the image uses the space in which the image was created, usually RGB (Original) or a luminance space (Intensity).

Color

Choose these options:

Output Color Profile

Select Default or one of the ICC color profiles available on the Scene7 Publishing System. See

also “ ICC profiles ” on page 181.

Rendering Intent

Select an option if you want to override the default rendering intent of the color profile. Use this option when one of the default ICC profiles is the target color space of a color conversion, an output device (printer or monitor) is characterized by this profile, and the specified rendering intent is valid for this profile.

Embed Profile

Select this option so that, if you open this image in Adobe® Photoshop®, it uses this profile.

Print Resolution

Choose a resolution for printing this image; 72 pixels is the default.

URL Modifiers

If you prefer to specify the URL modifiers that define your Image Preset, rather than the settings, enter the modifiers here.

Sample Image URL

Lists the “raw” URL string that the Scene7 Image Server uses to deliver images with the Image

Preset you are adding or editing. This URL string encodes all the format settings you select in the Add Preset or Edit

Preset screen.

Edit, remove, or deactivate a preset

1

Choose Setup > Image Presets.

2

Select the preset in the Export Settings window, and do one of the following:

• To edit it, click Edit and specify new options in the Edit Preset dialog box.

To delete it, click Delete.

• To deactivate it, click to deselect the Active box next to the preset name.

Specify export options available to Media Portal users

When using the Media Portal version of Scene 7, you can reformat images as you export them. For example, you can change the size, file format, and image quality. Automatically reformatting images as they are exported saves time by not having to reformat images separately. Moreover, administrators can create a preset—a pre-established selection of image format settings. You can use a preset when exporting images to reformat them to the specifications of the administrator.

1

Choose Setup > Image Presets.

18

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Setup

2

In the Image Presets window, select any of the following:

Enable User-Defined Conversion

Select this option to permit users to directly modify Size, Color, Format, and other conversion options on their own to reformat image files as they download these files. Deselect this option if you want users to download original files only without reformatting them.

Enable Export Original

Select this option to permit users to export the original master image. In the Export Selected

Files dialog box, users can select the Conversion menu and choose Export Original to export original files. Deselect this option if you want to force users to choose a preset or choose conversion options on their own when they export images.

Viewer Presets

A Viewer Preset is a collection of settings that determine how users view rich-media assets on their computer screens.

Scene7 comes with default Viewer Presets. If you are an administrator, you can create new Viewer Presets. Settings are available for an array of viewer configuration options. For example, you can change the viewer display size, zoom behavior, color schemes, borders, and fonts.

You can also add community features to some of the viewers. The community features available depend on the viewer.

Community features include an Embed button, E-mail button, Link button, and Visit Site button. These buttons let people using the viewers share the viewer with others or open the Scene7 website.

Administrators can create and customize the following types of Viewer Presets:

Video Set Viewers

Displays multiple videos in one viewer. You can choose thumbnail representations of each video when creating the Video Set. You can specify for videos to either play automatically when the viewer is opened, to or play when the cursor hovers over the video thumbnail. In the Standard Viewer, video displays using a timeline and video controls, such as Stop, Pause, Rewind, and Play.

Grid Viewer

Displays multiple videos, images, or both, in one viewer. Use this viewer to display videos and images in a Video Set or a Mixed Media Set. You can choose thumbnail representations of each video when creating the Video

Set. You can specify for videos to either play automatically when the viewer is opened, to or play when the cursor hovers over the video thumbnail. In the Grid Viewer, the video thumbnails and images appear in rows and columns.

They play randomly or sequentially and when the cursor hovers over them.

Carousel Viewer

Displays multiple videos, images, or both, in one viewer. Use this viewer to display videos and images in a Video Set or Mixed Media Set. You choose thumbnail representations of each video when creating the Video Set.

You can specify for videos to either play automatically when the viewer is opened, to or play when the cursor hovers over the video thumbnail. In the Carousel viewer, the video thumbnails appear in a carousel formation of five (default) across, with the center video playing. They play randomly or sequentially and when the cursor hovers over them.

ECatalog Viewer

Simulates the experience of reading a printed catalog. You can move from page to page, zoom in and out of items on a page, and use image maps to see more information about items on the page. You can also include an

Info Panel to display detailed information and an image-mapped item if the map area has a valid rollover_key attribute. To include an Info Panel, specify an Information Server URL in the Info Panel Settings panel of the eCatalog

Viewer Preset window.

Mixed Media Set Viewer

Displays different types of media in one viewer. You can include Swatch Sets, Spin Sets, images, and videos. You can set up tabs to contain different types of content, such as a tab for image sets and a tab for videos. Videos played back from a Mixed Media Set use a standard video viewer with a timeline and video controls, such as Stop, Pause, Rewind, and Play. When you set up a Mixed Media Set Viewer preset, you specify which viewers you want to use for the different types of assets in your Mixed Media Set. You can also use the Grid Viewer or Carousel

Viewer to view a Mixed Media Set.

Spin Set Viewer

Provides multiple views of an image so users can turn the object to examine the different sides and angles.

Last updated 5/21/2010

19

USING SCENE7

Setup

Video Viewer: Video and Animation

The Video Viewer displays videos using the preset size and format of your video.

It can display progressive or streaming video. Use the Video Viewer when you want to display video using a timeline and video controls, such as Stop, Pause, Rewind, and Play. The Animation viewer can display progressive or streaming video, and includes only a simple control of Play/Pause. The Animation Viewer is best used for short simple videos.

Video Recut Viewer

Displays Recut Videos created using the Scene7 Video Recut window.

Zoom Viewers

Offers a choice of three types of zoom viewer:

Zoom Viewer: Basic

Lets users zoom into the area by clicking on it. They can click controls to zoom in, zoom out, and reset the image to its default size.

Zoom Viewer: Fly-out

Displays a second image of the zoomed area next to the original image. There are no controls to use, users simply move the selection over the area they want to view.

When determining the complete bandwidth usage for this viewer, consider that both the main image and the flyout image are served in the viewer. The main image size (Stage Width and Height) and the Zoom Factor determine the flyout image size. To keep the flyout file size from becoming too large, balance these two values: if you have a large main image size, lower the Zoom Factor value. (The Flyout Width and Flyout Height determine the size of the flyout window, but not the size of the flyout image that is served into the viewer.)

For example, if your main image size is 350 by 350 pixels, with a Zoom Factor of 3, the resulting flyout image is 1050 by 1050 pixels. If your main image size is 300 by 300 pixels, with a Zoom Factor of 4, the flyout image is 1200 by 1200 pixels. Depending on the JPEG quality setting (recommended settings are between 80-90), you can decrease the file size significantly. Recommended zoom factors are 2.5 to 4, depending on the size of your main image.

Zoom Viewer: Custom

Provides three additional options: Images, Image Sets/Multiple views, and Image Sets/Color

Swatches. In each of these options, you can create guided zooms. Use the Image Sets/Multiple Views for Image Sets and use Image Sets/Color Swatches for Swatch Sets. You can choose from these preset options when you add viewers for Swatch Sets and Image Sets in a Mixed Media Set.

Creating and editing Viewer Presets

As you edit or create a Viewer Preset, a preview of the viewer appears onscreen so you can adjust the options efficiently.

1

Choose Setup > Viewer Presets.

2

Create or edit the Viewer Preset on the Viewer Presets screen.

Creating

Open the Add menu and choose a rich-media asset type. You can also create a Viewer preset by starting from an existing one. Display the name of the preset, select it, and then select the Edit button. On the Configure

Viewer screen, enter a new name for the preset. Select the Save As button when you have finished creating the

Viewer Preset.

Editing

Display the name of a preset, and then select the Edit button.

3

Choose options in the Configure Viewer screen. A preview of the preset with the current options appears to the right of the Configure Viewer screen.

Note: To see a description of an option, click the Info Tip icon to the right of the option. All options are fully explained in the application.

4

To add skins to the foreground or background of the viewer preset, select the SWF file you want to use. Skin SWFs

options are only available to Enterprise users and are available only for some viewer types. (See “ Working with

Viewer SWF files ” on page 178.)

5

Click the Save button.

6

To preview the preset with your own image, click Browse and select an image. To preview with the default image, click Reset.

Last updated 5/21/2010

20

USING SCENE7

Setup

Note: To set a Viewer preset as the default for which users view the rich-media asset on their computers, select it and click

Make Default.

More Help topics

“ Setting up eCatalog Viewer Presets ” on page 87

“ Setting up Spin Set Viewer Presets ” on page 103

“ Video Viewer presets ” on page 129

“ Setting up Zoom Viewer Presets ” on page 74

“ Setting up Video Set Viewer Presets ” on page 156

“ Setting up a Mixed Media Set Viewer Preset ” on page 162

Obtaining Viewer Preset URLs

After you publish an asset, you can obtain a URL for displaying the asset with the settings from a Viewer Preset. Follow these steps to obtain this URL:

1

Select the asset in the Browse Panel.

2

Select the Preview button to open the Preview screen.

3

Select the Presets menu and choose a preset type.

4

Select the Copy URL button.

The URL is copied to the Clipboard. You can use it as necessary in the HTML code of your web page or application.

Viewer Preset URLs are also listed in the Browse Panel in Detail view. Select URLs in the Browse Panel and select the

Copy URL button to copy a URL to the Clipboard.

Metadata Presets

Company administrators use the Metadata Presets screen to create, manage, and view metadata presets.

Create or edit a preset

1

Choose Setup > Metadata Presets.

2

In the Metadata Presets screen, do one of the following:

To create a new preset, click Add. Type a name for the preset in the Preset Name box.

• To edit an existing preset, select the preset from the Preset list and click Edit.

3

Expand headings you want to include in the preset and select the different fields you want to include.

4

Click Save.

The selected categories and fields for the preset appear in the Preview panel.

Manage presets

1

Choose Setup > Metadata Presets.

2

Do any of the following:

• To preview a preset, select the preset you want to preview. The preset information (categories and fields) appears in the Preview screen.

21

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Setup

• To Delete a preset, select the preset and click Delete.

To make a preset the default for users, select the preset and click Make Default.

User-Defined Fields

Administrators can create custom metadata fields to help organize assets in the Scene7 Publishing System. The names of these custom metadata fields appear in the Browse Panel in Detail view. Users can enter information in metadata fields to describe assets. Users can also make a metadata field a criterion in searches.

1

To create a custom metadata field, choose Setup > Application Setup, and select User-Defined Fields.

The User-Defined Fields screen appears.

2

Click Add. You see the Custom Field dialog box. Choose these options:

Name

Enter a name for the metadata field.

Type

Choose an option that defines the type of information that users can enter in the metadata field:

String

A text string.

Int

An integer.

Float

A floating-point number.

Boolean

A yes/no value.

Date

A date.

Filename

The name of a file.

Color

The name of a color.

Dimension

The width and height of the asset.

Default Value

Optionally, enter the value users are most likely to enter in the field. The value you enter becomes the default value for the field you create.

3

Click Save when you finish creating the metadata field. Its name appears in the User-Defined Fields list.

4

(Optional) Do any of the following:

• To edit a metadata field, select it and click Edit.

To remove a field, select it and click Delete. The field name no longer appears in the Browse Panel in Detail view.

• To deactivate a field, click to deselect the Active box next to the custom field name.

More Help topics

“ Adding and exporting metadata ” on page 57

Optimize Files

As you upload files to the Scene7 Publishing System, the system optimizes them for storage and publishing. If the upload process is interrupted, however, some images cannot be optimized. In this case, you see the “Image not yet optimized” message. You can, however, optimize these files if you are an administrator.

SPS searches through your files and optimizes only those images that were not fully optimized before.

1

Choose Setup > Application Setup, and then select Optimize Files.

2

Enter information for the optimization job and click Submit.

22

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Setup

If you are working with more than one company, optimize files belonging to different companies separately.

More Help topics

“ Checking job files ” on page 44

Batch Set Presets

Use the batch set presets to automatically create image sets or spin sets while a job is running to upload assets to the

Scene7 Publishing System.

Company administrators first define naming conventions for the assets to be grouped together in a set. A batch set preset can then be created to reference these images. Each preset is a uniquely named, self-contained set of instructions that defines how to construct the set using images that match the defined naming conventions.

All active batch set presets for a company are listed on the Upload screen, so you can specify which preset you want applied during each upload session. Company administrators will see all active and inactive batch set presets. When you upload files, Scene7 automatically creates a set with all files that match the defined naming convention in the active presets.

Default Naming

The company administrator can create a default naming convention that can be used in any batch set preset. The default naming convention selected in the batch set preset definition, may be all your company needs to batch-generate sets for all web sites. A batch set preset will need to be created to use the default naming convention you define. You are able to create as many Batch Set presets with alternate, custom naming conventions needed for a particular set of content in cases where there is an exception to the company-defined default naming. While setting up a default naming convention is not required to use batch set preset functionality, best practice recommends that you use the default naming convention to define as many elements of your naming convention which you want grouped in a set in order to streamline batch set creation.

1

Choose Setup > Application Setup, select Batch Set Presets, and then select Default Naming.

2

Select Form or Code to specify how you want to view and enter information about each element.

You can select the View Code checkbox to view the regular expression value building alongside your form selections. You are able to enter or alter these values to help define the elements of the naming convention, if the form view limits you for any reason. If your values are unable to be parsed in the form view, the form fields will become inactive.

Note: De-activated form fields do not indicate invalid regular expression. There is no validation that your regular expressions are correct. You will see results of the regular expression you are building for each element after the Result line. The complete regular expression is visible at the bottom of the page.

3

Expand each element as necessary and enter the naming conventions you want to use.

4

As necessary, click Add to add another naming convention for an element. Or click Remove to delete a naming convention for an element.

5

Click Save As and type a name for the preset. Or click Save if you are editing an existing preset.

Alternately, you can use View Code with no form fields available. In this view you create your naming convention definitions entirely using regular expressions.

23

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Setup

Two elements are available for definition, Match and Base Name. These fields allow you to define all elements of a naming convention and identify the part of the convention used to name the set in which they are contained. A company’s individual naming convention may make use of one or more lines of definition for each of these elements.

You may use as many lines for your unique definition as you require and group them into distinct elements, such as for Main Image, Color element, Alternate View element and Swatch element.

Create a batch set preset

Scene7 uses batch set presets to organize assets that share some common information or content into sets of images for display in viewers. The batch set preset scripts automatically run alongside the asset import jobs you schedule in

Scene7. Use the Batch Set Preset screen to create, edit, and manage your batch set presets. You can create as many batch set presets as necessary to cover all asset ingest jobs you require. There are two forms of batch set preset definitions, one for a default naming convention that you might have set up and one for custom naming conventions you create on the fly.

You can use the either the form field method to define a batch set preset or the code method, which allows you to use regular expressions. As in Default Naming, you can choose Code View at the same time you are defining in the Form

View and use of regular expressions to build your definitions. Alternately, you can uncheck either view to use one or the other exclusively.

1

Choose Setup > Application Setup, select Batch Set Presets, and then select Batch Set Preset. Form View is the default.

2

Click Add in the Preset List to activate the definition fields in the Details panel on the right hand side of the screen.

3

Type a name for the preset in the Preset Name box in the Details panel

4

From the Batch Set Type menu, select the preset type.

5

Choose Default from the Asset Naming Conventions File Naming menu (click the arrow to view the menu) if you are using a default naming convention that you previously set up. Choose Custom to define a naming convention as you set up the preset.

6

For Sequence order, define the order for the images once the set is grouped together in Scene7. By default, your assets will be ordered alphanumerically. You can define the order in the same way that you do to set up a default naming convention.

7

For Set Naming and Creation Convention, specify the suffix or prefix to the base name you defined in the Asset

Naming Convention. Also define where the imageset will be created within the Scene7 folder structure.

If you define large numbers of imagesets, you may prefer to keep these separate from the folders that contain the assets themselves. Many customers create an Image Sets folder and redirect the application to place batch set generated sets here.

8

Click Save in the Details Panel.

24

Publish Setup

The Publish Setup screen settings determine how assets are delivered by default from Scene7 servers to websites or applications. If no setting is specified, the Scene7 server delivers an asset according to a default setting on a Publish

Setup screen. For example, a request to deliver an image that does not include a resolution attribute yields an image with the Default Object Resolution setting on the Image Server screen.

Administrators can change the default settings on the Image Server, Image Renderer, and Vignette screens to establish default settings for delivering assets from servers.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Setup

To open the Publish Setup screens, click Setup > Administration Setup, and select Publish Setup.

Important: The Publish Setup screens are for use by experienced website developers and programmers. Scene7 assumes that users who change settings on these screens are familiar with the Scene7 Publishing System, HTTP protocol standards and conventions, and basic imaging technology.

Image Server

The Image Server screen establishes default settings for delivering images from image servers. Settings are available in these five categories (see the Image Server screen itself for detailed descriptions of the settings).

Change these settings only with the assistance of a Scene7 support person.

Catalog Management

These settings determine how SPS and the catalog interact. Unlike most web servers, Scene7

Image Server URL calls go to a manifest, or catalog, file rather than an image file proper. The catalog file (not to be confused with an eCatalog) contains a list of all content published to the image server along with the path to each image. If you have a Digimarc ID, enter your user information in the Digimarc User Info section.

Request Attributes

These settings impose limits on images that can be delivered from the server.

Default Request Attributes

These settings pertain to the default appearance of images.

Common Thumbnail Attributes

These settings pertain to the default appearance and alignment of thumbnail images.

Defaults for Catalog Fields

These settings pertain to the resolution and default thumbnail type of images.

Color Management Attributes

These settings determine which ICC color profiles are used.

Compatibility Attributes

This setting enables leading and trailing paragraphs in text layers to be treated as they were in version 3.6 for backwards compatibility.

Localization Support

These settings let you manage multiple locale attributes.

Image Renderer

The Image Renderer screen establishes default settings for delivering Image Sets from image rendering servers.

Settings are available in these five categories (see the Image Server screen itself for detailed descriptions of the settings):

Catalog Management

These settings determine how SPS and the catalog file interact. Scene7 Render Server URL calls are made to the catalog, which in turn calls to deliver images from the server. Change these settings only with the assistance of a Scene7 support person.

Session Attributes

These settings establish error parameters, the URL for relative image URLs, and whether object overlapping is permitted.

Default Material Attributes

These settings establish default resolution and sharpening settings for images.

Response Image Attributes

These settings pertain to the default appearance of images.

Color Management Attributes

These settings pertain to the default color settings of images.

Vignette

The Vignette screen offers settings for establishing the default appearance of vignettes (see the screen itself for detailed descriptions of options).

25

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Setup

Administration Setup

The Administration Setup screens are for administering SPS and Media Portal users. Use these screens to enable users to work in the Scene7 Publishing System and to communicate by e-mail with users.

To access Administration Setup options, choose Setup > Personal Setup. Click to expand Administration Setup on the left, and then click either User Administration or Email Communication.

About different user roles

All Scene7 users are assigned a role that determines their privileges and access rights to features in SPS. Administrators determine the different roles and responsibilities for the companies to which they are assigned.

Typically, Scene7 configures the first set of accounts or companies and assigns a company administrator. The company administrator then sets up and administers SPS users.

SPS user roles and privileges

As an administrator, you can add a user or administrator to the company or companies you administer. Which role you can assign to a new user depends on your administrator status:

Administrators

Can give a new user any role; they can give the user access to any company.

Company Administrators

Can give a new user the User role or the Company Administrator role. They can give new users access only to the company that they administer.

Regular Users

Cannot add new users or edit user information.

Media Portal user roles and privileges

Media Portal provides the following roles, each with different access rights and permissions.

Media Portal User

Has access to folders and files. A user can only browse, preview, and download files. This role is suitable for channel or service partners that need access to your corporate-approved assets.

Media Portal Contributor

Can upload and browse files and metadata in areas to which an administrator has granted permissions. A contributor cannot preview or download files. Contributors can change the name of files, move files to different folders, and delete files. This role is suitable for creative consultants who submit their work to SPS.

Media Portal Contributor/User

Has access to folders and files. A contributor/user can browse, preview, download, and upload images and metadata. Contributor/users can change the name of files, move files to different folders, and delete files. This role is suitable for individuals who need access to corporate-approved assets and who also contribute assets.

Media Portal Administrator

Can add and remove new portal administrators, contributors, and users. The administrator can also set group access rights, assign corporate-approved conversion formats (presets), send e-mail to

Media Portal users, and view portal usage and storage reporting.

Media Portal extends access rights to existing SPS users. SPS supports three user roles. All three roles can access accounts (called companies in SPS) set up for the Scene7 Publishing System:

Administrator

Can view and administer all features in SPS, as well as set up accounts (called companies) and add administrators and users.

Company Administrator

Can view and administer only their own accounts/companies. A Company Administrator can also perform all administration functions, including adding administrators and users.

Regular User

Can access accounts/companies to which they have been assigned; cannot perform any administrative duties.

26

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Setup

Adding, editing, and deleting users

As an administrator, you can add and manage users, and edit user information.

After you add a user, SPS sends the user a Welcome e-mail message. The message includes a password and the SPS URL.

To create a preset for Media Portal users to export images, see “ Image Presets ” on page 16.

To create custom metadata fields for Media Portal users, see “ User-Defined Fields ” on page 22.

Adding a user or administrator

1

Open the User Administration Setup screen and click Add.

2

Enter the First Name, Last Name, and Email Address of the user or administrator you want to add.

3

Choose a Role option to assign a role to the user.

4

If you are an Administrator, you can give the new user access to more than one company. You can Ctrl+click to select more than one company on the Add User screen.

5

Select the Active option to activate this user immediately.

6

Click Add User.

All new users are given a randomly generated password; users are required to change passwords the first time they log in to SPS.

New users are sent a “Welcome” e-mail after you add them. The e-mail provides a temporary password and explains how to log on to the Scene 7 Publishing System.

7

To edit user information, select a name on the User List and select the Edit button. Then edit the information on the Edit User screen.

More Help topics

“ Email Communications ” on page 30

Delete a user

You can delete users from Scene7 Publishing System by making them invalid. Invalid users are removed from the system and all accounts.

1

Open the User Administration Setup screen.

2

Select a user from the list, and click Edit.

3

Deselect Valid.

4

Click Update User.

Activate and deactivate users

Users who have been deactivated no longer have permission to enter the account listed at the top of the Select Accounts

To Access menu.

1

Open the User Administration Setup screen.

2

In the user list, select or deselect the Active option next to the name of the user.

27

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Setup

Edit user information

You can change user information as necessary. For example, you can set a user’s password to expire after a specific number of days, change a user’s role from Contributor to Administrator, or update a user’s e-mail address. You can also click the Reset Password button to send the user an e-mail with a temporary password.

1

Open the User Administration Setup screen.

2

Select a user from the list, and click Edit.

3

Specify options as desired, and click Update User.

Setup the Media Portal Welcome e-mail message

If you are a Media Portal administrator, you can send a Welcome email when you add new users. You can configure this e-mail message, or tell Media Portal not to send it.

1

In the User Administration Setup screen, click the Email Settings button.

2

In the Email Settings dialog box, specify any of the following settings:

Send Email

Deselect this option if you don’t want to inform new users by e-mail that you have signed them up for

Media Portal.

Default Password

Enter a password for new users. Users are asked to change this password the first time they log in to Media Portal. Instead of a randomly generated password, new users receive the password you enter.

Replacement URL

Enter a URL different from the default if your users access Media Portal through a different URL.

Managing the user list

As an administrator, you can use the User Administration screen to add users and edit user information. You can also filter and sort the user list to locate users. All users in all accounts you administer appear in the Users list, regardless of the account selected in the Select Account To Access menu.

On the User Administration screen, the names of users appear on the User List.

Filter and sort the user list

You can filter the user list with these techniques:

Filter by group

Select the By Group menu and choose an option to narrow the list to users in a group.

Filter by user role

Select the By User Role menu and choose an option to narrow the list to users or administrators of

different types. (See “ About different user roles ” on page 26.)

Filter by field name

Select the Enable Filter By Field option. Then select the By Field Name menu, choose a column for filtering the list, and select the Filter Character menu and choose a letter. The list is filtered on one of the columns by the letter you chose. Deselect the Enable Filter By Field option to see the full list.

Filter out invalid users

Deselect the Include Invalid option. The search results display only users who are in the system.

Invalid users have been deleted from the system and the accounts you administer.

Sort by column heading

Click a heading to sort all users by their status, alphabetically by first name, last name, or email, by user role, or by valid/invalid status.

If you have many users, you can limit the size of the list by selecting the Max List Size menu and choosing a number.

28

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Setup

Generate a selectable list of Media Portal users

If you are a Medial Portal administrator, you can display all user names in a pop-up window with names and e-mail addresses. This list is useful if you want to cut and paste user names and addresses for use outside SPS and Media

Portal.

1

Open the User Administration Setup screen.

2

Click the Popup List button to open the pop-up window.

Upload a Media Portal user list

If you have several users to add, you can upload a user list. The users are added automatically to the currently selected account.

Create the user list as a CSV (comma-separated values) file containing the user information. Once uploaded, the users in the list are automatically added to the account with their specified group assignments. A Welcome e-mail is sent to each new user, including a link to Scene7 Publishing System and a temporary password.

Create the CSV file

Create a CSV file (filename.csv) conforming to the following format and fields. The first row of the file must contain the column headings listed in this table; you can order these columns as desired. All columns are required.

Column name

First Name

Last Name

Email

Password

User Role

Groups

Description

The first name.

The last name.

A valid e-mail address.

A case-sensitive password string.

MediaPortalAdmin

MediaPortalUser

MediaPortalContributor

MediaPortalContributorUser

List of one or more account group assignments for each user, separated by commas. You specify the group by prefixing the account name separated by backslash (/) (for example, PortalCo/IT, where PortalCo is the account and IT is the group within the PortalCo account).

Following is a sample spreadsheet demonstrating how to lay out the CSV file:

First Name

Peter

Kevin

Last Name

Peterson

Marks

Email [email protected]

[email protected]

Password welcome welcome

User Role

MediaPortalAdmin

MediaPortalUser

Groups

PortalCo/IT,PortalCo/Admin

PortalCo/MktgGroup,

PortalCo/test

Upload the CSV file

1

Open the User Administration Setup screen.

2

Click Upload User List at the bottom of the user list.

3

In the Select File To Upload dialog box, select the CSV file and click Open.

29

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Setup

Each user in the list is automatically added to the groups specified. And, a Welcome e-mail message is sent to each.

Note: If the CSV file was not formatted correctly, the following error message appears: “An error occurred while processing the uploaded CSV file. Check the file contents for valid data.” In addition, if the CSV contains an existing IP or IPS user, the user is not added to the User List.

Email Communications

From the Email Communications screen, you can send e-mail messages to groups of users—to all users or to different classifications of administrators—in the same company. Use the Email Communications screen to send important information to the people whom you administer.

1

Open the Administration Setup screen, and then click Email Communications.

2

From the To menu, choose the group to send the message to.

3

Enter a subject for the message, enter the message itself, and click Send to send your message.

Messages are sent to the e-mail addresses on the User List of the User Administration screen.

More Help topics

“ Managing the user list ” on page 28

30

Media Portal groups and reports

Use the Media Portal Setup screens to manage groups and view reports.

Creating and managing Media Portal groups

Scene7 Media Portal groups simplify the administration of access permissions to folders and assets. To access an asset, a user must be a member of at least one group that has permission to access that asset. Administrators always have permission to access all content, regardless of their group membership.

Using groups to restrict access to folders and assets

To grant access permission at different levels, you create groups. For each group, you assign read, write, and delete permissions to different folders and assets in folders. You then assign users to groups. Users in a group have the same permission as the group. If a user does not have permission to read a folder or asset, the users do not see the folder or asset.

A user can be a member of more than one group. The group concept gives you the flexibility to assign access to limited sets of the total content available in an account.

If you don’t specifically grant a group permission to an asset or folder, that asset or folder inherits the permissions you assigned to its parent folder (the folder above it in the folder hierarchy). Grant permissions to a parent folder if you want to make sure that all its child folders inherit the same permissions.

Note: Users can belong to more than one group. When a user belongs to two groups with different access permissions to a folder, the user is granted the highest access.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Setup

Add a group

1

Open the Media Portal Setup screen, and then click Groups.

The Group List appears.

2

Click Add.

3

In the Add Group dialog box, enter a name for the group in the Group Name box and click Add Group.

31

Adding users to a group

4

Select the boxes next to the names of users you want to add to the new group.

5

If you want to specify access permissions at this time, click Access Permissions, and specify options as desired.

6

Click Close.

You can filter the names on the Account User List. (See “ Filter and sort the user list ” on page

you choose filter commands. You can limit the size of the list by selecting the Maximum List Size menu and choosing a number.

Establish access permissions for a group

1

Open the Media Portal Setup screen, and then click Groups.

The Group List appears.

2

Do one of the following:

To add a group and specify permissions, click Add. In the Add Group dialog box, enter a name for the group, select the Add Group button, and add users to the group.

To edit a group’s permissions, select the group and click Edit.

3

In the Add Group or Edit group dialog box, click the Access Permissions tab. This tab lists folders and subfolders in the account you are working in. The right side of the tab offers boxes for establishing read, write, and delete permissions for folders and assets. You can expand and collapse folders and subfolders in the left pane.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Setup

Establishing read, write, and delete permissions for folders and assets

4

To assign rights to folders or individual assets, select the folder in the left pane. The folder contents appear in the right pane. Then assign rights for the group by selecting the boxes for the corresponding files or folders in the right pane.

5

Click Close.

Important: Access rights are established as soon as you select a box. When you assign rights to a folder, its subfolders and all files within it are given the same rights as the parent folder. However, you can specify different rights for individual subfolders and asset files.

Edit a group

1

Open the Media Portal Setup screen, and then click Groups.

The Group List appears.

2

Select a group and click Edit.

3

Specify changes to users and permissions as desired.

4

Click Close.

Delete a group

1

Open the Media Portal Setup screen, and then click Groups.

The Group List appears.

2

Select a group and click Delete.

Viewing Media Portal reports and job logs

Media Portal offers reports and job logs to help you gauge your use of images and assets.

1

Open the Media Portal Setup screen, and then click Reports.

Last updated 5/21/2010

32

USING SCENE7

Setup

2

Select a report or job logs to view it.

Usage Reports

View usage reports on any user or account. The default screen shows all download activity for all users in the selected account. You can sort the output by Job Name, User Name, or Bandwidth by selecting a column heading. Select the Download Activity menu and choose a username to get a report about a specific user.

Export Job Logs

See reports on active and historical download jobs for the account you are working in. The

Complete Jobs list shows historical jobs; the Log Files list shows active jobs.

Concurrent Users

Find out the number of users currently logged in to Media Portal accounts, how many users logged in today, and when accounts were last changed.

33

Bandwidth, storage, and error reports

SPS Administrators can check bandwidth, storage, and image error reports for the companies they administer.

You can view reports for the currently selected company, or view a combined report for all the companies in your contract.

The following reports are available:

Bandwidth

Provides monthly, daily, or a summary report of total bandwidth used, volume in gigabytes, and number of requests made for the currently selected SPS company. You can view the information in either a bar chart or a data grid showing each data point.

Storage

Provides a month by month report on storage usage, up to the last 12 months. Results are displayed in either a bar chart, pie chart, or a data grid showing each data point. The summary storage report displays the current available storage.

Image Errors

Provides a list of the 20 most frequent image errors, for the past 24 hours, for the company you are currently logged in to.

View bandwidth or storage reports

Bandwidth reports give you the total monthly or daily total band with used in MBPS. You can choose different options for viewing the information, such as by graph or data points, and specify time ranges, and number of days or months reported. You can also export and print the reports.

Storage reports provide the current storage volume in gigabytes. The red bar at the top of the Chart View displays your contracts bandwidth maximum.

1

Open the Administration Setup screen, and then select Bandwidth or Storage.

2

Specify Chart View or Data View.

3

Choose an option from Report Type:

Summary bandwidth

Displays as a data list.

Summary storage

Displays as a pie chart.

Daily

Displays as a line chart when you are in Chart View.

Monthly

Displays as a bar chart when you are in Chart View.

4

Choose a start month and # of months.

5

Click Update.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Setup

Note: To view usage information for a different company, select a different company on the Select Company menu on the

Global Navigation bar.

Export or print bandwidth or storage reports

You can export the data from either the bandwidth or storage reports for use in spreadsheets or other applications.

You can export as Tab Delimited, Comma Separated, or HTML Formatted.

1

Open the report.

2

To export the report contents, choose a format from the Export menu and click Export. Then click OK to copy the content to the Clipboard.

3

To print the report, click Print. Specify printer options, and click Print.

View image error reports

Image error reports display a list of the 20 most frequent image errors from the last 24 hours.

1

Open the Administration Setup screen, and then select Image Errors.

Errors appear in a data list.

2

(Optional) Do any of the following:

• Click a heading to sort errors by the heading information. By default, errors are sorted by number of occurrences, highest to lowest.

• Move the cursor over the Response field for an error to see the specific error message.

Move the cursor over the URL field or the Referrer field to see the link to the image or referrer web page.

• Click the URL Copy URL button to copy the link to the actual image. You can paste this link in a browser window to go to the image and investigate the error.

Click the Referrer Copy URL button to copy the link to the referrer web page.

Note: To view usage information for a different company, select a different company on the Select Company menu on the Global Navigation bar.

Errors displayed are for the company you are currently logged in to. Each error includes the following information:

Image ID

ID for the offending image.

Time

The time range of the first time the error was reported to the last time the error was reported, within the last 24 hours.

Count

The number of errors reported on the image.

Response

The specific error message. Errors are either 4xx or 5xx.

URLs

Lists the URL to the image on Scene 7.

Referrer

Specifies the URL for the website where the initial request came from. The referrer can be any website that has a link to the image.

Both the URL and Referrer columns have Copy URL buttons associated with them to simplify testing.

34

Last updated 5/21/2010

Chapter 4: Upload and publish assets

Your work in Scene7 falls in three basic areas:

• Uploading file assets to the Scene7 Publishing System.

Managing your files so you can use them to build rich-media assets.

• Publishing your asset files to a Scene7 server so that they are available for delivery to your website and application.

When you upload asset files to SPS and when you publish asset files to Scene7 servers, the system records these file transfers on the Jobs screen. You can go to this screen to track and monitor your upload and publishing activities.

Important: When you upload a file, Scene7 generates the URL for the file. This URL is not active until you publish the file.

Uploading files

Before you upload assets files to the Scene7 Publishing System, make sure that the asset files are named correctly, and that your folder structure is set up and organized the way you want. You can upload files from a Scene7-provided FTP site or directly from your computer or network. Scene7 offers options for optimizing files as you upload them. If you installed Adobe Scene7 Publishing System desktop application, you can upload files and folders by dragging them

directly from your desktop. (See “ Application General Settings ” on page 14.)

Preparing your assets and folders for uploading

Before uploading assets to the Scene7 Publishing System, make sure that they are in the right format and size. You also have to observe the Scene7 rules for naming assets. By setting up a folder organization and structure for the files, you make sure you can locate and work with files easily.

Supported asset file formats

This table lists the asset file formats that the Scene7 Publishing System supports. For information on supported

Camera Raw files, see www.adobe.com/go/learn_s7_cameraraw_en .

Asset file formats

Color profiles

Flash

Fonts

Illustrator

Images

InDesign

MS Office

PDF

Photoshop

PostScript

Description

ICC, ICM

FLA, FLV, SWF

AFM, OTF, PFB, PFM, PhotoFont, TTC, TTF

AI, FXG

BMP, FPX, GIF, JPEG, JPG, PNG, PICT (Windows only), TIF, TIFF

INDD, INDT

DOC, PPT, RTF, XLS

PDF

ACO, PSD, FXG, and Camera Raw

EPS, PS

Last updated 5/21/2010

35

USING SCENE7

Upload and publish assets

Asset file formats

Scene7 Image Authoring

SVG

XML

XSLT

ZIP

FXG

Video

Description

VNC, VNT, VNW

SVG, SVGX

XML

XSL, XSLT

ZIP

FXG

AVI, GXF, LXF, MOV, MP4, MXF, VOB

Asset types

To achieve optimal results with the Scene7 platform, be sure to use the recommended file formats and sizes. This table lists asset types, some with recommended formats and file sizes for commonly used assets.

Asset type

Images (for Image Sizing, Zoom,

Image Sets, Spin Sets) eCatalogs

Templates

Videos

Fonts

Images

Image Sets and Swatch Sets

Spin Sets

ICC profiles

Viewer SWFs

Vignettes

Content files

Description/Recommendations

Images have to be at least 2000 pixels at the longest dimension; typical image sizes range from 1500 to 2500 pixels in the longest dimension. Lossless image formats, including TIFF and PNG files, are recommended. If you use a JPEG image, use the highest quality settings.

Use high-resolution PDF files created in Adobe

®

Acrobat

®

or a Creative Suite application saved as

“press-ready.” PDFs include all needed fonts, images, masks, and referenced graphical elements, either as single-pages, double-page spreads, or in a multi-page format. Order your pages by naming the files in alphanumeric order. Place all PDFs for your eCatalog in a single folder for ease of uploading. You can select cropping options on upload to remove the trim area from PDFs, including crop marks, registration targets, or color bars. Most press-ready PDF files are in the CMYK color space, so it is important to obtain the CMYK ICC color profile used with your PDF files.

Layered image or layout design that can include text, images, and layers. Image layers, text strings, and attributes, such as color and size, can be parameterized so that variable data can be customized. Image requirements for use in templates are the same as other images. Prepare your graphics in Photoshop or another image-editing program. Save each graphic as a flattened transparent file in TIFF or PNG format. Ensure that the image resolution is appropriate for expected use. Images for print should be

300 ppi.

Scene7 supports video files saved in the FLV format. Use a compression program to encode the video before uploading it.

Uploaded TrueType, Type1, OpenType fonts, and PhotoFonts

Images and layered image files.

A set of related images that can be displayed in a viewer.

A collection of images that allow a user to "spin" an image around to see it from all sides.

A color profile you can use to convert an uploaded image from its source color space into a different color space.

Custom-designed FLA files you can use as "skins" for various Scene7 viewers.

Images authored with the Image Authoring program, as well as related files.

Adobe InDesign, Illustrator, or Photoshop content files.

36

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Upload and publish assets

Asset type

SVG files

XML files

XSL files

Description/Recommendations

Scalable vector graphic files that Image Serving servers can render.

Files that define pre-processing rules that are used to modify the path and query portions of requests.

Translation tables that map your XML field names to SPS metadata fields.

Note: When you upload image files and PDFs to SPS, the system converts these source files to P-TIFF (Pyramid TIFF) files. These P-TIFFs are the files that are later published to Scene7 Image Servers. Scene7 uses the Pyramid Tiff file format because it contains various zoom ratios that allow for fast zooming when viewed with a Scene7 Zoom Viewer.

Filename requirements

Because filename extensions are stripped from filenames during the upload process, the system does not allow files to have the same root name. In the Scene7 system, the asset filename minus the filename extension becomes the asset ID for the asset. For this reason, no two assets can have the same name.

Make sure that all users in your company understand these file-naming rules:

Asset IDs with the same exact name are not allowed in the system.

• Asset ID names are case sensitive.

As a best practice, make sure that asset IDs do not contain blank spaces (for example, black jacket.tif and blue jacket.jpg). Scene7 ASCII-encodes blank spaces in asset names when it uses asset names to construct URL strings.

These ASCII codes are hard to read, which can make reading URLs more difficult.

In most cases, an asset filename can be the same as its item number, product SKU, or other name:

Item

896649

48A3_2X

Filename

896649.jpg

48A3_2X.tif

Asset ID

896649

48A3_2X

Folder organization and structure

Organize and structure folders and subfolders for your content in the Scene7 Publishing System before you upload your content to the system. Planning ahead this way has two major advantages:

• When you upload your content to SPS via FTP, you can tell the system to replicate your folder structure during the upload. This way, your content is organized in the same folders and subfolders in SPS as it is on your computer or network. (To replicate your folder structure in SPS, select the Include Subfolders option when you upload assets via FTP.)

• Reorganizing folders inside the system after files are uploaded is much more difficult than starting with a carefully considered folder structure.

The folder-naming approach and structure you choose for storing your content on the Scene7 Publishing System depends on the needs of your organization. Here are some sample folder structures:

SKU-based

Folders are named according to SKUs or item numbers. For example, separate folders are created for all

0-, 20-, 30- number series.

Brand-based

For manufacturers with multiple brand lines and retailers who market other brands from other companies, separate files into product folders named for different brands.

Project-based

Folders are organized according to rollout/drop date or project name. Clients who primarily produce eCatalogs favor this approach.

37

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Upload and publish assets

Mirror of website folder hierarchy

This folder structure mirrors the folder structure of the website, with the folders named, for example, for product categories.

More Help topics

“ Working with asset folders ” on page 49

Uploading your files

You can upload individual files from the desktop or upload folders via FTP. If you want to upload more than 100 MB of files or upload entire folders and subfolders, select Via FTP.

If you’ve installed the Scene7 Publishing System desktop application, you can drag files and folders directly from your desktop to the destination upload folder.

The Scene7 Publishing System sends you an e-mail message to confirm when your upload job begins and ends, and to notify you of any problems.

During (or immediately after) a large upload job, some new items may display the “Image not yet optimized” message.

This message appears because the files have not been fully processed and added to SPS. You can optimize these files

later. (See “ Optimize Files ” on page 22.)

More Help topics

“ Handling recurring upload and publish jobs ” on page 46

“ Using an upload or publish job as a trigger ” on page 48

Upload files from the desktop using Scene7

1

Click the Upload button on the Global Navigation bar.

2

Choose From Desktop.

3

Click the Browse button.

4

In the Select Files For Upload section, click Browse and select the files you want to upload, and then click Open

(Windows®) or Select (Mac OS®).

Note: As you select files, Scene7 lists their names on the Filenames list. You can remove a file by selecting it and selecting the Delete button.

5

In the Choose Folder Destination section, select a destination folder for the uploaded files.

6

Specify options as desired. (See “ Upload options ” on page 40.)

7

Click Start Upload.

The Jobs screen appears and shows you the progress of the upload. You can continue working in SPS and return to the Jobs screen at any time to review an in-progress job.

8

To cancel an upload job in progress, select the Cancel button next to the Duration time.

More Help topics

“ Handling recurring upload and publish jobs ” on page 46

“ Using an upload or publish job as a trigger ” on page 48

38

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Upload and publish assets

Upload files using Scene7 Desktop application

The Scene7 Publishing System Desktop application lets you upload files and folders by dragging them from desktop folders.

1

In the Scene7 Publishing System Desktop application, click the Upload button on the Global Navigation bar.

2

In the Add To SPS Folder section, select the destination folder for the uploaded files or folders.

3

Do one of the following:

Drag one or more files or folders from your desktop to the destination folder in the Add To SPS Folder panel.

• In the Desktop Folders panel, select a folder. In the Name column, select the folder or files you want to upload.

Click the Add Files button .

Note: When you add a folder, it appears under the selected destination folder.

4

To remove a file or folder from the destination folder, select it and click the Remove Files button .

5

Click Job Options and specify options as desired. (See “ Upload options ” on page 40.)

6

Click Start Upload.

The Jobs screen appears and shows you the progress of the upload. You can continue working in SPS and return to the Jobs screen at any time to review an in-progress job.

7

To cancel an upload job in progress, select the Cancel button next to the Duration time.

Upload files via FTP

To upload large quantities of files and folders, use the Via FTP option.

1

Upload your files to the Scene7 FTP site.

Log in to S7ftp2.scene7.com with the FTP user name and password you received from your administrator.

2

In Scene7, click the Upload button on the Global Navigation bar.

3

Select Via FTP.

4

Choose an FTP folder to upload files from, and then choose a destination folder in the Scene7 Publishing System.

5

Specify options as desired. (See “ Upload options ” on page 40.)

6

Click Start Upload.

The Jobs screen appears and shows you the progress of the upload. You can continue working in SPS and return to the Jobs screen at any time to review an in-progress job.

7

To cancel an upload job in progress, select the Cancel button next to the Duration time.

More Help topics

“ Handling recurring upload and publish jobs ” on page 46

“ Using an upload or publish job as a trigger ” on page 48

39

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Upload and publish assets

Upload options

When uploading files, you can choose from the following options:

Job Options

Select Job options for the entire upload job. These options are the same for all file types.

When (Via FTP uploads only)

Select One-Time or Recurring. To set a recurring job, choose a Repeat option—Daily,

Weekly, Monthly, or Custom—to specify when you want the publishing job to recur. Then specify the scheduling options as necessary.

Job Name

Enter a name for this upload job. The job and other upload and publishing jobs are recorded on the Jobs

screen, where you can check the status of jobs. See “ Checking job files ” on page 44.

Mark For Publish

Select this option to mark the files you upload so they are published to a Scene7 server. When you publish files, files that are marked for publish are sent to live servers. URLs for these files can then be used on external websites and applications. You can mark a file for publish after you upload it to SPS.

Overwrite in any folder, same base asset name

files with the same names.

Select this option if you want the files you upload to replace existing

Include subfolders (Via FTP uploads only)

Select this option if you want to upload subfolders of the folder you intend to upload. The names of the folder and its subfolders you upload are entered automatically in SPS.

Process metadata files (Via FTP uploads only)

Select this option if you want to upload a tab-delimited or XML file

to add SPS metadata to multiple assets. See “ Import SPS metadata (via FTP) ” on page 59.

Upload Options

Select Upload options for the type of files you are uploading. The options that appear depend on the file types you are uploading.

Image Editing Options

You can crop the images, preserve the clipping masks in images, and choose a color profile.

See “ Image editing options at upload ” on page 173.

PostScript Options

You can rasterize PostScript® files, crop files, maintain transparent backgrounds, choose a

resolution, and choose a color space. See “ Working with PostScript and Illustrator files ” on page 178.

Photoshop Options

You can create templates from Adobe® Photoshop® files, convert to FXG for Template

Publishing, crop files, maintain layers, specify how layers are named, extract text, and specify how images are anchored

into templates. See “ PSD upload options ” on page 176.

PDF Options

You can rasterize the files, extract search words and links, auto-generate an eCatalog, set the

resolution, and choose a color space. See “ PDF upload options ” on page 174.

Illustrator Options

You can rasterize Adobe Illustrator® files, convert to FXG for Template Publishing, crop files,

maintain transparent backgrounds, choose a resolution, and choose a color space. See “ Working with PostScript and

Illustrator files ” on page 178.

InDesign Options

You can convert InDesign files to FXG to create FXG templates for Template Publishing.

eVideo Options

page 136.

You can transcode a video file by choosing an Encoding Preset. See “ Encoding presets ” on

XML

You can specify an XSLT file to upload with your file.

Advanced

You can run the job under another users name by selecting their user name from the Run Job As menu.

You can also choose to follow this upload with another job. See “ Follow an upload with another job ” on page 41.

Projects

If you organize assets with Projects, add the files you are uploading to a project. (See “ Organizing your work with Projects ” on page 62.)

New Project

Select the Add To Project menu and choose Create Project. Then enter a name for the project.

40

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Upload and publish assets

Existing Project

Select the Add To Project menu and choose Use Existing Project. Then select a project name or names.

Batch Set Presets

If you want to create an Image Set or Swatch Set from the uploaded files, click the Active column for the preset you want to use. You can select more than one preset. You create the presets in the Application Setup/Batch

Set Presets screen. (See “ Batch Set Presets ” on page 23.)

Follow an upload with another job

When you upload items using FTP, you can schedule a subsequent job to begin as soon as the upload is complete. (If other jobs are scheduled to begin at that time, the job you schedule here will be queued after them.)

The new job sends a notification to the address you specify so that the code at that location can be triggered. This follow-on publishing job uses the same name as the upload job, but with the text Pub_ added to the beginning.

1

Click Upload, and choose FTP.

2

In the Advanced section, choose one of the following from the Follow Upload With Another Job option:

HTTP Request

• Image Serving Publish

Image Rendering Publish

• Video Publish

3

Specify the HTTP address.

4

Specify if you want to execute only if files were uploaded.

5

Indicate whether you want to execute this request every time this job completes, or only when files were published.

Note: Regularly scheduled jobs may not result in any files being published.

41

Publishing

You publish your assets to Scene7 Image Servers. You can publish assets on a one-time basis or arrange for Scene7 to publish assets on a recurring schedule. After your assets are published, they are available to you for delivery. You can copy the URL calls from the Scene7 Publishing System and add them to your website or application.

Marking assets for publish

Only items that are marked for publish are published to Scene7 Image Servers. Use these techniques to mark assets for publish:

Mark assets when you upload them to SPS

In the Upload screen, select the Mark For Publish option.

Mark several assets

Mark one asset

In the Browse Panel, select the Mark For Publish icon to the left of the asset name.

Some "child" assets are automatically marked for publish when their parents are marked for publish. This table lists child assets that are marked for publish automatically.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Upload and publish assets

Parent item

Image sets

Swatch sets

Spin sets

Templates

Child items

Images in the set

Swatches in the set

Images in the set

Template files, pages, and images

Derived images are also automatically marked for publish when you mark their parent images for publish. Derived images include images you adjusted with image-editing options. You can see these derived images in Detail view under

Built & Derivatives.

Creating a publish job

Create a publish job to publish assets you have marked for publish to Scene7 servers. You can perform a one-time publish job or schedule jobs to recur on a regular basis. Scene7 offers advanced publishing options for publishing to specific servers and options for republishing assets that have already been published.

Follow these basic steps to create a publish job:

1

Click the Publish button on the Global Navigation bar. The Publish screen opens.

2

Choose whether you want a one-time or recurring publish job. See “ Creating a one-time publish job ” on page 42 and “ Creating a recurring publish job ” on page 42.

3

Enter a job name.

4

Optionally, display the Advanced options and choose these options. See “ Advanced publish options ” on page 43.

5

Select the Start Publish button.

SPS tracks publish jobs on the Jobs screen. You can review publish jobs on that screen.

Important: Assets you republish (you have published them before) do not appear immediately on your website because

of the web caching mechanism on the content delivery network (CDN). See “ Republished assets and CDN delays ” on

More Help topics

“ Canceling a publish job ” on page 43

“ Checking job files ” on page 44

“ Editing, deleting, pausing, and resuming recurring jobs ” on page 46

Creating a one-time publish job

Create a one-time publish job by selecting the One-Time option on the Publish screen.

If you want the publish job to occur at a later date, select the When menu, and choose Schedule For Later. Then use the Calendar and Time slider to select a day and time to execute the publish job.

Creating a recurring publish job

Create a recurring publish job by selecting the Recurring option on the Publish screen.

42

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Upload and publish assets

Then choose a Repeat option—Daily, Weekly, Monthly, or Custom—to declare when you want the publishing job to recur. Scene7 presents calendar tools for scheduling the recurring publish job. You can choose the Custom option and

enter a rule in the Rule box to describe a custom job interval. See “ Creating a custom upload or publish job time interval ” on page 46.

Note: Recurring publish (and upload) jobs are listed on the Jobs screen. You can edit or delete a scheduled job by going to the Scheduled tab of the Jobs screen.

Advanced publish options

You can display the Advanced options on the Publish screen and choose these options for handling a publish job:

Publish To

Choose a server type to publish assets only to a specific server, not to all servers.

Publish

By default, SPS publishes only assets that are new and have not been published before (the New Since Last

Publish option). However, you can choose Full Publish to also publish assets that have been updated or changed since they were last published. Choose Full w/ Search Data if you are publishing an eCatalog and you want readers to be able to search it by keyword.

Run Job As

Choose a user name from the list. You can sort jobs by user name on the Jobs screen. By choosing a name, you associate a publish job with a user.

HTTP Notification

Enter a URL to trigger subsequent publish jobs. (See “ Using an upload or publish job as a trigger ” on page 48.)

Canceling a publish job

You can cancel an in-progress publish job. Moreover, if you are an administrator, you can cancel an in-progress publishing job from the company Jobs screen.

To cancel a publishing job, go to the Jobs screen and select the Cancel button . On the Scheduled tab of the Jobs screen, you can pause or resume a job by unselecting or selecting the check box in the job’s Active column.

Note: After you cancel a publish job, its status changes to “stopping” until the job reaches a point where it can stop safely.

Stopping a publish job can take some time if the job is in the process of getting data from the database.

Getting an asset’s publish history

The last date an asset was published is shown in Detail view at the top of the panel. You can get more details about the publishing history by opening the History & Published Servers panel in Detail view. From there, you can see when the asset was published and to which servers it was published.

More Help topics

“ Checking job files ” on page 44

Republished assets and CDN delays

Scene7 assets are distributed on the content delivery network (CDN). CDN is a system of computer servers networked together that cooperate transparently to deliver content, especially large media content, to end users. In the CDN system, web content is stored in web caches across the Internet (called the edge cache network). Web content is delivered from these web caches to end users to make for faster deliveries.

43

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Upload and publish assets

The first time someone downloads a web page, the assets are delivered to a CDN web cache server. They are stored on this server so that the next time someone in the same area accesses the web page, the same cached content can be delivered faster. The content is delivered faster because it is located closer to the end user. CDN makes for faster web page displays. It decreases bandwidth demands on the central server because content is delivered from the edge cache network, not from a central server in every instance.

Newly published Scene7 content is available immediately to the end user and quickly populates the edge cache network. However, newly republished content—images that have the exact same names as images previously published to an image server—is not updated on CDN for up to ten hours. Instead, end users see what is in a web cache on the CDN network. For this reason, your Scene7 republished assets may not appear to end users for ten hours.

If you want your newly republished image assets to be available sooner than the ten-hour delay, you can request that

Scene7 flush web caches on CDN. Flushing these web caches removes old content from CDN web caches and replaces it with your most recently published assets.

To request that Scene7 clear the cache for a URL, e-mail the URLs to Scene7 tech support.

44

Checking job files

To help you monitor file uploads to the Scene7 Publishing System and files you publish to Scene7 servers, SPS offers the Jobs screen. You can review upload and publish jobs on the Jobs screen, check the status of jobs, and cancel publishing jobs from this screen. You can also schedule upload and publishing jobs.

When you upload or publish assets, a spinning icon appears next to the Jobs menu, indicating a job is in process, and the number of files in progress. You can click the icon to see more information about the active job.

The Jobs screen is for monitoring upload and publish jobs.

Note: A list of your recently published jobs is also available on the home screen.

About the Jobs screen

Select the Jobs button on the Global Navigation bar to open the Jobs screen. By default, jobs are listed starting with the most recent.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Upload and publish assets

Jobs are listed in these categories on the History tab of the Jobs screen:

Job Type

An icon indicates the job type: Upload and Publish are the most common job types.

Job Name

The name of the job. The name includes the user-entered portion of the name and the date-and-time stamp.

Started

When the job started.

Total

The number of files transferred.

W (warnings)

The number of warnings in the job (if any). Warnings indicate problems with the job that did not affect overall job completion. These warnings can usually be ignored because they report on hidden files. For example,

.DS_store files (Macintosh) and Thumbs.db files (Windows) contain information about how to display image files to users. Warning entries regarding these files, however, can be ignored because they don’t pertain to how these files are used in Scene7. You can double-click a job name to get detailed information about warnings.

E (errors)

Lists the number of errors in the job (if any). You can double-click a job name to get detailed information about errors.

Duration

How long it took to complete the job.

Destination

For upload jobs, the company name and folder to which the files were uploaded. This category doesn’t apply to publish jobs.

Submitted By

Lists who uploaded the assets.

Note: You can cancel in-progress publish and upload jobs by clicking the Cancel button

next to the progress bar.

More Help topics

“ Changing views on the Jobs screen ” on page 45

Changing views on the Jobs screen

Use these techniques to sort jobs or change your view of the History tab of the Jobs screen:

Sorting

Select a column name to sort the list by a particular column. You can select the switch beside the column name to sort in descending or ascending order.

Date Range

Select the Date Range menu and choose an option to narrow the list of jobs to the current date, the previous week, or the previous month. Choose Custom Date Range to enter a specific date range.

Job Type

Select the Job Type menu and choose Publish or Upload to narrow the list to publish jobs or upload jobs.

Choose All to see both types of jobs.

Show

Choose Show > My Jobs or Show > All Jobs to narrow the list to jobs you ordered or jobs that people in your company ordered.

More Help topics

“ About the Jobs screen ” on page 44

“ Viewing, copying, or printing a Job Details report ” on page 45

Viewing, copying, or printing a Job Details report

The Job Details screen provides a summary report about the files in the job. The View Detail portion for individual entries lists the files in the job by the asset’s SPS ID, destination path, and status information, such as why a specific file could not be uploaded. If you uploaded a PDF or PostScript file that requires fonts that are not already available in

SPS, the report lists the missing fonts.

Last updated 5/21/2010

45

USING SCENE7

Upload and publish assets

You can copy this information to the Clipboard, or print the information listed in the details section of the Job Details page.

1

Double-click the name of a report on the Jobs screen to open the Job Details screen.

2

Click View Detail to get a detailed report about a report entry.

3

Do any of the following:

• Right-click and choose Print (Windows) or Control-click and choose Print (Mac OS).

Click Copy To Clipboard to copy the contents of the detailed report to the Clipboard.

More Help topics

“ About the Jobs screen ” on page 44

Handling recurring upload and publish jobs

Recurring upload and publish jobs that you create on the Upload and Publish screens are listed on the Scheduled tab of the Jobs screen. You can edit and delete recurring jobs on the Scheduled tab.

Select the Jobs button on the Global Navigation bar and, on the Jobs screen, select the Scheduled tab to edit and delete recurring jobs.

Note: You can filter the job list on the Scheduled tab with the Job Type and Show menus. Choose a Job Type to narrow the list to publish jobs of a specific kind. Choose a Show option to display jobs you created or jobs created by everyone in your company.

Editing, deleting, pausing, and resuming recurring jobs

Select a recurring job on the Jobs screen and follow these instructions to edit or delete it:

Editing a recurring job

Select the Edit button and enter schedule information in the Edit Scheduled Job dialog box. If

you want the job to recur at an interval of your choice, choose Repeat > Custom. See “ Creating a custom upload or publish job time interval ” on page 46.

Deleting a recurring job

Select the Delete button.

Pausing (and resuming) a recurring job

In the Active column, unselect a check box to pause a job; click a check box to resume a job that was paused.

Creating a custom upload or publish job time interval

To create a custom time interval for an upload (via FTP) or a publish job, choose Repeat > Custom on the Upload or

Publish screen. Then enter numbers and wildcards in the Rule box to describe a time interval for the upload or publish jobs to recur.

The syntax for describing custom upload and publish time intervals in the Rule box is:

[seconds] [minutes] [hour of day] [day of month] [month] [day of week]

For example,

0 15 10 * * ?

schedules a job at 10:15.00 every day.

The following tables and list explain how to describe a time interval in the Rule box.

This table shows the time increments, their allowed values, and the wildcards they support:

46

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Upload and publish assets

Time increments

Seconds

Minutes

Hours

Day of the month

Month

Day of the week

Values allowed

0–59

0–59

0–23

1–31

Comments Wildcards supported

, - * /

, - * /

, - * / Note the use of a 24-hour clock.

You cannot specify a numeric value for both

“day of the month” and “day of the week.”

One of these fields must use a ? wildcard character.

, - * / ? L C

Values are case sensitive. , - * / 1–12 or Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr,

May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Sep,

Oct, Nov, Dec

Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat,

Sun

Empty or 1970–2099

Values are case sensitive. You cannot specify a numeric value for both “day of the month” and “day of the week.” One of these fields must use a ? wildcard character.

, - * / ? L C #

, - * / Year (optional)

This table describes the wildcard characters that are allowed in the Rule box and how to use them:

Wildcard character

-

,

*

?

/

L

#

C

Name

Asterisk

Question mark

Comma

Hyphen

Forward slash

Capital L

Number sign

# Capital C

What it describes

All values (for example, “every minute”).

No specific value (for example, “any minute within the specified hour”).

Additional values (for example, “Monday and Wednesday”).

Range of values (for example, “Monday through Friday”).

Increments (for example, “every 15 minutes”).

Last “day of the month” or “day of the week” (available for these fields only).

For example, if the month is January, an L value for the “day of the month” field schedules the job for January 31.

For the “day of the week” field, you can enter this character alone to schedule the job on Saturday. You can use it with a number (for example, 6L) to specify the last Friday of the month.

Do not specify L with the comma or hyphen wildcards.

“Nth” weekday of the month (available for the “day of the week” field only).

For example, 6#3 in the “day of the week” field specifies the third Friday of the month. The 6 denotes “Friday” (the sixth day of the week) and the 3 denotes the third occurrence in the month.

First calendar “day of the month” or “day of the week” (available for these fields only). For example, specifying a value of 1C for “day of the month” schedules the first day in the calendar that occurs on or after the fifth.

For the “day of the week” field, specifying 1C schedules the first day in the calendar that occurs on or after Sunday

This list gives examples of describing time intervals in the Rule box:

• 0 0 12 * * ?: Noon every day

0 15 10 ? * *: 10:15 am every day

47

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Upload and publish assets

• 0 0/5 14 * * ?: Every 5 minutes between 2:00 and 2:55 pm every day

0 0/5 14,18 * * ?: Every 5 minutes between 2:00 and 2:55 pm every day and every 5 minutes between 6:00 and 6:55 pm every day

0 10,44 14 ? 3: Wed at 2:10 pm and 2:44 pm every Wednesday in March

• 0 15 10 ? *: Mon–Fri at 10:15 am every weekday

0 15 10 20 * ?: At 10:15 am on the 20th day of every month

• 0 15 10 L * ?: At 10:15 am on the last day of every month

0 15 10 ? * 6L: At 10:15 am on the last Friday of every month

• 0 15 10 * * 6#3: At 10:15 am on the third Friday of every month

Using an upload or publish job as a trigger

When you upload assets via FTP or run a publish job, you can schedule a subsequent job to begin as soon as the upload is complete. (If other jobs are scheduled to begin at that time, the job you schedule here is queued behind them.) The new job sends a notification to the address you specify so that code at that location can be triggered. This follow-on upload job is given the same name as the current upload job, but with the prefix _Pub.

To make one upload or publish job trigger another job, select Advanced on the Upload or Publish screen. Then enter the URL in the HTTP Notification box.

48

Last updated 5/21/2010

Chapter 5: Managing assets

Scene7 offers the Asset Library for managing assets. The Asset Library holds the folders where you store your asset files. Selecting a folder in the Asset Library displays the contents of the folder in the Browse Panel. You can view items in the Browse Panel in Grid, List, or Detail view. When you want to focus on a single asset, double-click it in the Browse

Panel to display it in Detail view.

The Browse Panel offers tools for viewing, selecting, locating, previewing, moving, renaming, and deleting assets.

Assets that you delete are placed in the Trash folder; you can recover assets from this folder.

When you want to examine or work with an asset, open it in Detail view. You can record metadata in Detail view to make locating and working with an asset easier.

Working with asset folders

File assets in the Scene7 Publishing System are kept in folders. These folders are listed in alphabetical order in the Asset

Library Panel. Before you upload files from your computer or network to SPS, you are asked to name a folder for storing the files. Create these folders before uploading any files.

Be sure to establish a folder structure and organization for storing your files on SPS before you upload files.

Displaying, hiding, and opening folders

The Asset Library displays files in a folder tree. When you select a folder in the Asset Library, its contents appear in the

Browse Panel. Use these techniques to locate folders in the folder tree:

Displaying subfolders

Select the Expand Folder icon to display the subfolders in a folder. This icon is located to the left of folder names.

Hiding folders

Select the Collapse Folder icon to collapse subfolders. This icon is located to the left of folder names.

Opening a folder

Select a folder to display its contents in the Browse Panel.

You can hide or display the Asset Library by clicking the Expand/Collapse control on its left side. Collapse the Asset

Library panel when you need more room to work in the Browse Panel.

Creating folders

Follow these steps to create a folder:

1

In the Asset Library, select the folder you want to create a folder in.

2

Select the Add Folder button . This icon is located at the top of the folder list.

3

Enter a descriptive name for your new folder or subfolder by typing it into the field next to the folder icon.

You can also create folders in SPS when you upload files via FTP. Selecting the Include Subfolders option when you upload via FTP replicates the folder structure on your computer in the system. Files and subfolders on your computer or network are replicated in the Asset Library, and the assets you upload are placed in these folders.

49

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Managing assets

Deleting and renaming folders

Select a folder and use these techniques to delete or rename it:

Deleting

Select the Remove Folder button . Assets in a deleted folder are placed in the Trash folder. You can recover them from there.

Renaming

Click the name and enter a new name, or select File > Rename and enter a new name.

Important: You cannot copy folders or assets because doing so would create duplicate folders and assets on SPS, and duplicates are not allowed on the system.

50

Viewing assets in the Browse Panel

You can change your view of assets in the Browse Panel by selecting a View button:

Grid view

Select the Grid View button to see assets in thumbnail form in a grid. In Grid view, you can drag the

Thumbnail slider to change the size of the thumbnail images.

List view

Select the List View button to see assets in a list. The list tells you the name, type, creation date, and lastmodification date of each asset. Depending on the type of asset you are working with, you get other information as well. For example, you can see the dimensions and file size of an image.

Detail view

Select an asset, and then select the Detail View button to examine the asset in Detail view. You can also double-click an asset or select it and choose File > Details to see it in Detail view. If your administrator has specified the Show URL preference, URLs appear for all assets in Detail view; however, the URLs are only active once the asset has been published.

You can select a default view for the Browse Panel and make the panel work to your specifications. See “ Personal

Setup ” on page

Selecting assets in the Browse Panel

Select an asset in the Browse Panel to work with it. Use these techniques to select assets:

A single asset

Click the asset (double-clicking opens the asset in Detail view).

Several assets

Ctrl+click (Windows) or Command+click (Macintosh) assets to select assets in different places on the

Browse Panel. Shift+click (click one asset, and then Shift+click another) to select adjacent assets.

All assets in the Browse Panel

Choose Select > All.

No assets

Choose Select > None.

Searching assets

To locate file assets in SPS, you can view assets by type, sort assets in the Browse Panel, use a Search command, or use

XMP metadata filters.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Managing assets

More Help topics

“ Navigation basics ” on page 9

Viewing assets by type

To see only files of a certain type as you browse, open the Show All Asset Types menu in the Asset Library and choose a file type. Only assets of the type you choose appear in the Asset Library.

Sorting files in the Browse Panel

To sort the contents of a folder or search results in the Browse Panel, select the Sort menu and choose an option. The options are Name, Type, Date Created, Last Modified, or Size. You can choose Ascending or Descending to sort assets in ascending or descending order by the criteria you choose.

Conducting a simple search

Use the Search field to conduct simple searches. You can search for items by name or search for items whose metadata contains a particular word or phrase.

1

To search in a particular folder and its subfolders, select the folder in the Asset Library.

2

Click the Search button in the Asset Library and choose an option that describes how narrow or broad you want the search to be. Choose All Files & Folders, Selected Folder, Selected Folder & Subfolders, or Search in XMP

Metadata (All Folders).

3

Enter a search term. You can enter an asset name or metadata information.

4

Click Go.

The results of your search appear in the Browse Panel. Click the Clear Search button to clear the search results.

Scene7 tracks searches. To run a search a second time, select the Search button and choose the name of a search at the bottom of the Search menu.

Conducting an advanced search

1

Click Advanced Search in the Asset Library to search using many criteria, including values in metadata fields.

2

Specify any of the following criteria to aid in your search:

Search

Specify whether you want to search on IPS Metadata or XMP Metadata. IPS Metadata is metadata you’ve imported or uploaded into Scene7. XMP metadata is metadata that is included with files and uploaded automatically with the file. You can also add XMP metadata for an asset in Details View.

Asset Types

Narrow your search to one asset type only by choosing an asset type on the menu.

Files & Folders

Choose where you want to search: All Files & Folders, Selected Folder, or Selected Folder &

Subfolders.

All Publish States

Search for files that are marked ready for publish, are not marked ready for publish, or all files.

Conditions

If you establish metadata criteria for searching, select whether the search meets all criteria (an ALL search) or any criterion (an OR search).

Metadata criteria

Create one or more search fields for searching metadata. To create a search field, select the Add a Field menu and choose a field name. For text fields, enter a search term and choose a Contains option (Contains,

Does Not Contain, Begins With, Ends With, or Equals). For numeric fields, choose a value or enter a custom date range.

Last updated 5/21/2010

51

USING SCENE7

Managing assets

3

Click Search to begin your search. The results of the search appear in the Browse Panel.

4

Click Clear to clear search criteria and start a new search. Click Close when you finish searching to close the Search panel.

More Help topics

“ Adding and exporting metadata ” on page 57

Filter assets using XMP metadata presets

Use XMP metadata to easily search for and filter assets using metadata fields and presets. Company administrators create search templates to make it easy to find the assets that contain the relevant metadata for different projects or workflows.

For more information about XMP metadata, see www.adobe.com/go/learn_s7_xmp_en .

1

Click Filters in the Asset Library.

2

Click Select Preset and choose a preset to use for your search.

The preset determines the different metadata panels and fields that appear in the Asset Library. Company administrators create these preset lists of metadata.

3

In each panel, click the metadata fields for the files you want to view. You can select multiple metadata fields in each panel.

The files that match the selected metadata appear in the Browse panel.

4

To filter assets using different metadata, do one of the following:

• To replace a metadata panel, click the Field icon for the panel, and select a new panel from the list.

To add an additional metadata pane, click the Field icon for any panel, select Add A Panel. A new panel appears in the Asset Library. Click the Field icon for this panel and choose a metadata field from the list.

5

To remove a metadata panel, click the Field icon for the panel, and choose Remove This Panel.

More Help topics

“ Manually enter metadata for an asset ” on page 58

“ Metadata Presets ” on page 21

“ User-Defined Fields ” on page 22

52

Previewing assets

1

Select one or more assets in the Browse Panel and use one of these techniques to view it in a Scene7 viewer in the

Preview window:

Click the Preview button.

• Choose File > Preview.

The Preview screen shows you what the asset looks like in a Scene7 viewer. If you select an image, the Preview screen allows you to see the image in a Zoom viewer or with different Image Presets.

2

(Optional) Choose a different viewer from the Presets menu.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Managing assets

An image in the Guided Zoom viewer

You can open more than one asset in the Preview screen by selecting more than one before selecting the Preview button. In the Preview screen, select the Forward or Backward button to page from asset to asset.

Moving, renaming, or deleting assets

You can move, rename, or delete assets from the Browse Panel. As well, you can delete many assets simultaneously with a text file.

More Help topics

“ Selecting assets in the Browse Panel ” on page 50

“ Preparing your assets and folders for uploading ” on page 35

“ Restoring assets from the Trash folder ” on page 62

Move assets

You can move assets to different folders in the Browse Panel.

Select the asset or assets in the Browse Panel, and do one of the following:

Display the folder you want to move the assets to in the Asset Library and drag the assets to the folder.

• Choose File > Move, select a folder in the Move Assets window, and select Submit.

Last updated 5/21/2010

53

USING SCENE7

Managing assets

Rename assets

To rename an asset, select it and use one of these techniques:

Select the asset in the Browse Panel, and do one of the following:

• Select the name, type in a new name, and press Enter or click away from the name.

Choose File > Rename. The name of the asset is highlighted. Enter a new name and press Enter.

Be sure not to enter the name of an existing SPS asset.

Delete assets

You can delete selected assets in the Browse Panel as well as delete entire folders. Deleted assets and folders are moved to the Trash folder, where they remain for seven days before being permanently deleted.

When you delete an asset, all assets derived from it are deleted as well. For example, deleting an image for which you created zoom targets deletes the zoom targets along with the image.

Important: Zoom targets, image attributes, and history entries are permanently deleted when you delete the assets from which they derive. They are not moved along with the asset to the Trash folder; they cannot be restored from the Trash.

Do any of the following:

• To delete one or more assets, select the assets in the Browse Panel, and press Delete or choose File > Delete.

To delete a folder, select the folder in the Asset Library, and click Remove Folder .

Deleting a folder deletes the folder, all the assets in the folder, as well as all assets in its subfolders.

Note: Scene7 recommends overwriting asset files rather than deleting them if your reason for deleting an asset file is to replace it with another by the same name. Assets that have been moved to the Trash folder are still part of SPS. If you upload a file that has the same name as a file in the Trash folder, Scene7 appends the filename with a numeral to create a unique asset name.

Delete multiple assets with a text file

To delete many assets at once throughout the Asset Library, you can list the assets you want to delete in a text file and submit the list to Scene7.

Create the list of SPS IDs and save it as a text (.txt) file. Each SPS ID must be on its own line (followed by a hard return).

After you create the list, follow these steps to use it to delete assets:

1

Choose File > Delete Asset List.

2

In the Delete Asset list dialog box, browse or type the path to the text file with the list of assets you want to delete.

3

Click the Delete button.

Deleting assets with a text file generates an entry on the Job screen and an e-mail notificaton message. Any SPS IDs on the list that couldn’t be found and deleted generate an error on the Job screen.

54

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Managing assets

Working in Detail view

You can work with and learn about an asset by opening it in Detail view. In Detail view, you see the asset size, attributes, derivatives, SPS metadata, and XMP Metadata. You also see whether and when the asset was published and obtain the URL of published assets. Depending on the asset type, you can preview it at different sizes, zoom in on it, and perform sharpening, cropping, and other formatting operations.

55

An asset in Detail view.

To open the folder where the asset is stored, you can click the folder name at the top of the Information panel.

Open an asset in Detail view

To closely examine, preview, or work on an asset, you can display it in Detail view.

In the Browse Panel, do one of the following:

Double-click the asset.

• Select the asset and then select the Detail View button

Select the asset, and choose File > Details.

.

You can page from asset to asset in the same folder in Detail view by selecting the Previous Asset or Next Asset button.

These buttons are located in the upper-right corner in Detail view.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Managing assets

Getting information in Detail view

Detail view provides information about an asset or file. It shows this information about an item: the folder where it is stored, its filename, the date the item was uploaded to SPS, and its publishing history. You can also view and edit metadata and add keywords for an item in Detail view.

You can obtain an asset URL in Detail view; however, the URL is not active until you publish the asset. For images,

Detail view also provides a list of build and derived assets and metadata, such as zoom targets and Image Sets.

Note: The metadata eVideoSize for Video Recuts will not appear in the Metadata panel until an administrator logs in for the first time after upgrading your version of Scene7 Publishing System. The eVideoSize metadata states the size of the video when the Video Recut was saved.

More Help topics

“ Adding and exporting metadata ” on page 57

“ Fonts ” on page 180

Working with assets in Detail view

Detail view offers tools for working with the asset you opened. Which tools are available depends on the type of asset you are working with, but Detail view always offers these functions:

Marking and unmarking items for publish

Select the Mark For Publish icon >

Mark For Publish or File > Unmark For Publish.

Renaming the asset

Select the name and enter a new name.

Editing and adding metadata

Select the XMP Metadata panel and make changes as desired. See “ Adding and exporting metadata ” on page 57.

Editing and adding keywords

Select Keywords and add or remove them as desired. See “ Add or edit keywords ” on page 58.

Deleting the asset

Choose File > Delete.

For discrete files—images, Image Sets, and fonts, for example—you can view the publishing and editing history, and check job details, in Detail view.

This table shows which additional options are available with different types of assets in Detail view.

Asset type

Images

Preview

Yes; Zoom and Image Presets

ACO files

Cabinet and window covering images eCatalogs

Flash source files

Edit/adjust

Add Image Maps

Add zoom targets

Crop

Sharpen

Create adjusted views

No

No

Edit

No

No

Thumbnail

Yes. Info Panel also available

No

56

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Managing assets

Asset type

Fonts

FXG files

ICC profiles

Illustrator Files

Image Sets

InDesign files

PDF files

PSD files

Spin sets

SVG files

Templates

Videos

Viewer SWF files

Vignettes and rendered vignettes

Edit/adjust

Edit font information

Yes

Edit profile information

No (unless converted to FXG)

Edit

No (unless converted to FXG)

No

No

No

No

Yes for individual layers

Edit

No

Edit

XML files

XSL files

ZIP files

No

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

Preview

No

Yes

No

Yes for individual layers

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

No

Image is shown. You can view the contents and structure of the renderable elements of the vignette in XML format

Contents are shown

Contents are shown

Contents are shown

Adding and exporting metadata

You can store information specific to the files you work with in the Scene7 Publishing System; this information is called metadata. You can use SPS Metadata and XMP Metadata within Scene7. You can use metadata in Scene7 for searching, filtering, and sorting your assets.

Metadata appears in Detail view along with Scene7-generated information, such as the file creation date, publishing date, and keywords. To view metadata, open the asset in Detail view and select either SPS Metadata or XMP Metadata in the panel. You can enter and edit XMP metadata in Detail View. Administrators can create XMP metadata presets for specific workflows.

Extensible Metadata Platform (XMP) is metadata that has been embedded directly into a file. If a file contains XMP metadata, Scene7 automatically uploads it with the file. XMP support is built into all Adobe applications, so you can embed the XMP metadata you want into your source assets in Adobe Photoshop, InDesign, Illustrator, or other application, and leverage it in Scene7. You can also add metadata to individual files in the XMP Metadata panel in

Detail view. To ensure consistency across assets, company administrators create XMP Metadata templates that provide the metadata fields that can be filled in.

For more information about XMP metadata, see www.adobe.com/go/learn_s7_xmp_en .

57

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Managing assets

More Help topics

“ Metadata Presets ” on page 21

“ User-Defined Fields ” on page 22

Manually enter metadata for an asset

1

Open the asset in Detail view.

2

Do one of the following:

To edit XMP metadata, click XMP Metadata. Select the Metadata Views and Presets Values you want to use, and click Apply. Then edit the desired information. These presets are created by company administrators.

• To edit SPS metadata, click SPS Metadata and edit the desired information.

To edit the SPS metadata of several assets at once, select the assets and choose File > Edit Info. Edits you make to metadata in the Edit Info window apply to all the assets you selected.

Add or edit keywords

In addition to metadata, you can use keywords to assist in searching and managing your assets.

If you’ve added keywords to other files during this session, or if you’ve removed keywords from your list, they appear in the Keyword Suggestions table.

1

Open the file in Detail View.

2

Click Keywords.

3

To add keywords, do any of the following:

Type a keyword in the text box and click Add.

• Click a keyword in the Keyword Suggestions table.

4

To remove a keyword, select it and click Remove. It moves to the Keyword Suggestions table.

Import SPS metadata

Rather than manually edit SPS metadata, you can import this metadata from a tab-delimited or XML file. In the first row of the tab-delimited file, enter the ID and the names of fields to be modified. To import SPS metadata from an

XML file, make sure that you conform to the DTD.

1

Select the images in the Browse Panel.

2

Select File > Import Metadata. The Import Metadata screen opens.

3

Select the Browse button, and in the Select File(s) To Upload dialog box, select the tab-delimited or XML file with the metadata.

4

If you are importing an XML data file and you want to use an XSL translation table that you previously added to

SPS, choose that table from the XSLT File menu. (However, if your Java™ runtime environment on your server doesn't support XSLT, the list doesn’t appear.)

5

Enter a job name.

6

Click Upload.

58

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Managing assets

Import SPS metadata (via FTP)

You can import SPS metadata for multiple files by entering the metadata in a tab-delimited or XML file and selecting the Process metadata files option on the Upload (Via FTP) screen.

Make sure the data in the tab-delminited or XML file is in the correct format. In the first row, enter the ipsid field followed by the names of SPS metadata fields to be modified. In each subsequent row, enter an asset ID name followed by metadata values. Fields that are not included in the tab-delimited or XML file are not modified.

Selet the Jobs button on the Global Navigation Bar, and on the Jobs screen, select the Via FTP tab to import the SPS metadata. Under Set Upload Options, click the Process metadata files check box.

Export an SPS metadata template

You can export image metadata that you’ve imported or added to your assets.

1

Select the images from which you want to export metadata.

2

Choose File > Import Metadata.

3

Select Image for the SPS Metadata Type.

4

From the Generate File menu, Select Tab Delimited Template, Assets XML Metadata, or XML DTD.

5

Click Generate.

Batch rename IDs using metadata

Using metadata imported from a tab-delimited file or XML file, you can rename SPS IDs. The imported metadata is applied only to the images specified in the metadata file itself. It doesn't matter whether images are selected on the

Browse Panel.

To rename an image’s SPS ID, add a column labeled newipsid to the tab-delimited file, or add a field called

new_vc_objectname to the XML data.

For example:

ipsid

testjacket_1 testjacket_blue

newipsid

Jacket_test_1

Jacket_test_2

The job log for the Metadata job will show which IDs were successfully renamed and which ones were not.

59

Exporting assets from SPS

You can save assets you edited in SPS to a local network drive. If you have access to Media Portal features, you can use the Media Cart to export the images. Exported files are bundled in a ZIP file for downloading or sending by e-mail.

Scene7 keeps a record of export jobs in the Jobs screen.

Export assets using SPS

1

Select the assets you want to export, and choose File > Export.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Managing assets

2

In the Export Selected Images window, specify any of the following options (administrators determine which options are available to their users):

Presets

Optionally, choose an Image Preset to format the asset when you export it. If you choose an Image Preset, the other formatting options are not available, as the asset adopts the formats defined by the Image Preset.

Conversion

Convert the asset file or the original image.

Size

You can select a standard size.

Format

Choose an image format.

Color

Choose RGB, CMYK, or Gray.

Resolution

Choose 72, 150, or 300 ppi.

Job Name

You can assign a job name to the export.

Send Email To

Optionally, enter an e-mail address to send the assets by e-mail. The e-mail message lists the URL where the recipient can go to download the assets.

3

Click Export.

Export assets using the Media Cart

If you are a Media Portal Administrator, you can use the Media Cart to export assets to your computer. You can choose to export by downloading the assets directly to your computer, or by sending them by e-mail. As you export assets, you can dynamically reformat them by changing their file formats, size, scale, color space, and resolution.

You can process any number of assets automatically by simply adding them to the Media Cart and selecting an operation.

1

Click Media Cart at the upper-right of the Browse panel to open the Media Cart.

2

Add the assets you want to download to the Media Cart by doing one of the following:

• Select one or more assets in the Browse panel and click Add To Cart.

Drag one or more assets from the Browse panel to the Media Cart.

• Drag one or more folders from the Folder list to the Media Cart. If the folder contains subfolders, you are asked if you want to add them as well.

Note: To remove assets from the cart, drag them back to the Browse panel.

3

Click Export. The Export Selected Files dialog box appears.

4

In the Export Selected Files dialog box, specify any of the following:

Note: Your administrator controls reformatting features. Some of the features described may not appear in the Export

Selected Files dialog box you see.

Presets

Your administrator defines these export settings. These settings are one-step settings for common conversions like PowerPoint, sell sheet, Web banner, and ¼ page Web.

Conversion

Convert the image or export the original image. If you choose Convert File, conversion settings become available.

Size

Choose a standard pixel size or choose Other and enter Width and Height settings. For a measurement unit, you can choose Pixel, Inches, or Centimeters. If you choose a size larger than the image, the image is exported at its original size.

Format

Choose an image format to convert the file to during export.

60

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Managing assets

Color

Choose RGB, CMYK, or Grayscale as the color space.

Resolution

Choose 72, 150, 300, or Other. Enter a PPI setting if you choose Other.

Schedule

To postpone the download to a later date, choose Selected Time & Date from the Schedule menu, and enter a time and date on the calendar.

Job Name

Enter a name to accompany the date-and-time stamp in the Job Name field.

5

Click Export.

More Help topics

“ About different user roles ” on page 26

61

Printing assets

Follow these steps to print an asset:

1

In the Browse Panel, select the asset or assets you want to print.

2

Choose File > Print or press Ctrl+P (Windows) or Command+P (Macintosh).

3

In the Print dialog box, choose how many copies to print and then select the Print button.

Managing the Trash folder

Items that you delete from the Scene7 Publishing System are moved to the Trash folder. They remain for seven days in this folder until they are restored or permanently deleted. You can examine deleted items by selecting the Trash icon located at the bottom of the Asset Library and viewing items in the Trash folder.

All users can restore items in the Trash folder to the folders from which they were deleted. All users can also empty the

Trash folder of all its contents.

Deleting items from the Trash folder permanently deletes items from SPS; items deleted from the Trash folder can no longer be restored. For information on setting up notifications for company administrators when assets are about to

be automatically deleted from the Trash, see “ Application General Settings ” on page 14.

Important: Assets that have been moved to the Trash folder are still registered on the Scene7 Publishing System. If you try to upload a file that has the same name as a deleted file in the Trash folder, Scene7 treats the asset you want to upload as a duplicate asset. As such, a number is appended to its name.

More Help topics

“ Delete assets ” on page 54

About the Trash folder

Deleting an item in a folder places the item in the Trash folder. The following happens when you delete an item and move it to the Trash folder:

• Although the item has been removed from your SPS folders, its ID cannot be assigned to another asset while it remains in the Trash folder. If you try to upload an asset with the same name as a file in the Trash folder, Scene7 appends a numeral to the name of the asset.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Managing assets

• The item cannot be published. Even if the item was marked for publish when you deleted it, it is not published.

The item retains information about who deleted it and when it was deleted. You can find this information by opening the Trash folder and examining History information in Detail view.

The item remains in the Trash folder until it is restored, seven days pass, or someone chooses the Empty The Trash command. After seven days, an automatic clean-up operation permanently deletes the item.

Restoring assets from the Trash folder

It isn’t necessary for the person who deleted an asset to restore it; anyone can restore assets from the Trash folder.

Assets that are restored are placed in the folders from which they were deleted. If these folders no longer exist, the

Scene7 Publishing System re-creates them, and the restored assets are placed in the re-created folders.

Follow these steps to restore assets from the Trash folder to the folders from which they were deleted:

1

Select the Trash icon to open the Trash folder.

2

Select the asset or assets you want to restore.

3

Choose File > Restore From Trash.

Permanently deleting assets in the Trash folder

When you delete assets in the Trash folder, the assets are permanently deleted. Assets are automatically deleted from the Trash folder after seven days.

To permanently delete assets from the Trash folder, select the Trash icon , to open the Trash folder. Then delete individual assets or delete all the assets in the folder:

Deleting individual assets

Select the assets you want to permanently delete and choose File > Empty From Trash.

Deleting all assets

Choose File > Empty Trash.

62

Organizing your work with Projects

Projects provide an optional, secondary way for you to organize assets independently of the folders in which they are stored. An asset can be placed in only one folder, but it can be copied into more than one Project folder for organizational purposes.

After you create a Project folder, you can place assets in it. However, assets in a Project are actually pointers to the Asset

Library folder in which the assets are actually stored. You can place an asset in more than one Project. For example, an image of a blouse can be placed in both the “Blouses” and “Fall Collection” Project folders.

You can create a Project when you upload files or create Projects in the Asset Library Panel.

Scene7 recommends organizing assets with metadata rather than Projects. See “ Adding and exporting metadata ” on

Note: For you to organize assets in Projects, your administrator must have set you up to use them. If you don’t see a

Projects folder section at the bottom of the Assets Library, this method of organizing assets is not available to you. See

“ Application General Settings ” on page

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Managing assets

Creating a Project folder

You can create a Project folder starting in the Assets Library or when you upload files to the Scene7 Publishing System:

In the Asset Library

Scroll to the bottom of the Asset Library, to the Projects section, and select the Add Project button . Then enter a name for the project.

When uploading files

In the Upload screen, select the Add to Project menu and choose Create Project. Then enter a name for the project.

Note: The Projects area in the Asset Library is a single level folder list; it doesn’t permit subfolders.

Working with Project folders

Follow these instructions to display, delete, and rename a Project folder:

Browsing contents

Select the name of the folder in the Asset Library. Its assets appear in the Browse Panel.

Deleting Project folders

Select the Project folder and then select the Remove Project button . Deleting assets from a Project folder does not delete them from SPS; the assets remain in the original folders in which they are stored.

Renaming Project folders

Double-click the name of the folder in the Asset Panel, and then enter a new name.

Adding assets to a Project folder

You can add images to a Project folder starting in the Browse Panel or when you upload files to the Scene7 Publishing

System:

From the Browse Panel

Select the assets and drag them to a Project folder. You can also choose File > Add To Project, select a Project folder name in the Select Project dialog box, and select the Submit button.

When uploading files

In the Upload screen, choose Add to Project > Use Existing Project. Then select a project name.

63

Last updated 5/21/2010

Chapter 6: Image Sizing

Image Sizing refers to the ability of Scene7 to create multiple derivative images based on a single high-resolution image.

Rather than manually creating several images­—for example, a thumbnail and enlarged-view image—for your website or application, you provide a single master image. Scene7 generates all modified images just as you request them. Being able to deliver images dynamically from a single master image has many advantages:

You do not have to manually create several copies of the image at different sizes. You supply one master image to

Scene7, and Scene7 generates different-sized derivatives from the master image.

You can quickly change the size of an image type throughout your website or application. For example, to change all thumbnail images, you can modify the “thumbnail” Image Preset. An Image Preset—it’s similar to a macro—is a collection of size and formatting attributes. You can modify the “thumbnail” Image Preset to change the size of all thumbnail images throughout your website or application.

You do not have to manage the masters and all of the various derivatives in any of your content or asset management systems internally or externally.

2000 pixels

64

Single master image

(Recommend 1500-2500 pixels in longest dimension)

Dynamically sized images

(using Image Presets)

1. Upload single master image file

2. Create Image Presets (to define size, format, sharpening & other settings)

3. Publish

4. Copy URLs and use on Websites to display different sizes dynamically

You can create multiple derivative images at different sizes from the same high-resolution master file.

Quick Start: Image Sizing

This Image Sizing Quick Start is designed to help you get up and running quickly with Image Sizing techniques in the

Scene7 Publishing System. Follow steps 1 through 5. After each step is a cross-reference where you can find more information if you need it.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Image Sizing

1.

Uploading master images

Start by uploading your master images to the Scene7 Publishing System. As to size, Scene7 recommends using images that are the largest size you anticipate using on your website or application. For example, if you want viewers to zoom images, upload images that are at least 2000 pixels in the largest dimension. Scene7 supports many image file formats, but lossless TIFF and PNG images are recommended.

Select the Upload button on the Global Navigation bar to upload files from your computer to a folder on the Scene7

Publishing System. See “ Uploading master images ” on page 66.

2.

Setting up Image Presets

Like a macro, an Image Preset is a collection of predefined size and formatting commands saved under a name. An

Image Preset governs the size and formatting with which images are delivered from Scene7 Image Servers. You can set up Image Presets on your own if you have company administrator status. Scene7 also comes with default Image

Presets, and you can use them to dynamically deliver images.

To create an Image Preset (if you are an administrator), select the Setup button on the Global Navigation bar. On the

Setup screen, display the Application Setup options and choose Image Presets. Then select the Add or Edit button to create an Image Preset.

The Image Preset you create is added to the Image Preset menu on the Preview screen. You can use your new Image

Preset to display images dynamically on your websites and applications. See “ Setting up Image Presets ” on page 66.

3.

Previewing Image Presets

The next step is to preview the Image Presets your administrator set up at the different preset sizes. To explore Image

Presets, use one of these techniques:

• Select a master image in the Browse Panel and then select the Preview button, choose File > Preview, or select the rollover Preview button. The Preview screen opens. Choose Presets > Sizes, and then select the Image Presets menu and choose an Image Preset.

• Select the Setup button on the Global Navigation bar, display the Application Setup options, and select Image

Presets. Then select an Image Preset.

Experiment with the different Image Presets. Find out what your image looks like when it is delivered dynamically to

your website or application at different sizes. See “ Previewing Image Presets ” on page 68.

4.

Publishing your master images

Publishing your master image files serves two essential purposes:

Publishing your master images to Scene7 Image Servers so that images can be dynamically delivered to your website and application.

• Publishing activates the URL strings for calling images from Scene7 Image Servers to your website or application.

After publishing, you can copy and place the Scene7-generated URLs where necessary in your website or application.

Select the Publish button on the Global Navigation bar to initiate a publish. On the Publish screen, select the Start

Publish button. See “ Publishing master images ” on page 68.

65

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Image Sizing

5.

Linking URLs to your web application

Scene7 creates URL callout strings for images. When you publish images to Scene7 Image Servers, the URLs become active. You can copy these URL strings from the Browse Panel (in Detail view) or Preview screen. After you copy the

URL strings, you can use them in your website and applications. The URL for image sizing replaces the reference to a static image name in your web page code. The URL references a master image name, which is replaced by your database for each new image to display.

URL strings generated with Image Presets contain the name of an Image Preset. This name is enclosed in dollar signs

($). For example,

$thumbnail$

can be the Image Preset designed to show master images at thumbnail size. See

“ Linking URLs to your web application ” on page 69.

66

Uploading master images

Before uploading images to the Scene7 Publishing System, make sure they are the highest quality size and format.

Scene7 recommends uploading high-quality images with a sufficient pixel count (from 1500 to 2000 pixels in the long dimension). This allows for any dynamic imaging that is required.

For details on uploading images, see “ Uploading files ” on page 35.

Preparing your master images for upload

Prepare your master image files before you upload them to the Scene7 Publishing System:

Image size

Create the largest size images you anticipate using. Typical image sizes range from 1500 to 2500 pixels in the longest dimension. If you intend to use the Zoom feature, Scene7 recommends using images that are at least 2000 pixels in the longest dimension for optimal zoom detail.

File formats

Scene7 supports all standard image file formats, including TIFF, BMP, JPEG, PSD, GIF, and EPS. Lossless image formats—TIFF and PNG—are recommended. If you are using a JPEG image, use the highest quality settings.

Color space

RGB is the color space for web image presentations; CMYK images commonly used for printing are automatically converted to RGB when you upload them. Uploading CMYK images that have an embedded ICC color

profile for the conversion to RGB is recommended. See also “ ICC profiles ” on page 181.

Setting up Image Presets

Like a macro, an Image Preset is a predefined collection of sizing and formatting commands saved under a name. To understand how Image Presets work, suppose your website requires each product image to appear at two different sizes: 500 x 500 pixels and 150 x 150 pixels. You create two Image Presets, one called “Enlarge” to display images at

500x500 pixels and one called “Thumbnail” to display images at 150 x 150 pixels. To deliver images at the “Enlarge” and “Thumbnail” size, a Scene7 Image Server looks up the definition of the Enlarge Image Preset and Thumbnail

Image Preset. Then the server dynamically generates an image at the size and formatting specifications of each Image

Preset.

Scene7 comes with several “best practice” Image Presets that are already set up for you to use. Administrators can create new Image Presets as well. To create an Image Preset, you can start from scratch or you can start from an existing one and save it under a new name.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Image Sizing

Images that are reduced in size when they are delivered dynamically from a server can lose sharpness and detail. For this reason, each Image Preset contains formatting controls for optimizing an image when it is delivered at a particular size. These controls make sure that your images are sharp and clear when they are delivered to your website or application.

Creating an Image Preset

You can create your own Image Presets if you are a company administrator. You can create new Image Presets or start with a default Image Preset that Scene7 provides and edit it.

Follow these steps to create an Image Preset:

1

Select the Setup button on the Global Navigation bar.

2

On the Setup screen, display the Application Setup options.

3

Select Image Presets. The Image Presets screen lists available Image Presets. You can select an Image Preset name on this screen to preview an existing Image Preset. When you select an Image Preset name, the sample image in the

Preview window changes size and appearance.

4

Add an Image Preset by starting anew or by starting from an existing Image Preset:

Creating an Image Preset

Select the Add button.

Editing an Image Preset

Select the Image Preset that is most like the one you want to create and select the Edit button.

5

Enter a name for the Image Preset.

6

Enter Width and Height measurements in pixels. These measurements determine the size at which images are delivered.

7

Fill in the Add Preset or Edit Preset screen. For details, see “ Image Preset options ” on page 17.

Scene7 recommends these “best practice” option choices to start:

Format

Choose JPEG or another format that meets your requirements. All web browsers support the JPEG image format; it offers a good balance between small files sizes and image quality. However, JPEG format images use a lossy compression scheme that can introduce unwanted image artifacts if the compression setting is too low. For that reason, Scene7 recommends setting the compression quality (on the slider) to 75. This setting offers a good balance between image quality and small file size.

Sharpening

Do not select Sharpening (this sharpening filter offers less control than Unsharp Masking settings).

Resample Mode

Choose Bi-Cubic.

Unsharp Masking (USM) options

Enter the settings shown here:

Preset type

Cross-Sell (mini-thumbnail)

Thumbnail

Main

Enlarge

8

Select the Save button.

Size

75 x 75

150 x 150

350 x 350

500 x 500

USM: Amount

1.5

1.1

1

1.2

1

1

USM: Radius

0.8

1.2

5

6

USM: Threshold

5

5

67

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Image Sizing

The Scene7 “best practice” options for creating Image Presets listed here are general recommendations; sharpening is highly subjective. These “best practice” settings were based on a 2000 x 2000 master image; settings for larger or smaller masters can be different. If you want to adjust the Unsharp Masking settings, Scene7 recommends these ranges:

Amount

Between .8 and 1.5.

Radius

Between .6 and 2.

Threshold

From 1 to 6.

To delete an Image Preset, select it on the Image Presets screen and select the Delete button.

More Help topics

“ Create and edit Image Presets ” on page 16

“ Image Preset options ” on page 17

Previewing Image Presets

You can preview an Image Preset:

1

Select the master image asset that you want to preview with different Image Presets.

2

Select the rollover Preview button, select the Preview button, or choose File > Preview. The Preview screen opens.

3

Choose Presets > Sizes.

4

Select the Image Presets menu and choose an Image Preset. Your image changes size and appearance. You can see what your image looks like when it is delivered with the Image Preset you chose.

You can choose other Image Presets on the Image Presets menu to preview and familiarize yourself with them.

68

Publishing master images

Publishing your image files publishes them to Scene7 Image Servers, where they are available to your website and application. What’s more, during the publishing process, the Scene7 Publishing System activates the URL strings you need for your website and application.

More Help topics

“ Publishing ” on page 41

Marking master images for publish

Master images must be marked for publish in order for them to be copied to Scene7 Image Servers. You can mark your master images for publish in the Browse Panel by selecting the Mark for Publish icon . You can also mark images for publish when you upload them to the Scene7 Publishing System.

Publishing your master images

To publish master images to Scene7 Image Servers, start by selecting the Publish button on the Global Navigation bar.

Then select a When option (One-Time or Recurring), optionally enter a name for the publish job, and select the Start

Publish button.

Important: The URL is not active until you publish the asset.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Image Sizing

Linking URLs to your web application

Your websites and applications access Scene7 Image Server content via URL strings. After you publish an image,

Scene7 activates a URL string that references the Image Preset on Scene7 Image Servers. You can paste these URLs into a web browser for testing.

To place these URL strings in your web pages and applications, copy them from the Scene7 Publishing System. To obtain a URL string generated with an Image Preset, go to the Preview screen or the Browse Panel (in Detail view).

Obtaining an Image Preset URL

You can obtain a URL string generated by an Image Preset from the Preview screen or Browse Panel (in Detail view).

After you copy the URL, it lands on the Clipboard so you can paste it as necessary.

Important: The URL is not active until you publish the asset.

Preview screen

Follow these steps to obtain a URL string generated with an Image Preset from the Preview screen:

1

Select the image on the Browse Panel.

2

Select the Preview button, select the rollover Preview button, or choose File > Preview.

3

On the Preview screen, choose Presets > Sizes.

4

Select the Image Presets menu and choose an Image Preset that represents the URL you want to copy to the

Clipboard. For example, if you want to obtain a URL that displays the thumbnail version of your image, choose

Thumbnail on the Image Presets menu.

5

Select the Copy URL button to copy the URL to the Clipboard.

Browse Panel

Follow these steps to obtain a URL string generated by an Image Preset from the Browse Panel:

1

Select the image on the Browse Panel.

2

Double-click the image or select the Detail View button to open it in Detail view.

3

Select URLs on the panel on the right side of the screen to display the list of Image Presets.

4

Select the Copy URL link next to the name of the Image Preset with the URL you want to copy to the Clipboard.

For example, to obtain a URL that displays the image you selected in Step 1 as a thumbnail, select the URL link next to the Image Preset named Thumbnail.

About Image Preset URL strings

A URL call for Image Sizing to Scene7 Image Servers has the following basic syntax:

path/name of Image Server/account name/image name?modifier1&modifier2&...

In a Scene7 Image Server URL, instructions to the server for displaying the image appear after the question mark (?).

For example, this URL call delivers an image named “backpack” at a width of 250 pixels: http://s71.scene7.com/is/image/S7learn/backpack?wid=250

An Image Preset URL contains all the modifier instructions for presenting the image at the proper size and formatting specifications. Without an Image Preset, notice all the modifier instructions after the question mark (?) in this URL string:

Last updated 5/21/2010

69

USING SCENE7

Image Sizing

http://s71.scene7.com/is/image/S7learn/backpack?wid=250&fmt=jpeg&qlt=80,0&resMode=sharp&op_u sm=1.1,0.5,1,0

However, in a URL string generated with an Image Preset, the name of the Image Preset appears in place of the instructions defined by the Image Preset. For example, referring to the long URL above, the URL string is: http://s71.scene7.com/is/image/S7learn/backpack?$Large$

Image Preset names in URLs are enclosed in dollar signs ($). When a Scene7 Image Server encounters the Image Preset portion of the URL (the

Large

in this case), using the size and formatting instructions defined by the “Large” Image

Preset.

More Help topics

“ Adding dynamic images to your web page ” on page 70

Adding dynamic images to your web page

To add dynamic images to your web page, the

<IMG>

tag in your HTML web page code typically is modified using the

Scene7 URL string to make a request to Scene7 Image Servers. This string produces the image at the size and formatting specifications defined by the Image Preset.

For example, instead of the typical call to open a static image such as img src="/company_images/products/backpack_thumbnail.jpg" you now use the

<IMG> tag to replace the reference to a static image with an Image Preset call to the Scene7 platform.

A sample call looks like this: img src="http://s7d2.scene7.com/is/image/S7learn/backpack_trns?$thumbnail$"

In this example, a Scene7 Image Server “looks up” the definition of

$thumbnail$

and dynamically generates the appropriate image with the sizing and formatting specifications defined by the thumbnail

Image Preset. In a URL string, all items except the product image filename ( backpack_trns

in this case) are typically hardwired for the page template. The only element that is automatically inserted in the page template from your commerce server is the IPS

ID or name of the image.

More Help topics

“ About Image Preset URL strings ” on page 69

70

Last updated 5/21/2010

Chapter 7: Zoom

Zooming allows you to interactively view high-resolution details in images. For example, you can see the colors, options, angles, and details of an image in a dynamic, fully configurable, integrated viewer. This viewer can be embedded on a web page or appear in a pop-up window. You can inspect images at close range and pan images at high resolutions to examine them closely. Zooming gives your clients an engaging, informative, and interactive viewing experience.

Scene7 also offers guided zooming—a means for you to highlight the important features in an image. For example, to focus the attention of viewers on a logo, you can create a zoom target for the logo. When viewers click this zoom target, they zoom to the logo.

All zoom images are created and served from single master images, graphics, and database-driven attributes. Scene7 zooming greatly reduces the time and cost of producing and delivering images. You can use Zoom Viewers, available in both Flash and DHTML, to zoom images. The Zoom Viewer has buttons that you can click to zoom and pan; you can also pan by dragging on screen. Using Zoom Viewer Presets, you can configure the Zoom Viewer in which you zoom images.

Quick Start: Zoom

This Zoom Quick Start is designed to help you get up and running quickly with Zoom techniques in Scene7. Follow steps 1 through 6. After each step is a cross-reference to a topic heading where you can find more information.

1.

Uploading zoom Images

Start by uploading your zoom images to the Scene7 Publishing System. For optimal zooming, Scene7 recommends that the images are at least 2000 pixels in the longest dimension.

Select the Upload button on the Global Navigation bar to upload images from your computer or network to a folder

on the Scene7 Publishing System. See “ Uploading zoom images ” on page 72.

2.

Creating zoom targets for guided zooming

Zoom targets present a way for you to highlight specific parts of an image. For example, you can direct attention to the parts of an image that make it unique or distinctive. In the Zoom Viewer window, zoom targets appear in the form of thumbnail images to the side of the image. Selecting one of these zoom target thumbnails automatically zooms to a part of the image that you specify.

To create a zoom target, open an image in the Browse Panel in Detail view and select the Zoom Targets button .

Then use the Zoom tools on the Zoom Target Editor screen to isolate part of the image as a target. See “ Creating zoom targets for Guided Zoom ” on page 73.

3.

Setting up Zoom Viewer Presets

Zoom Viewer Presets determine the style and behavior of your Zoom Viewers. You can set up Zoom Viewer Presets if you are an administrator; Scene7 comes with default “best practice” Zoom Viewer Presets as well.

To create a Zoom Viewer Preset, select the Setup button on the Global Navigation bar. On the Setup screen, select

Application Setup and choose Viewer Presets. Then select the Add button, choose a Zoom preset, and choose options on the Configure Viewer screen.

Last updated 5/21/2010

71

USING SCENE7

Zoom

Scene7 offers Zoom Viewer Preset options that enable you to select the button style and overall look of the viewer. You

can also customize the zoom settings for your website. See “ Setting up Zoom Viewer Presets ” on page 74.

4.

Previewing images with the Zoom Viewer

You can preview images in a Zoom Viewer or Guided Zoom Viewer to see what the zooming experience is when images are zoomed.

To explore different Zoom Viewer Presets and how they present the zooming experience, select an image in the Browse

Panel and select the Preview button. The Preview screen opens. Choose Presets > Zoom, and then select a preset on the Zoom menu.

Zoom buttons appear; if you selected a Guided Zoom Viewer Preset, zoom targets appear as well. You can see what the zoom images look like on your website. Select the Zoom buttons (and zoom targets) to test the settings of the Zoom

Viewer Preset you chose. See “ Previewing images with different Zoom Viewers ” on page 75.

5.

Publishing zoom images

Publishing your zoom images places them on Scene7 Image Servers so that they can be delivered to your website and application. As part of the publishing process, the Scene7 Publishing System activates URL strings. These URL strings call zoom images from Scene7 Image Servers to your website or application.

Select the Publish button on the Global Navigation bar to initiate a publish. On the Publish screen, select the Start

Publish button. See “ Publishing zoom images ” on page 76.

6.

Linking Zoom Viewers to your web page

Scene7 creates the URL callout strings necessary for zooming images, and activates them when you publish images to

Scene7 Image Servers. You can copy these URL strings from the Preview screen. After you copy the URL strings, they

are available to your websites and applications. See “ Linking Zoom Viewers to your web page ” on page 76.

72

Uploading zoom images

Zoom images must have a high pixel count. A high number of pixels is needed so that viewers can clearly see image details when they zoom images. Make sure that the images you use are the appropriate size before uploading them to SPS.

Select the Upload button on the Global Navigation bar to begin uploading images.

For detailed instruction on uploading images, see “ Uploading files ” on page 35.

Preparing your images for zooming

To take best advantage of Scene7 Zoom features, prepare your zoom image files before you upload them:

Image size

Scene7 recommends using images files that are, at minimum, 2000 pixels in the longest dimension. This way, images can clearly be seen when users zoom them.

File formats

Scene7 supports all standard image file formats, including TIFF, BMP, JPEG, PSD, GIF, and EPS. Lossless image formats—TIFF and PNG—are recommended. If you are using a JPEG image, use the highest quality settings.

Color space

RGB is the color space for web image presentations; CMYK images are automatically converted to RGB when you upload them. Uploading CMYK images that have an embedded ICC color profile for the conversion to RGB

is recommended. See also “ ICC profiles ” on page 181.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Zoom

More Help topics

“ Uploading files ” on page 35

Creating zoom targets for Guided Zoom

Zoom targets guide your viewers to certain parts of an image. As well as free-form zooming, viewers can click a zoom target thumbnail and zoom to the part of the image you want them to focus on. Zoom targets are an opportunity for you to highlight the attractive or interesting parts of an image.

73

Thumbnail zoom targets in the Zoom Viewer

About zoom targets

The maximum zoom percentage of zoom targets is 100 percent. The minimum zoom percentage varies based on a combination of the viewer size and the image size, as shown in this table:

Image size

Large

Small

Viewer size

Smaller

Larger

Zoom percentage

Smaller minimum

Larger minimum

You can change the size of the Zoom Viewer to match the size being used on your web page. To permanently change

this setting, you can change the viewer size on the Setup screen (if you are an administrator). See “ Setting up Zoom

Viewer Presets ” on page 74.

Creating zoom targets

Follow these steps to create zoom targets for an image:

1

In the Browse Panel, display the image in Detail view.

2

Select the Zoom Targets button . The Zoom Target Editor screen opens.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Zoom

3

Identify the part of the image you want to make a zoom target. Select the Zoom button, drag the View slider, and pan until what you see on-screen is exactly the area you want to highlight.

4

Enter a name for the zoom target in the Name box. When users move the cursor over the zoom target, the words you enter appear in a pop-up box.

5

Optionally, enter user data in the User Data field. This field is for website designers to add information to the zoom target.

6

Select the Save button. The coordinates and zoom level of the zoom target are saved. A thumbnail of your zoom target appears in the Zoom Target Editor screen.

7

Repeat steps 3–6 to create more zoom targets, if you want.

8

Select the Exit button to return to the Browse Panel.

The names of zoom targets appear. You can see them by selecting Built & Derivatives and looking under Zoom

Targets.

To return to the Zoom Target Editor screen and edit a zoom target, select the Zoom Targets button. Then select a zoom target and use the Zoom tools to remake it. Select the Delete button to delete a zoom target.

More Help topics

“ Previewing images with different Zoom Viewers ” on page 75

74

Setting up Zoom Viewer Presets

Zoom Viewer Presets determine the style, behavior, and look of your Zoom viewers. Scene7 offers many options for customizing and skinning Viewers. Scene7 comes with default basic (fast), fly-out, and custom Zoom Viewer Presets.

If you are an administrator, you can create new company Zoom Viewer Presets or edit a default Zoom Viewer Preset and save it with a new name.

All Zoom Viewers have buttons for zooming in, zooming out, panning, and resetting the image to its original state after zooming. What these buttons look like and what the window itself looks like depends on your choice of Zoom

Viewer Presets. You can configure a Zoom Viewer Preset with different colors, borders, fonts, and image settings.

When configuring a Guided Zoom Viewer, you can also choose where to place the zoom targets. Zoom targets are the thumbnails that users click to zoom to areas you specify.

Follow these steps to create a Zoom Viewer Preset or Guided Zoom Viewer Preset:

1

Choose Setup > Viewer Presets.

In the Viewer Presets window, the following options appear for Zoom Viewer Presets:

Zoom Viewer: Basic

Provides a basic zoom on original image.

Zoom Viewer: Fly-out

Displays a second image of the zoomed area next to the original image. There are no controls to use, users simply move the selection over the area they want to view.

When determining the complete bandwidth usage for this viewer, consider that both the main image and the flyout image are served in the viewer. The flyout image size is determined by the main image size (Stage Width and

Height) and the Zoom Factor. To keep the flyout file size from becoming too large, balance these two values: if you have a large main image size, lower the Zoom Factor value. (The Flyout Width and Flyout Height determine the size of the flyout window, but not the size of the flyout image that is served into the viewer.)

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Zoom

For example, if your main image size is 350 by 350 pixels, with a Zoom Factor of 3, the resulting flyout image is 1050 by 1050 pixels. If your main image size is 300 by 300 pixels, with a Zoom Factor of 4, the flyout image is 1200 by

1200 pixels. Depending on the JPEG quality setting (recommended settings are between 80-90), you can decrease the file size significantly. Recommended zoom factors are 2.5 to 4, depending on the size of your main image.

Zoom Viewer: Custom

Provides guided or unguided zoom with images, Image Sets with multiple views, or Color

Swatch Sets.

2

Do one of the following:

• To create a zoom viewer preset, click Add and select a Zoom Viewer from the list that appears.

To edit an existing Zoom Viewer Preset, expand a Zoom Viewer option, and select the viewer that is most like the one you want to create, and click Edit.

3

In the Configure Viewer screen, enter a preset name.

4

Specify setting as desired.

To see a description of an option, click the Info Tip icon adjacent to the option.

The preview screen displays the viewer as you update and change settings.

5

Click Save or Save As.

6

On the Viewer Presets screen, examine the Zoom Viewer Preset or Guided Zoom Viewer Preset you created. If it needs adjusting, click Edit, change settings on the Configure Viewer screen, and click Save.

To delete a Zoom Viewer Preset, select it on the Viewer Presets screen and click Delete.

Note: To set a Zoom Viewer Preset as the default that users of your website see, select it and click Make Default.

More Help topics

“ Creating and editing Viewer Presets ” on page 20

75

Previewing images with different Zoom Viewers

From the Browse panel, you can preview images using different Zoom Viewer Presets.

1

In the Browse Panel, select the image that you want to preview with the available Zoom Viewer Presets.

2

Click the Preview button or choose File > Preview. The Preview screen opens.

3

Choose Zoom from the Presets menu.

4

Choose the presets you want to view from the second and third menus that appear. Zoom buttons and controls appear on the Preview screen.

More Help topics

“ Setting up Zoom Viewer Presets ” on page 74

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Zoom

Publishing zoom images

Publishing places your zoom images on Scene7 Image Servers so they can be made available to your website and application. As part of the publishing process, SPS activates the URL strings. You can place these URL strings in the

HTML code of your website.

More Help topics

“ Publishing ” on page 41

Marking images for publish

Images must be marked for publish in order for them to be copied to Scene7 Image Servers. You can mark your images for publish in the Browse Panel by selecting the Mark for Publish icon . As well, you can mark images for publish when you upload them.

Publishing the images

To publish zoom images, start by selecting the Publish button on the Global Navigation bar. Then select a When option (One-Time or Recurring), optionally enter a name for the publish job, and select the Start Publish button.

76

Linking Zoom Viewers to your web page

Your websites and applications access Scene7 Image Server content, including master images and associated zoom targets, and Zoom Viewer Presets, via URL strings. These URL strings are activated during the publishing process. To place these URL strings in your web pages and applications, you copy them from the Scene7 Publishing System.

Important: The URL is not active until you publish the asset.

Obtaining a Zoom Viewer URL

Follow these steps to obtain a Zoom Viewer Preset URL string:

1

Select the image on the Browse Panel.

2

Select the Preview button, select the rollover Preview button, or choose File > Preview.

3

On the Preview screen, choose Presets > Zoom.

4

Select the second menu and choose the name of a Zoom Viewer Preset.

5

Select the Copy URL button to copy the URL to the Clipboard.

Adding Zoom Viewer URLs to your web page

Typically, visitors to a website zoom images by first selecting a Zoom icon (often the icon shows the image of a magnifying glass). Selecting this icon launches a dynamic web page (ASP or JSP) that displays the image in a pop-up window. The pop-up window is where visitors actually zoom the image.

Here is an example of code that your IT staff can create to open a pop-up window for zooming:

<a href="javascript:zoom_window();">

<img src="http://www.scene7.com/images/buttons/zoomMag.gif" width="50" height="50" border="0"

/></a>

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Zoom

Notice that the link calls a JavaScript function called zoom_window()

. The zoom_window() function is placed above the

</HEAD> tag in the HTML code of the web page:

<script language="javascript">

<!-- function zoom_window() { window.open("http://s7d4.scene7.com/s7ondemand/zoom/flasht_zoom.jsp

?company=

S7Web&sku=Backpack1&zoomwidth=420&zoomheight=470& vc=skin=/is-viewers/flash/basicZoomSkin.swf","", "toolbar=no,location=no,directories=no,"

+ "status=no,menubar=no,scrollbars=yes"+

"resizable=yes,width=500,height=450,top=0,left=0,right=0,bottom=0")

}

-->

</script>

Notice that the URL of the pop-up window is a Scene7 URL

( http://s7d4.scene7.com/s7ondemand/zoom/flasht_zoom.jsp

). This URL calls the zoom pop-up window (a

JSP page) that contains the Zoom Flash Viewer and master image. The JSP page, Zoom Viewer, and master image are all located on Scene7 Servers. Replace the Scene7 URL in the code with your zoom URL.

In the URL, notice a SKU parameter (

&sku=Backpack1

). The string after

&sku=

is

Backpack1

. The zoom feature popup link of each product contains a different product SKU that tells the Scene7 JSP page which product image to display.

The user selects the zoom feature link on the product details page that launches the screen.

77

Last updated 5/21/2010

Chapter 8: eCatalogs

An eCatalog is a digital, web version of print material—a catalog, brochure, flyer, product manual, or advertising circular, for example. An eCatalog is displayed in an eCatalog Viewer on a website. This viewer simulates the experience of reading printed material. Depending on the settings you choose for your eCatalog, viewers can:

Page forward or backward by clicking the lower-left or lower-right corner of a page, or the Back or Next button.

• Select a page number or page title to go to a specific page.

Zoom in, zoom out, and pan to examine items on a page.

• Move the pointer over a page region (called an Image Map) to see a pop-up window with information about an item.

Click a page region to open a new web page with more information about an item.

• Write a sticky note and attach it to an eCatalog page.

Search by keyword for items.

78

A

B

The eCatalog as it looks to users

A. eCatalog opening page B. eCatalog turned to page 2

To create an eCatalog, you typically use high-resolution PDF files created in Adobe® Acrobat® or another print program, but you can also create an eCatalog from image files.

As part of creating your eCatalog, you can arrange pages or page spreads in the order you choose. You can also declare whether you want single pages, double-page spreads, or multi-page spreads. You can create Image Maps for page regions so that viewers can, for example, click an area on the page and open a new page on your website. You can manage the rollover text that appears using InfoPanel settings within the eCatalog screen. You can also configure the eCatalog Viewer by choosing from more than 100 different configuration options. You can tailor the features and the appearance of your Viewer for your particular audience.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eCatalogs

Quick Start: eCatalog

This eCatalog Quick Start is designed to help you get up and running quickly with eCatalogs. Follow steps 1 through

7. After each step is a cross-reference to a topic heading where you can find more information.

1.

Uploading the PDF files

Adobe PDF files are usually the source for an eCatalog. Because they are meant to be printed, PDF files usually contain

CMYK images. The Scene7 Publishing System detects these images and converts them using a standard CMYK color profile. However, you may have to upload and use a custom color profile.

Select the Upload button on the Global Navigation bar to start uploading PDF files or images for your eCatalog. You can upload files from your desktop or via FTP; FTP is recommended if you are uploading many files or files larger than

100 MB.

Under PDF Options, the Upload screen provides options for uploading PDF files at the proper resolution and correct color space. A 150 pixels-per-inch resolution is recommended. You can select the Auto-Generate eCatalog option to

create an eCatalog when you upload a PDF file. See “ Uploading the PDF files ” on page 80.

2.

Creating an eCatalog

Create your eCatalog by selecting PDF or image files in the Browse Panel, and then selecting the Build button and choosing eCatalogs. The eCatalog screen opens.

On the Order Pages tab, select a Layout button—1 Up, 2 Up, or Custom—to choose whether you want single, double, or custom page spreads. You can rearrange pages or spreads by dragging them or, in a large eCatalog, choosing a page name on the Move To menu.

To add pages, select a folder in the Asset Library, and then drag PDF or image files from into the Order Pages screen.

Instead of default page numbers, you can provide custom page names or import a large number of page names.

Select the Save button, enter a name for your eCatalog, choose an SPS folder for storing it, and select the Submit button.

Each time you change the page order or edit your eCatalog, save your changes by selecting the Save button. See

“ Creating an eCatalog ” on page 82.

3.

Creating Image Maps

Image Maps add another dimension to eCatalog pages. An Image Map is a region on a page that delivers more information about an item. When viewers roll the pointer over an Image Map, they see a description of the item. Clicking an Image Map activates an external reference that opens a new web page where you can learn more about an item.

To create an Image Map, open the eCatalog screen. Then go to the Map Pages tab of the eCatalog screen, and draw the map with the Rectangle Image Map tool or Polygon Image Map tool . You can adjust the position and size of

Image Maps by dragging map borders with the Pan tool .

After you draw the Image Map, enter the URL address that you want to go to when you click the Image Map. You can

also enter the rollover text that appears when you move your pointer over the Image Map. See “ Creating eCatalog

Image Maps ” on page 83.

You can set up and manage the image map text using the Info Panel settings in the eCatalog screen. See “ Managing

Info Panel content ” on page 85.

79

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eCatalogs

4.

Setting up eCatalog Viewer Presets

End users see your eCatalog in the eCatalog Viewer. If you are an administrator, you can configure the eCatalog

Viewer. You can change its outline color, and (Enterprise users only) select a new “skin” to brand your eCatalog.

Scene7 comes with several “best practice” eCatalog Viewer Presets. You can choose one of these presets for displaying your eCatalogs. You can also create an eCatalog Viewer Preset of your own if you are an administrator.

To create an eCatalog Viewer Preset, select the Setup button on the Global Navigation bar. On the Setup screen, display the Application Setup options and choose Viewer Presets. Then choose Add > eCatalogs and create an eCatalog

Viewer Preset on the Configure Viewer screen. See “ Setting up eCatalog Viewer Presets ” on page 87.

5.

Previewing eCatalogs in the eCatalog Viewer

eCatalog Viewer Presets determine the style and behavior of your eCatalog Viewers.

To find out how eCatalog Viewer Presets display your eCatalog, select your eCatalog in the Browse Panel and select the Preview button. The Preview screen opens in the default viewer.

Notice the orientation, color scheme, what the controls for changing pages look like, and what pages look like when

they are turned. See “ Previewing eCatalogs in the eCatalog Viewer ” on page 89.

6.

Publishing eCatalogs

Publishing your eCatalog places it on Scene7 Image Servers so that it can be delivered to your website and application.

As part of the publishing process, the Scene7 Publishing System activates the URL string for your eCatalog. Use this

URL to call the eCatalog from Scene7 Image Servers to your website or application.

After marking your eCatalog for publish in the Browse Panel, select the Publish button on the Global Navigation bar

to initiate a publish. On the Publish screen, select the Start Publish button. See “ Publishing eCatalogs ” on page 89.

7.

Linking an eCatalog to a web page

Scene7 activates the URL callout string necessary for displaying your eCatalog when you publish it to Scene7 Image

Servers. You can copy this URL string from the Preview screen and the Browse Panel (in Detail view) by selecting URLs in the panel. After you copy the URL string, it is available to your websites and applications.

Work with your IT team to place the link to the eCatalog in the appropriate place in your web page. When users click

the link, the eCatalog Viewer appears and users can browse your eCatalog. See “ Linking an eCatalog to a web page ” on page 89.

80

Uploading the PDF files

Typically, Adobe PDF files are the source for an eCatalog; these files contain all image information as well as fonts and vector graphics. You can build an eCatalog with images as well. After you have prepared your PDF files for uploading, select the Upload button on the Global Navigation bar to begin uploading the PDFs.

Preparing your PDF files

Prepare your PDF files before uploading them to the Scene7 Publishing System:

Place all the files in the same folder on your computer or network to make uploading the files easier.

• Name the files in alphanumeric order by page. Ordering the pages will make it easier to place the pages in the proper order after the files are uploaded.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eCatalogs

• Examine the PDF pages to see whether they contain crop marks, registration targets, or color bars. These marks determine where to cut the paper when documents are printed; they must be removed before your eCatalog is placed on the web. Scene7 provides options for cropping marks when you upload PDF files.

• If you want viewers to search your eCatalog by keyword, find out whether your PDF files are “flattened.” You cannot extract search words from flattened PDF files. To find out whether a PDF is flattened, try to select text inside it. If you can’t select text, the PDF is flattened and viewers cannot search by keyword in your eCatalog.

• Because they are meant to be printed, PDF files usually contain CMYK images. By default, SPS can intelligently detect these CMYK images and convert them using an internal CMYK color profile. However, if you want to use a

custom color profile to convert CMYK images, you can do so. See “ ICC profiles ” on page 181.

Best practice PDF upload options

For detailed information about the different upload methods, see “ Uploading your files ” on page 38.

Select the files you want to upload, and then select these best practice PDF Options:

Crop

Select the Crop menu and choose Manual if the pages contain crop marks, registration marks, or other marks.

Enter the number of pixels to crop from the top, right, bottom, and left sides of pages. Crop marks are usually set to a half-inch margin. Assuming that you choose 150 as the pixel-per-inch resolution (the recommended setting), entering

75, 75, 75, 75 in the Top, Right, Bottom, and Left text boxes crops a half inch from the margins (at 150 ppi, half of one inch equals 75 pixels).

Processing

Select the Processing menu and choose Rasterize. The PDF file must be rasterized so that all pages and images can be displayed in the eCatalog.

Extract Search Words (optional)

Select this option if you want your viewers to be able to search by keyword in your eCatalog.

Auto-Generate eCatalog from multiple page PDF (optional)

Select this option to automatically create an eCatalog when you upload. You can go straight to the eCatalog screen and begin working on your eCatalog without having to first select PDF files and select the Build command. The eCatalog is named after your PDF file.

Resolution

Scene7 recommends 150 pixels per inch.

Colorspace

Scene7 recommends choosing Detect Automatically. Usually, PDFs created for print output are in CMYK;

PDFs for online viewing are RGB. If a PDF uses both color spaces, you can select a specific color space by choosing

Force As RGB or Force As CMYK. PDFs use both color spaces, for example, when page graphics use a CMYK color space but pictures use RGB. If you uploaded an ICC profile, its name appears on the Colorspace menu and you can

choose it there. See “ ICC profiles ” on page 181.

Color Profile

Choose a Color Profile option:

Convert To SRGB

Converts to SRGB (Standard Red Green Blue). SRGB is the recommended color space for displaying images on web pages.

Keep Original Color Space

Retains the original color space.

Custom From > To

Opens menus so you can choose a Convert From and Convert To color space. You can choose

a standard Photoshop color space or a color space you uploaded to SPS. See “ ICC profiles ” on page 181.

Note: For details on all PDF options, see “

PDF upload options ” on page

More Help topics

“ PDF upload options ” on page 174

“ Uploading files ” on page 35

81

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eCatalogs

Creating an eCatalog

Creating an eCatalog entails ordering the pages, choosing the page layout, and linking the pages by drawing Image

Maps and entering rollover and hypertext link data. Optionally, you can customize the TOC so that viewers see page names rather than page numbers in the eCatalog Viewer.

Creating the eCatalog

You can include image files as well as PDF files in your eCatalog.

1

Begin creating your eCatalog with one of these techniques:

Select the files first

In the Browse Panel, select files and then choose Build > eCatalogs. The eCatalog screen opens.

Start from the eCatalog screen

Choose Build > eCatalogs. The eCatalog screen opens. Select a folder in the Asset

Library and drag files from the folder into the Order Pages tab of the eCatalog screen.

Note: To view the items in the Asset Library by name instead of thumbnail, select the List option for Default Asset

Library View in Personal Setup.

2

Select an overall layout for your eCatalog. Select the 1 Up button double-page spreads, or the Custom button

for single pages, the 2 Up button for

for page spreads of more than two pages. The Change eCatalog

Layout dialog box appears. Select the All Spreads options and select OK.

3

Optionally, change the layout of individual pages or page spreads by selecting them and then choosing the 1 Up button, 2 Up button, or Custom button. The Change eCatalog Layout dialog box appears. Select the Selected

Spreads options and select OK.

4

Reorder the pages as necessary with one of these techniques (pages are renumbered as you move them):

Dragging

Drag a page or page spread to a new location. The vertical bar shows you where the page is being moved.

Move To button

Select a page or page spread, select the Move To button, and choose the page on the menu that you want your page to appear before.

5

Select the Save button, select a folder for your eCatalog in the window that appears, enter a name for your eCatalog, and select the Save button.

You can preview your eCatalog, after you save it, by selecting the Preview button.

To open and edit an eCatalog, select it in the Browse Panel and double-click to open it in Detail view. Then select the

Edit button.

Customizing the table of contents (TOC)

Scene7 provides default page numbers in your eCatalog on the Order Pages tab of the eCatalog screen. For custom page names, you can change the page labels that constitute the table of contents (TOC). Renaming the front and back cover is recommended. For example, the front cover page can read “Cover” instead of “Page 0–1.”

You can create a customized table of contents (TOC) for your eCatalog manually or by importing the page names from a CSV or XML file.

Note: To restore default page titles, select the TOC Labels button on the Order Pages tab and choose Restore Default

Titles.

82

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eCatalogs

Manually entering page names

To manually enter page names one at a time, go to the Order Pages tab of the eCatalog screen. Then click in the page number field and enter a name. Enter a name for each page you want to name.

Importing page names

Importing page names is recommended if you are dealing with an eCatalog with many pages. You can import the names from a tab-delimited or XML file.

The TOC label is stored in an image’s User Data field; format this data as a list of name=<value> pairs separated by two question marks “??”. For example, to set one label for a TOC field named tocEN, set the User Data of the image to: tocEN=<EN_page_label>

To set separate labels for TOC fields named tocEN and tocFR: tocEN=<EN_page_label>??tocFR=<FR_page_label>

To import the User Data field in a tab-delimited file, include the field userdata:

IPSID

<image_IPS_ID>

Userdata

tocEN=<EN_page_label>??tocFR=<FR_page_label>

To import the User Data field in an XML file, include the attribute vc_userdata

:

<ips>

<ghw_object vc_objectname="<image_IPS_ID>" … vc_userdata=" tocEN=<EN_page_label>??tocFR=<FR_page_label>" … />

</ips>

To import page names from a tab-delimited or XML file, select the TOC Labels button and choose Import. The Import

TOC Using Metadata dialog box appears. Select the Browse button and import the CSV file or XML file that associates each page with a page name. If you are importing an XML data file and you want to use an XSL translation table that you previously added to SPS, choose that table from the XSLT File menu. (However, if your Java runtime environment on your server doesn't support XSLT, the list doesn’t appear.)

83

Creating eCatalog Image Maps

An Image Map is a region on an eCatalog page that you can roll over with your mouse or click to trigger actions of various kinds. When you move the pointer over an Image Map, you see for example, a rollover-text description of an item. When you click an Image Map, another action can be initiated. For example, you can open a web page so that viewers can learn more about an item or purchase it.

Drawing eCatalog Image Maps

For eCatalogs, you draw Image Maps on the Map Pages tab of the eCatalog screen. This screen consists of the Image

Map area where eCatalog pages are displayed and, on the right, the Image Map list. As you create Image Maps, their names are entered on the Image Map List.

1

Open the eCatalog in Detail view and click Edit. Then click Map Pages.

2

On the left of the Map Pages screen, select the page you want.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eCatalogs

3

In the Image Map area, draw a rectangular or polygonal (many-sided) Image Map:

Rectangular map

Select the Rectangle Image Map tool and drag on the page to create the rectangle.

Polygonal map

Select the Polygon Image Map tool and click as many times as necessary around the perimeter of the image. As you click, Scene7 draws the borders of the Image Map.

4

Enter a name for the Image Map, if desired. After you draw an Image Map, Scene7 assigns it a name in the Image

Map list. To form the name, Scene7 appends a sequential number to the name of the eCatalog page in which you are working. Don’t include blank spaces in the name you enter.

5

You can have viewers open a new web page when they click the Image Map. Go to the Image Map list and enter the

URL of the web page in the URL column. You can select the Edit button and enter a template to make entering

URLs (Href templates) easier. See “ Using a template to enter JavaScript and URLs ” on page 168.

6

You can display rollover text when viewers move their pointers over your Image Map. Go to the Image Map list, select the Show button, and choose Rollover Text. Then enter the text you want viewers to see onscreen when they move their pointers over the Image Map. You can write the text in a word processor and copy it into the Rollover

Text field.

7

You can trigger a blur or focus action when users moves their pointers over an Image Map. Go to the Image Map

list, select the Show button and choose Other Actions, and enter an attribute. See “ Defining other actions for Image

Maps ” on page 169.

8

Click Save to save your Image Map.

As you create Image Maps, you can preview them in the eCatalog Viewer. Select the Preview button to preview the eCatalog with the default eCatalog Viewer Preset.

To delete an Image Map, select its name in the Image Map list and select the Delete button. To temporarily remove an

Image Map from a page without deleting the Image Map, deselect the Image Map’s On option on the Image Map List.

More Help topics

“ Creating Image Maps ” on page 165

“ Import Image Map data ” on page 85

Editing eCatalog Image Maps

Starting on the Map Pages tab of the eCatalog Screen, use these techniques to edit eCatalog Image Maps:

Adjusting the position

Select the Pan tool and move the pointer near but not over the border of the map. When the

pointer shows a four-headed arrow, drag the border. See “ Adjusting the position, shape, and size of Image Maps ” on page 167.

Changing the shape and size

To resize a rectangular Image Map, select the Select tool. Then move the pointer over a side or corner, and when you see the double-headed arrow icon, drag. To resize a polygonal Image Map, drag a square

selection handle. To create a selection handle, click the border of the Image Map and start dragging. See “ Adjusting the position, shape, and size of Image Maps ” on page 167.

Handling overlapping Image Maps

Drag to change the order of Image Maps on the Image Map list. See “ Handling overlapping Image Maps ” on page 167.

Copying Image Maps

Select the Copy Maps To button. On the Select Images screen, select the page or pages where you

want to copy the Image Maps, and click the Select button. See “ Copying Image Maps to other images ” on page 167.

84

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eCatalogs

Reviewing and importing Image Map data

The Map Summary screen provides metadata about your eCatalog. You can also batch-import Image Map data for your eCatalog starting on the Map Summary screen. Importing Image Map data this way makes it easier to enter Image

Map URLs and rollover text.

To see the Map Summary screen, click the Summary button on the Map Pages tab of the eCatalog screen.

Review Image Map data summary

1

On the Map Pages screen, click Summary.

The Map Summary screen displays how many Image Maps, URLs, rollover text descriptions, and other actions are in your eCatalog.

2

If there are rollover key errors, click the error in the Rollover_Key Error column to see what needs to change in your spreadsheet to correct the error. You can select and copy the text from this message and paste it into your spreadsheet.

3

Click Preview to examine a page in the eCatalog Viewer, click the X to close the Summary screen and return to the

Map Pages screen, or click Close to return to Browse.

Import Image Map data

Rather than enter Image Map data on each page, you can import the data for your entire eCatalog into the Map

Summary screen. You import the Image Map data in the form of a tab-delimited file or XML DTD. The fields in your file must be in the order shown in the Map Summary screen: Name, TOC Labels, Maps, URLs, Rollover Text, Other

Actions, and Search Strings. Importing Image Map data saves you the trouble of entering the data in the Image Map

List as you create each Image Map.

Note: Before importing Image Map data, you must have already created the Image Maps.

Starting on the Map Summary screen, follow these steps to import Image Map data for Image Maps you have created:

1

Click Import Map Data. The Import Metadata dialog box appears.

2

Click Browse and select the tab-delimited or XML DTD file.

3

In the Job Name field, type a name for the file (be careful to retain its extension).

4

Click Upload.

85

Managing Info Panel content

In addition to using Image Map text for your rollovers in eCatalogs, you can use an Info Panel to add larger quantities of rollover text, including links. You can also manage the InfoPanel by using timed caching and scheduling content updates.

You can manage your InfoPanel setup and data using the following features in Scene7:

• InfoPanel Setup panel lets you specify the template used to display the Info Panel text, a default response for errors, and the number of hours the information is cached. In addition, you can specify whether the eCatalogs is automatically published.

• InfoPanel Datafeed panel lets you specify a CSV file containing the text you want to appear in the InfoPanel rollover text, as well as schedule times for updating the information.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eCatalogs

• Import Metadata dialog box (accessed from the Map Pages view) lets you import a tab-delimited TXT file containing the rollover text information. You can use this TXT option or the Datafeed panel with the CSV file option for your rollover text.

• Map Pages view provides an option for previewing the xml that appears for specific image maps.

Set up a Response Template

You can select one of three preset response templates for displaying text in an Info Panel. These preset response templates determine how your information is presented in the Info Panel: how many columns and rows, typeface size, font, and so on. You can select a preset response template or create one of your own.

Note: You can also set up the Response Template in the Viewer Preset. To use the Response Template in the Viewer Preset

instead, add “fmt=1” to the end of the Information Server URL in the Viewer Preset. (See “ Setting up eCatalog Viewer

Presets ” on page

1

Double-click your eCatalog to open it in Detail View.

2

Click the InfoPanel Setup panel to open it.

3

Select a Response Template:

Select a preset from the Response Template menu. The XML for the template design appears in the User

Template box.

• Select User Entered, to create your own response template. Type the template XML definition in the User

Template box. You can use the preset templates as a base for your own.

4

(Optional) In the Default Response box, type the text you want to appear if Scene7 encounters an error in retrieving information for an image map. For example, if the system receives a company name and an eCatalog name, but no rollover identifier, this message appears for the user.

5

In the Response TTL box, enter the number of hours you want to wait before caching the data:

Set a lower number if the data is updated frequently throughout a day.

• Set a higher number if the data is relatively stable and doesn’t require updating frequently throughout the day.

The default is ten hours.

6

Select Enable or Disable from the Automatic Publishing menu.

Note: Disabling automatic publishing is useful when you are testing the response template. You can click Publish To

InfoServer at any time to publish the eCatalog.

Import source content for the Info Panel

You can use comma-separated value files (CSV) or tab delimited files (TXT) for the source text for an Info Panel for an eCatalog. Tab delimited files must use UTF16 (Unicode) encoding. You import the different file types using different methods.

When formatting source content, keep in mind the following guidelines:

Make sure that the tab and comma delimited data contains as many columns as are necessary for the rollover template.

Make sure that the first item or column of data is the rollover identifier (associated with the rollover_key value from the image map URLs).

• Make sure that each tab or comma delimited item after the identifier is the item you want substituted into the response template (so the first column is substituted into $1$, the second column into $2$, and so on).

86

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eCatalogs

Import CSV content from an externally hosted location

1

Double-click the eCatalog to open it in Detail View.

2

Click the InfoPanel Datafeed panel to open it.

3

Enter the URL for the CSV file in the Update Source box. You can paste the URL into this field or type it directly.

4

(Optional) Specify a time to update the content using the Schedule Update menus and click Add. You can select multiple times for updating. Each update time appears in the Update Times box. (To remove a time, select it and click Delete.)

5

(Optional) Click Run Update Now to immediately update the content.

Import a tab-delimited or CSV file

1

Double-click the eCatalog to open it in Detail View.

2

Click Edit and then click Map Pages.

3

Click Import Metadata to open the Import Metadata dialog box.

4

Click Info Panel for Metadata Type.

5

Click Browse, select the tab delimited TXT file or CSV file you want to use, and click Open.

6

Click Upload.

Scene7 sends you an e-mail message letting you know if the upload was successful or not.

Preview rollover key text for an Image Map

Using the Map Pages screen, you can easily and quickly view Info Panel text for the Image Maps on a specific page of your eCatalog.

1

Double-click the eCatalog to open it in Detail View.

2

Click Edit and then click Map Pages.

3

At the top of the table on the right side of the screen, choose Info Panel from the Show menu.

The rollover-key text appears next to each Image Map that contains Info Panel text.

87

Setting up eCatalog Viewer Presets

eCatalog Viewer Presets determine the style, behavior, and look of eCatalog Viewers. Scene7 provides eCatalog Viewer

Presets, and you can create your own eCatalog Viewer Presets as well if you are an administrator.

To create a new preset, you can start from scratch or start with a Scene7-provided eCatalog Viewer Preset and save it under a new name. You can create your own eCatalog Viewer Presets to present printed material in your company colors and set the tone. eCatalog Viewer Presets offer more than a hundred settings for going from page to page, zooming, searching, and

(Enterprise users only) choosing “skins.” What these controls look like and what the Viewer itself looks like depends on your choice of eCatalog Viewer Presets.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eCatalogs

Follow these steps to create a eCatalog Viewer Preset (you must be an administrator):

1

Click Setup > Viewer Presets.

The Viewer Presets screen opens. This screen lists Viewer Presets for all rich media assets (eCatalogs, Zoom, Spin

Sets, and Image Sets).

2

Create an eCatalog Viewer Preset by starting anew or by starting from an existing eCatalog Viewer Preset:

Creating an eCatalog Viewer Preset

Select the Add menu and choose eCatalogs.

Editing an eCatalog Viewer Preset

Display the eCatalog Viewer Presets, select the preset that is most like the one you want to create, and select the Edit button.

3

On the Configure Viewer screen, enter a name for your eCatalog Viewer Preset.

4

Choose options in the Configure Viewer screen. To see a description of an option, click the Info Tip icon adjacent to the option.

The preview screen displays the viewer as you update and change settings.

5

To add community features (Email, Embed, Link, Visit) to the viewer, specify options for any of the following in the Viewer Features panel:

Email

Click On to enable an Email button in the viewer. When users click the Email button while viewing the eCatalog, an email containing the link to the eCatalog opens.

Embed

Click Enabled. In the Embed Button Label box, type the name you want displayed in the viewer for the

Embed Button. If desired, click Browse to locate and select a custom skin for the button.

Link

Click Enabled. In the Link Button Label box, type the name you want displayed in the viewer for the Link

Button. If desired, click Browse to locate and select a custom skin for the button.

Visit

Click Enabled. In the Visit Button Label box, type the name you want displayed in the viewer for the Visit

Button. In the Visit URL box, type the URL to the website that you want to open when the link is clicked.

Note: Custom skins are available for Enterprise users only.

6

(Optional) In the Info Panel Settings, the Information Server URL option can include the following special tokens, which the viewer substitutes:

Token

$1$

$2$

$3$

Substituted with

rollover_key value frame imageroot

Notes

The item identifier from the <area> element of the map.

The sequence number of the currently shown frame in the image set.

The first path element of the first item specified in the image command (typically the image catalog ID of the catalog entry specifying the image set).

7

(Optional) In the Info Panel Settings, in the Response Template box, type the text you want to appear if Scene7 encounters an error in retrieving information for an image map. For example, if the system receives a company name and an eCatalog name, but no rollover identifier, this message appears for the user.

Important: To use this Response Template instead of the template defined in the eCatalog itself, add “fmt=1” to the end of the Information Server URL. For example: HTTP://.../$3$/$4$/$1$/?FMT=1.

8

Click Save.

9

Click Make Default if you want the eCatalog Viewer Preset you created to be the one that is used to display eCatalogs on your web page.

To delete an eCatalog Viewer Preset, select it on the Viewer Presets screen and click Delete.

88

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eCatalogs

More Help topics

“ Viewer Presets ” on page 19

Previewing eCatalogs in the eCatalog Viewer

To see what your eCatalog looks like, you can display your eCatalog using different eCatalog Viewer Presets. Follow these steps to preview eCatalogs:

1

In the Browse Panel, select the eCatalog that you want to preview with different eCatalog Viewer Presets.

2

Select the Preview button. The Preview screen opens and you see your eCatalog in the default eCatalog Viewer.

You can experiment with the different controls to turn pages, write sticky notes, and browse.

More Help topics

“ Setting up eCatalog Viewer Presets ” on page 87

Publishing eCatalogs

Publishing places your eCatalog on Scene7 Image Servers so it can be made available to your website or application.

As part of the publishing process, the Scene7 Publishing System activates the URL string. You can place this URL string in your HTML web page code.

Make sure your eCatalog is marked for publish in the Browse Panel or Asset Details page before you publish it. To mark an eCatalog (or any other asset) for publish, select the Mark for Publish icon .

To publish your eCatalog to Scene7 Image Servers:

1

Select the Publish button on the Global Navigation bar.

2

On the Publish screen, select a When option (One-Time or Recurring).

3

Optionally, enter a name for the publish job (but keep the time-and-date stamp).

4

If you set up your eCatalog so that viewers can perform keyword searches, make sure that the keyword data is published. Select Advanced to display the Advanced options, select the Publish menu, and choose Full W/ Search

Data. (This option is selected by default.)

5

Select the Start Publish button.

More Help topics

“ Publishing ” on page 41

Linking an eCatalog to a web page

Your websites and applications access Scene7 Image Server content, including eCatalogs, via URL strings. These URL strings are activated during the publishing process. To place the URL string for your eCatalog in your web pages and applications, you copy it from the Scene7 Publishing System.

Important: The URL is not active until you publish the asset.

Last updated 5/21/2010

89

USING SCENE7

eCatalogs

Obtaining an eCatalog URL

After you have published your eCatalog, obtain its eCatalog URL string from the Preview screen. Select the Preview button, choose File > Preview, or select the rollover Preview button. The Preview screen opens. Select the Copy URL button. The URL is copied to the Clipboard.

Adding eCatalog URLs to your web page

The most common way to deploy an eCatalog is to place a link in the form of an eCatalog thumbnail cover page on your web page. Work with your IT team to make sure that the eCatalog launches in a clean, centered pop-up window.

Ask your IT team to keep the toolbar and address bar in the browser from showing.

Following is an example of HTML code that launches a sample pop-up window eCatalog Viewer. To use this code, copy your eCatalog URL into this code and place this code on your website or application.

<html>

<head>

<script language="javascript">

<!-- function openECatalog(){ window.open("http://s7d4.scene7.com/s7ondemand/brochure/ flash_brochure.jsp?company=YourCo&sku=june06");

-->

</script>

</head>

<body>

<a href="javascript:openECatalog();">Click Here to View

Your eCatalog</a>

</body>

</html>

90

Last updated 5/21/2010

Chapter 9: Image Sets

Scene7 Image Sets (for Enterprise users only) give users an integrated viewing experience. In the dynamic Image Set

Viewer, users can see different views of an item by clicking a thumbnail image. Image Sets allow you to present alternative high-resolution views of an item.

The Image Set Viewer offers zooming tools for examining images closely. If you want, you can make guided zoom targets and Image Maps part of your Image Set. Image Sets make for a more concerted, intimate viewing experience.

Quick Start: Image Sets

This Image Sets Quick Start is designed to help you get up and running quickly with Image Set techniques in Scene7.

1.

Uploading the images

Start by uploading the images for your Image Sets. Because users can zoom on images in the Image Set Viewer, take zooming into account when you choose images. Make sure that the images are least 2000 pixels in the largest dimension. Scene7 supports many image file formats, but lossless TIFF, PNG, and EPS images are recommended.

Select the Upload button on the Global Navigation bar to upload files from your computer to a folder on the Scene7

Publishing System.

See “ Preparing Image Set assets for upload

” on page 92 and “ Uploading your files ” on page 38.

2.

Creating an Image Set

In Image Sets, users click thumbnail images in the Image Set Viewer to see an image from a different side or angle.

To create an Image Set, select the Build button and choose Image Sets. Then, on the Image Set screen, drag your images onto the screen.

See “ Creating an Image Set ” on page 92.

3.

Setting up Image Set Viewer Presets

Administrators can create or modify Image Set Viewer Presets. Scene7 comes with default Viewer Presets for each rich media type. Use the Zoom Viewer: Custom > Images or Image Sets/Multiple Views presets to view your Image Sets.

You add or edit Viewer Presets from the Application Setup screen.

See “ Creating and editing Viewer Presets ” on page 20.

4.

Previewing an Image Set

Select the Image Set in the Browse Panel and click the Preview button. Your Image Set appears in this screen. You can click the thumbnail icons to examine your Image Set in the selected Viewer. You can choose different Viewers from the Presets menu.

See “ Previewing assets ” on page 52.

5.

Publishing an Image Set

Publishing an Image Set places it on Scene7 servers and activates the URL string.

Last updated 5/21/2010

91

USING SCENE7

Image Sets

Cick the Mark for Publish icon to the left of its name in the Browse Panel. Then, click Publish. On the Publish screen, click Start Publish.

See “ Publishing ” on page 41.

6.

Linking an Image Set to a web page

Scene7 creates URL calls for Image Sets, and activates them after you publish. You can copy these URLs from the

Preview screen.

Select the Image Set, and then select the Preview button. The Preview screen opens. Select an Image Set Viewer Preset and select the Copy URL button.

See “ Linking an Image Set to a web page ” on page 94.

92

Preparing Image Set assets for upload

Before uploading the images you need for Image Sets to the Scene7 Publishing System, make sure that the images are the right size and format.

To create a multiple-view Image Set, you need images that show an item from different points of view or show different aspects of the same item. The goal is to highlight the important features of an item so viewers have a complete picture of what it looks like or does.

Because users can zoom images in Image Sets, make sure that the images are at least 2000 pixels in the largest dimension. Scene7 supports many image file formats, but lossless TIFF, PNG, and EPS images are recommended.

For detailed instructions on uploading assets, see “ Uploading files ” on page 35.

More Help topics

“ Uploading your files ” on page 38

“ Working with vignette, window covering, and cabinet files ” on page 178

“ ACO files ” on page 180

Creating an Image Set

To create a multiple-view Image Set, you need images that show an item from different points of view or show different aspects of the same item. The goal is to present viewers with images of an item so they get a solid idea of what an item looks like or does.

More Help topics

“ Creating and editing Viewer Presets ” on page 20

“ Previewing assets ” on page 52

“ Publishing ” on page 41

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Image Sets

Create an Image Set

1

Begin creating your Image Set with one of these techniques:

Select the images first

In the Browse Panel, select the images you want for your Image Set, select the Build button, and choose Image Sets on the menu. The Image Set screen opens.

Start from the Image Set screen

Select the Build button and choose Image Sets. The Image Set screen opens. Select a folder in the Asset Library and drag the images you want for your Image Set onto the Image Set screen.

2

To change the order of images drag the images to new locations.

3

Click Save, select a folder for storing your Image Set, enter a name for the set, and click Submit.

4

To see your Image Set in the Image Set Viewer, click the Preview button on the Image Set screen. You can click swatch thumbnails in the Image Set Viewer to see how they behave.

Edit an Image Set

1

Double-click the Image Set in the Browse Panel to open it in Detail view.

2

Click Edit to open the Image Set screen.

3

Do any of the following:

To remove an image, select it and click Delete.

• To reorder images, drag an image to a new location.

93

Including zoom targets and Image Maps in Image Sets

If you define zoom targets and Image Maps for the images in your Image Set, these targets and maps appear in the

Image Set Viewer. Users, for example, can click an Image Map in the Image Set Viewer and open a new page on your website with information about an item. Users can click a target thumbnail image in the Image Set Viewer and zoom automatically to part of an image.

If you want to make zoom targets and Image Maps available to users, create zoom targets and Image Maps for the images in your Image Set. You can do that with the Image Maps or Zoom Targets tools in the Image Set screen or

Browse Panel (in Detail view).

More Help topics

“ Creating zoom targets for Guided Zoom ” on page 73

“ Creating Image Maps ” on page 165

Viewing Image Sets

You can view your Image Sets in the Preview window, using your available presets. You use a Zoom Viewer: Custom

Viewer Preset for Image Sets.

Scene7 comes with default Viewer Presets. Administrators can create or modify the Viewer Presets.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Image Sets

More Help topics

“ Viewer Presets ” on page 19

Setting up Zoom Viewer presets for Image Sets

You can create and customize Viewer Presets to suit your needs.

1

Click the Setup > Viewer Presets.

2

Create or edit a Viewer preset on the Viewer Presets screen by doing one of the following:

Creating

Click Add and choose Zoom Viewer:Custom, and then select Images, Image Sets/Multiple Views, or

Image Sets/Color Swatches. You can also create a Viewer Preset by starting from an existing one. Display the name of the preset, select it, and then select the Edit button. On the Configure Viewer screen, enter a new name for the preset.

Editing

Display the name of a preset, select it, and then click the Edit button.

3

Choose options in the Configure Viewer screen. You can specify options for Skin SWFs, Zoom Settings, Viewer

Features, Zoom Target Settings, Image Map Settings, Color Options settings, Info Panel Settings, and Core Settings.

To see a description of an option, click the Info Tip icon adjacent to the option.

The preview screen displays the viewer as you update and change settings.

4

Click Save.

Previewing Image Sets in a Viewer

1

In the Browse Panel, select the Image Set that you want to preview.

2

Click the Preview button to open the Preview screen.

3

Select a Viewer Preset from the Presets menu.

You can preview a different Viewer Preset by choosing its name on the Presets menu.

94

Linking an Image Set to a web page

After you publish an Image Set, you can use its URL for use in your website or application. Then you can deploy the

URL as necessary so users can view the Image Set on your website or application.

Important: The URL is not active until you publish the asset.

More Help topics

“ Previewing assets ” on page 52

“ Publishing ” on page 41

Obtaining an Image Set URL

1

Select the Image Set in the Browse Panel, and click the Preview button.

2

In the Preview screen, choose an Image Set Viewer preset from the Presets menu.

3

Click the Copy URL button.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Image Sets

Adding Image Set URLs to your web page

The most common way to deploy Image Sets is to place a link (via a navigation icon) on your web page. When clicked, the link launches a dynamic page (ASP or JSP) that displays the Image Set in a pop-up zoom window. The zoom link opens a pop-up window that contains the actual zoom feature. Here is an example of the code:

<script language="javascript">

<!-- function zoom_window() { window.open("http://sample.scene7.com/s7ondemand/zoom/flasht_zoom.jsp?company=S7Web&sku=swea ter_1_set","",

"toolbar=no,location=no,directories=no,"+

"status=no,menubar=no,scrollbars=yes"+

"resizable=yes,width=500,height=450,top=0,left=0,right=0,bottom=0")

}

-->

</script>

The URL call to the Scene7 platform follows the same protocol as all zoom viewers, except the SKU parameter is now the Image Set name.

http://sample.scene7.com/s7ondemand/zoom/flasht_zoom.jsp?company=S7Web&sku=sweater_1_set

In the above URL, notice a SKU number ( sku=sweater_1_set

). The string after sku= would be the Image Set name

( sweater_1_set

). The user clicks the zoom feature link that launches a window.

95

Last updated 5/21/2010

Chapter 10: Swatch Sets

Scene7 Swatch Sets (for Enterprise users only) give users an integrated viewing experience. In the dynamic Swatch Set

Viewer, users can see an item rendered in a different color, material, texture, finish, or fabric merely by clicking a thumbnail.

Quick Start: Swatch Sets

This Swatch Sets Quick Start is designed to help you get up and running quickly with Swatch Set techniques in Scene7.

1.

Uploading the images and swatch files

Start by uploading the images and swatch files for your Swatch Sets.

Click Upload on the Global Navigation bar to upload files from your computer to a folder on the Scene7 Publishing

System. See “ Preparing Swatch Set assets for upload

” on page 97and “ Uploading your files ” on page 38.

2.

Creating a Swatch Set

To create a Swatch Set, select the Build button and choose Swatch Sets. Then, on the Swatch Set screen, drag images,

vignettes, color swatches, and Swatch Sets onto the screen. See “ Creating a Swatch Set ” on page 97.

3.

Setting up Swatch Set Viewer Presets

Administrators can create or modify Image Set Viewer Presets. Scene7 comes with default Viewer Presets for each rich media type. Use the Zoom Viewer: Custom > Image Sets/Color Swatches presets to view your Swatch Sets.

See “ Creating and editing Viewer Presets ” on page 20.

4.

Previewing a Swatch Set

Select the Swatch Set in the Browse Panel and click the Preview button. Your Swatch Set appears in this screen. You can click the thumbnail and swatch icons to examine your Swatch Set in the selected Viewer. You can choose different

Viewers from the Presets menu.

See “ Previewing assets ” on page 52.

5.

Publishing a Swatch Set

Publishing a Swatch Set places it on Scene7 servers and activates the URL string.

Click the Mark For Publish icon to the left of its name in the Browse Panel. Then, click Publish. On the Publish screen, click Start Publish.

See “ Publishing ” on page 41.

6.

Linking a Swatch Set to a web page

Scene7 creates URL calls for Swatch Sets, and activates them after you publish. You can copy these URLs from the

Preview screen.

Select the Swatch Set, and then select the Preview button. The Preview screen opens. Select a Swatch Set Viewer Preset

and select the Copy URL button. See “ Linking a Swatch Set to a web page ” on page 99.

Last updated 5/21/2010

96

USING SCENE7

Swatch Sets

Preparing Swatch Set assets for upload

Before uploading the images you need, make sure that the images are the right size and format. Also assemble the swatch files you need.

To create a Swatch Set, you need vignettes or different shots of the same image showing it in different colors, patterns, or finishes. You also need swatch files that correspond to the different colors, patterns, or finishes. For example, to present a Swatch Set showing the same jacket in black, brown, and green, you need:

A black, brown, and green shot of the same jacket.

• A black, brown, and green color swatch.

Because users can zoom images in Swatch Sets, make sure that the images are at least 2000 pixels in the largest dimension. Scene7 supports many image file formats, but lossless TIFF, PNG, and EPS images are recommended. For swatches, you can upload ACO files.

For detailed instructions on uploading assets, see “ Uploading files ” on page 35.

More Help topics

“ Uploading your files ” on page 38

“ Working with vignette, window covering, and cabinet files ” on page 178

“ ACO files ” on page 180

97

Creating a Swatch Set

A Swatch Set gives users the opportunity to view an item in a different color, pattern, or finish. To create a Swatch Set with color swatches, you need one image for each different color, pattern, or finish you want to present to users. You also need one color, pattern, or finish swatch for each color, pattern, or finish.

For example, suppose you want to present images of caps with different color bills; the bills are red, green, and blue.

In this case, you need three shots of the same cap. You need one shot with a red, one with a green, and one with a blue bill. You also need a red, green, and blue color swatch. The color swatches serve as the thumbnails that users click in the Swatch Set Viewer to see the red-billed, green-billed, or blue-billed cap.

More Help topics

“ Creating and editing Viewer Presets ” on page 20

“ Previewing assets ” on page 52

“ Publishing ” on page 41

Create a Swatch Set

1

Begin creating your Swatch Set with one of these techniques:

Select the images first

In the Browse Panel, select the images, and then click the Build button and choose Swatch

Sets on the menu. The Swatch Set screen opens.

Start from the Swatch Set screen

Click the Build button and choose Swatch Sets. The Swatch Sets screen opens.

Select a folder in the Asset Library and drag the images onto the Views section of the Swatch Set screen.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Swatch Sets

2

Drag swatch colors, patterns, or finishes into the Swatches placeholder box on the Swatch Set screen.

Make sure that the color, pattern, or finish swatch you drag into each placeholder represents the color, pattern, or finish of the adjacent image.

3

To change the order of images in your Swatch Set, drag the images to new locations.

4

Click Save, select a folder for storing your color swatch Swatch Set, enter a name for the set, and click Submit.

5

To see your Swatch Set in the Swatch Set Viewer, click the Preview button on the Swatch Set screen. You can click swatch thumbnails in the Swatch Set Viewer to see how they behave.

Edit a Swatch Set

1

Double-click the Swatch Set in the Browse Panel to open it in Detail view.

2

Click Edit to open the Swatch Set screen.

3

Do any of the following:

• To remove an image or swatch, select it and click Delete.

To reorder images, drag an image to a new location.

98

Including zoom targets and Image Maps in Swatch Sets

If you define zoom targets and Image Maps for the images in your Swatch Set, these targets and maps appear in the

Swatch Set Viewer. Users, for example, can click an Image Map in the Swatch Set Viewer and open a new page on your website with information about an item. Users can click a target thumbnail image in the Swatch Set Viewer and zoom automatically to part of an image.

If you want to make zoom targets and Image Maps available to users, create zoom targets and Image Maps for the images in your Swatch Set. You can do that with the Image Maps or Zoom Targets tools in the Swatch Set screen or

Browse Panel (in Detail view).

More Help topics

“ Creating zoom targets for Guided Zoom ” on page 73

“ Creating Image Maps ” on page 165

Viewing Swatch Sets

You can view your Swatch Sets in the Preview window, using your available presets. You use a Zoom Viewer: Custom

Viewer Preset for Swatch Sets.

Scene7 comes with default Viewer Presets. Administrators can create or modify the Viewer Presets.

More Help topics

“ Viewer Presets ” on page 19

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Swatch Sets

Setting up Zoom Viewer presets for Swatch Sets

You can create and customize Viewer Presets to suit your needs.

1

Click Setup > Viewer Presets.

The Viewer Presets window opens.

2

Do one of the following:

To create a new preset, click Add and choose Swatch Set Viewer.

• To edit an existing Swatch Set Viewer preset, select the preset and click Edit.

The Configure Viewer screen opens.

3

Type a name in the Preset Name box for the Swatch Set Viewer preset.

4

Choose options in the Configure Viewer screen. You can specify options for Skin SWFs, Zoom Settings, Viewer

Features, Zoom Target Settings, Color Options settings, Image Map Settings, Info Panel Settings, and Core Settings.

To see a description of an option, click the Info Tip icon adjacent to the option.

The preview screen displays the viewer as you update and change settings.

5

Click Save.

Previewing Swatch Sets in a Viewer

1

In the Browse Panel, select the Swatch Set that you want to preview.

2

Click the Preview button to open the Preview screen.

3

Select a Viewer Preset from the Presets menu.

You can preview a different Viewer Preset by choosing its name on the Presets menu.

99

Linking a Swatch Set to a web page

After you publish a Swatch Set, you can use its URL for use in your website or application. Then you can deploy the

URL as necessary so users can view the Swatch Set on your website or application.

Important: The URL is not active until you publish the asset.

More Help topics

“ Previewing assets ” on page 52

“ Publishing ” on page 41

Obtaining a Swatch Set URL

1

Select the Swatch Set in the Browse Panel, and click the Preview button.

2

In the Preview screen, choose a Swatch Set Viewer preset from the Presets menu.

3

Click the Copy URL button.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Swatch Sets

Adding Swatch Set URLs to your web page

The most common way to deploy Swatch Sets is to place a link (via a navigation icon) on your web page. When clicked, the link launches a dynamic page (ASP or JSP) that displays the Swatch Set in a pop-up zoom window. The zoom link opens a pop-up window that contains the actual zoom feature. Here is an example of the code:

<script language="javascript">

<!-- function zoom_window() { window.open("http://sample.scene7.com/s7ondemand/zoom/flasht_zoom.jsp?company=S7Web&sku=swea ter_1_set","",

"toolbar=no,location=no,directories=no,"+

"status=no,menubar=no,scrollbars=yes"+

"resizable=yes,width=500,height=450,top=0,left=0,right=0,bottom=0")

}

-->

</script>

The URL call to the Scene7 platform follows the same protocol as all zoom viewers, except the SKU parameter is now the Swatch Set name.

http://sample.scene7.com/s7ondemand/zoom/flasht_zoom.jsp?company=S7Web&sku=sweater_1_set

In the above URL, notice a SKU number ( sku=sweater_1_set

). The string after sku= would be the Swatch Set name

( sweater_1_set

). The user clicks the zoom feature link that launches a window.

100

Last updated 5/21/2010

Chapter 11: Spin Sets

A Spin Set simulates the real-world act of turning an object to examine it. Spin Sets make it possible to view items from any angle, gaining the key visual details from any angle. Using your pedestal-shot, flip-book photography, in which you shoot an item frame-by-frame at different angles, the Spin Set viewer plays back the images smoothly. A Spin Set simulates a 360-degree viewing experience. You can “free-form” zoom and pan any of the views with a few simple mouse-clicks. In this way, you can examine an item more closely from a particular viewpoint.

101

Images for a spin set

Quick Start: Spin Sets

This Spin Sets Quick Start is designed to help you get up and running quickly with Spin Set techniques in Scene7.

Follow steps 1 through 7. At the end of each step is a cross-reference to a topic heading where you can find more information if you need it.

1.

Creating and uploading the images

At minimum, you need 8–12 shots of an item for a Spin Set. The shots must be taken at regular intervals to give the impression that the item is rotating. For example, if your Spin Set includes 12 shots, rotate the item 30 degrees (360/12) for each shot. One way to shoot at regular intervals is to shoot the item on a turntable with a fixed lighting and camera angle.

Select the Upload button on the Global Navigation bar to upload spin images from your computer or network to the

Scene7 Publishing System. See “ Guidelines for shooting Spin Set images ” on page 102.

2.

Creating a Spin Set

To create a Spin Set, select the images you need for the set, select the Build button, and choose Spin Sets. You can also

select the Build button, choose Spin Sets, and select images for the set on the Spin Set screen. See “ Creating a Spin Set ” on page 102.

3.

Editing a Spin Set

To edit a Spin Set, display it in Detail view and select the Edit button. The Spin Set screen opens. Drag and drop an image to change its position in the Spin Set. Select the Delete Asset button to remove an image from the set. See

“ Editing a Spin Set ” on page 103.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Spin Sets

4.

Setting up Spin Set Viewer Presets

Administrators can create Spin Set Viewer Presets. These presets determine the look of the Spin Set Viewer. To set up a new Spin Set Viewer Preset, select the Setup button on the Global Navigation bar. On the Setup screen, display

Application Setup options, and then select Viewer Presets.

On the Viewer Presets screen, select the Add menu and choose Spin Set. Then choose options in the Configure Viewer

screen. See “ Setting up Spin Set Viewer Presets ” on page 103.

5.

Previewing a Spin Set

Select your Spin Set in the Browse Panel and double-click it, select the Preview button, or select the rollover Preview button. The Preview screen opens. You can click the Next Frame and Previous Frame buttons to give the item a spin.

See “ Previewing a Spin Set ” on page 104.

6.

Publishing a Spin Set

Publishing a Spin Set places it on Scene7 servers so it can be dynamically delivered to your website or application. It also activates the URL string that calls the Spin Set from Scene7 Image servers to your website or application.

To publish a Spin Set, mark it for publish by selecting the Mark for Publish icon beside its name in the Browse

Panel. Select the Publish button on the Global Navigation bar to initiate a publish. On the Publish screen, select the

Start Publish button. See “ Publishing a Spin Set ” on page 104.

7.

Linking a Spin Set to a web page

Scene7 creates URL callout strings for Spin Sets, and activates them after you publish them. You can copy these URLs from the Preview screen.

Select the Spin Set, and then select the Preview button. The Preview screen opens. Select a Spin Set Viewer Preset. Then

select the Copy URL button. See “ Linking a Spin Set to a web page ” on page 105.

102

Creating a Spin Set

To create an effective Spin Set, make sure that you shoot the images correctly. You can create a Spin Set in Scene7 by selecting the Build button and choosing Spin Sets. Edit Spin Sets in the Spin Sets screen.

Guidelines for shooting Spin Set images

In general, the more images you have in a Spin Set, the better the image spinning effect is. However, including many images in the set also increases the amount of time it takes for the images to load. Scene7 recommends these guidelines for shooting images for use in Spin Sets:

• At minimum, use 8–12 images in the set.

Use a lossless format; TIFF and PNG are recommended.

• Mask all images so the item appears on a pure white or other high-contrast background. Optionally, add shadows.

Make sure that product details are well lighted and in focus.

• Take spin images for fashion clothing with a mannequin or model. Often the mannequin is either completely masked (using a glass mannequin) or a stylized mannequin/dressform is shown in the image. You can create an onmodel spin set by defining the number of angles. Mark each angle with tape on the floor to guide the model to step and look in the direction of each shot. An on-model Spin Set can include either 4–8 shots.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Spin Sets

When you shoot objects for a Spin Set, do so on a turntable with a fixed lighting and camera angle. Document your turntable, lighting, and camera settings so you can shoot Spin Sets consistently.

Making a Spin Set

Follow these steps to create a Spin Set:

1

Begin creating your Spin Set with one of these techniques:

Select the images first

In the Browse Panel, select the images you want for your Spin Set, select the Build button, and choose Spin Sets on the menu. The Spin Set screen opens.

Start from the Spin Set screen

Select the Build button and choose Spin Sets. The Spin Set screen opens. Select a folder in the Asset Library and drag the images you want for your Spin Set onto the Spin Set screen.

2

If necessary, change the order of images by dragging and dropping the images to new locations. After you drag and drop, images are reordered on the Spin Set screen.

3

Select the Save button, select a folder for storing your Spin Set, enter a name for the set, and select the Submit button.

On the Spin Set screen, you can select the Preview button to see what your Spin Set looks like in the default Spin Set

Viewer. Try selecting the Previous Frame and Next Frame buttons to see what your Spin Set looks like.

More Help topics

“ Editing a Spin Set ” on page 103

Editing a Spin Set

To edit a Spin Set, display it in Detail view and select the Edit button. The Spin Set screen opens. Use these techniques to edit your Spin Set:

Removing images

Select the image, and then select the Delete Asset button.

Reordering images

Drag and drop the image to a new location.

103

Setting up Spin Set Viewer Presets

Spin Set Viewer Presets determine the style, behavior, and look of your viewers. Scene7 comes with default Spin Set

Viewer Presets. If you are an administrator, you can create your own Spin Set Viewer Presets as well. You can configure a Spin Set Viewer Preset with different colors, borders, fonts, and image settings.

Follow these steps to create a Spin Set Viewer Preset:

1

Click Setup > Viewer Presets.

The Viewer Presets window opens.

2

Do one of the following:

To create a new preset, click Add and choose Spin Set.

• To edit an existing Spin Set Viewer preset, select the preset and click Edit.

The Configure Viewer screen opens.

3

Type a name in the Preset Name box for the Spin Set Viewer preset.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Spin Sets

4

To add community features (Embed, Link, Visit) to the viewer, specify options for any of the following:

Embed

Click Enabled. In the Embed Button Label box, type the name you want displayed in the viewer for the

Embed Button. If desired, click Browse to locate and select a custom skin for the button.

Link

Click Enabled. In the Link Button Label box, type the name you want displayed in the viewer for the Link

Button. If desired, click Browse to locate and select a custom skin for the button.

Visit

Click Enabled. In the Visit Button Label box, type the name you want displayed in the viewer for the Visit

Button. In the Visit URL box, type the URL to the website that you want to open when the link is clicked.

Note: Custom skins are available for Enterprise users only.

5

Specify other options as desired. To see a description of an option, click the Info Tip icon adjacent to the option.

The preview screen displays the viewer as you update and change settings.

6

Click Save.

Click the Make Default button to make the Spin Set Viewer Preset you created the company default for showing Spin Sets.

To delete a Spin Set Viewer Preset, select it on the Viewer Presets screen and select the Delete button.

More Help topics

“ Viewer Presets ” on page 19

104

Previewing a Spin Set

You can preview a Spin Set in the Spin Set Viewer. Follow these steps to preview a Spin Set:

1

Select the Spin Set in the Browse Panel

2

Select the Preview button, choose File > Preview, or select the Preview rollover button.

Click the Next Frame and Previous Frame buttons to spin the item in the Spin Set Viewer.

More Help topics

“ Editing a Spin Set ” on page 103

Publishing a Spin Set

Publishing a Spin Set places the images in the set on Scene7 Image Servers, where they are available to your website or application. What’s more, during the publishing process, SPS activates the Spin Set URL strings you need for your website or application.

More Help topics

“ Publishing ” on page 41

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Spin Sets

Marking a Spin Set for publish

Mark your Spin Set for publish for it to be copied to Scene7 image servers. You can mark your Spin Set for publish in the Browse Panel by selecting the Mark for Publish icon to the left of its name. All images in the set are marked for publish when you mark the Spin Set itself for publish.

Publishing the Spin Set

To publish a Spin Set to Scene7 Image Servers, start by selecting the Publish button on the Global Navigation bar. Then select a When option, optionally enter a name for the publish job, and select the Start Publish button.

105

Linking a Spin Set to a web page

Websites and applications access Scene7 Image Server content, including Spin Sets, via URL strings. These URL strings are activated during the publishing process. To place the URL string for your Spin Set in your web pages and applications, you copy it from the Scene7 Publishing System.

Important: The URL is not active until you publish the asset.

Obtaining a Spin Set URL

To obtain a Spin Set URL, open your Spin Set in the Browse Panel and then select the Preview button, select the

Rollover Preview button, or choose File > Preview. The Preview screen opens. Select a Spin Set Viewer Preset, and then select the Copy URL button.

Adding Spin Set URLs to your web page

Spin Sets are deployed like all zoom viewers, via a dynamic page (ASP or JSP) that displays the Spin Set in a zoom window. The URL call to the Scene7 platform follows the same protocol on the zoom viewer. However, the Viewer

Preset name depends on the Preset your administrator has defined as the default Spin Set Viewer Preset. For example, the below URL includes a Preset name called flash_spin.jsp

and the SKU parameter is now the Spin Set name: http://sample.scene7.com/s7ondemand/spin/flash_spin.jsp?company=S7Web&sku=backpack_spin

In this URL, notice a SKU number ( sku=backpack_spin

). The string after sku=

is the Spin Set name (backpack_spin).

Last updated 5/21/2010

Chapter 12: Template Basics

Template Basics (for Enterprise users only) are dynamically created and addressable layered image files like layered files in image-editing applications such as Adobe® Photoshop®. Unlike a static file containing layers, such as a PSD file, a template can include parameters. Through parameters, the different aspects of the image can be addressed and customized.

Note: You can also create templates from layout-based designs by using Template Publishing and files from Adobe

Illustrator, InDesign, or Photoshop. See “ Template Publishing ” on page

A template can contain any number of image layers and text layers. You can convert a static file containing layers, such as a layered PSD file, into a template, as well as create templates in Scene7. You can create text layers in templates using fonts that you uploaded into SPS. After you add text to a template, you can format it by changing its justification, fonts, font size, and color.

Using the Parameters screen, you can convert any aspect of a template to an addressable parameter. In so doing, you can change which layered image to use or what text value to use in your template. Parameters are passed with the URL string, allowing you to change any parameter to dynamically customize the reply image generated from the image server.

Quick Start: Template Basics

This Quick Start is designed to help you get up and running quickly with Template Basics.

1.

Upload the files

Start by uploading the PSD file or image file for your template. Scene7 supports many image file formats in addition to PSD, but lossless TIFF and PNG images are recommended for templates because they allow for transparency.

If you are using a PSD file to build your template, select the Create Template option on the Upload screen when you upload the PSD file. Also choose a Layer Naming option to tell Scene7 how to name PSD layers when they are uploaded to the Scene7 Publishing System.

If you are using image files, you can crop the images and also create a mask from clipping paths in the images as you upload them.

Select the Upload button on the Global Navigation bar to upload a PSD file or other image files from your computer

to a folder on SPS. See “ Uploading template files ” on page 107.

2.

Create a template

To create a template from a PSD file, select the Create Template option when you upload the file. To create a template from images, choose Build > Template Basics, enter a width and height measurement for the canvas, and drag images onto the Template screen. You can also select the images before choosing Build > Template Basics. The Template screen offers tools for:

Adding image layers. To add a layer, drag an image into the Template screen.

• Adding text layers. Select the Text tool and drag to draw a box for the text layer; then format the text with tools on the Text screen.

• Changing the size and position of layers.

Last updated 5/21/2010

106

USING SCENE7

Template Basics

• Changing the order of layers.

Applying shadow and glow effects to image and text layers.

See “ Creating a template ” on page 108.

3.

Create template parameters

The next step is to parameterize the properties on layers to determine which layer properties are included in the URL string. Parameters allow you to use templates with maximum flexibility. After you make a layer property into a parameter, you can change it dynamically.

To parameterize a layer, open the template in the Template screen and select the Parameters button next to a layer

name. On the Parameters screen, select the option next to each parameter you want to add. See “ Creating template parameters ” on page 115.

4.

Publish templates

Publishing your template places it on Scene7 Image Servers so that it can be dynamically delivered to your website or application. Publishing also activates the URL to call the template from Scene7 Image Servers to your website or application.

Be sure to publish all images associated with your template.

To publish a template, mark it for publish and select the Publish button on the Global Navigation bar. Then select the

Start Publish button. See “ Publishing templates ” on page 116.

5.

Link a template to a web page

Scene7 creates URLs for templates, and activates the URLs when you publish templates to Scene7 Image Servers. You can copy these URL strings from the Template Preview screen.

Select your template in the Browse Panel and select the Preview button to open the Template Preview screen. Then choose an Image Preset for delivering your template and select the Copy URL button. After you copy the URL from

the Preview screen, you can use it in your website or application. See “ Linking a template to a web page ” on page 117.

107

Uploading template files

Upload the files you need for your template into the Scene7 Publishing System before you begin building the template.

You can build templates from an Adobe® Photoshop® PSD or an image file. TIFF and PNG images are recommended because they allow for transparency.

Scene7 recommends using transparent TIFF or PSD images in your templates at the exact size you want to display them on your website. When you publish the template, call the image with an Image Preset that is also the same size.

Paying attention to size ensures that your template is not resized (resampled) at a size larger or smaller than the size at which it was designed.

Templates can be created from Adobe Photoshop PSD files or image files.

For detailed instructions on uploading files, see “ Uploading files ” on page 35. Keep the following in mind when

uploading template files:

• If uploading PSD files, you can create a template from it. Scene7 creates a separate image for each layer in the PSD.

On the Upload screen, select Photoshop Options, select the Maintain Layers option, and select the Create Template option. Then choose an option on the Layer Naming menu for naming the images that Scene7 creates from layers

in the PSD. See “ PSD upload options ” on page 176.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Template Basics

• If uploading images, you can create a mask from its clipping path. This option applies to images created with imageediting applications in which a clipping path was created. On the Upload screen, select Image Editing Options and

select the Create Mask From Clipping option. See “ Image editing options at upload ” on page 173.

More Help topics

“ Uploading your files ” on page 38

“ Working with PSD files ” on page 176

108

Creating a template

To create a template, select the Build button and choose Template Basics. The Template Basics screen opens. On this screen, you can add image and text layers. You can also reorder layers, change the size and position of layers, and apply shadow and glow effects to images and text.

Note: If you edit a template created in an earlier version of Scene7 Publishing System, you may receive the a prompt upon saving asking “Do you want to add a canvas layer?” Choose No to avoid adding a new base layer. If you accidently choose

Yes, delete the “&allowCanvasPrompt” and “&layer=0” modifiers in the URL and press Enter or Return.

Creating the initial template

Follow these steps to create a template:

1

Begin creating your template with one of these techniques:

Select the PSD or images first

In the Browse Panel, select the PSD file or images you want for your template, select the Build button, and choose Template Basics on the menu. The Template Basics screen opens.

Start from the Template screen

Select the Build button and choose Template Basics. The Template Basics screen opens.

2

In the Enter Canvas Size dialog box, enter width and height measurements for your template.

3

Select a folder in the Asset Library and drag the PSD file or images you want for your template onto the Template screen.

4

Select the Save button. The Save As window opens.

5

Select a folder for storing your template, enter a name for the template, and select the Submit button.

Scene7 shrinks images if necessary to fit them on the canvas, the area on the Template screen for defining your template.

You can create a template from an existing template. Open the template, select the Save As button, and enter a new name in the Save As dialog box.

To edit a template, display it in the Browse Panel in Detail view and select the Edit button. The Template screen opens so you can edit your template.

More Help topics

“ Create image layers ” on page 110

“ Create a text layer ” on page 110

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Template Basics

Understanding the Template screen

The Template screen offers tools for manipulating and parameterizing layers.

109

Building a template on the Template screen

Use these tools on the Template screen to create templates:

Pan tool

Allows you to select layers, move them around the canvas, resize them, or rotate them.

Text tool

Creates a text layer. Drag on the canvas to create a text layer, and then enter the text in the layer. See “ Create a text layer ” on page 110.

Preview button

Opens the Preview screen and shows the template in a Zoom Viewer. You see what the template looks like to users on your website or application.

Parameter Summary button

Opens the Parameter Summary screen. You can see the name of each layer in a template, and on each layer, the names of parameters that have been activated.

Text Editor v4.3 and Text Editor v4.2

You can choose to use the latest and most fully featured text editor, Text Editor v4.3, or the previous text editor, Text Editor v4.2. When creating new templates, Text Editor v4.3 is selected by default.

When editing older templates, Text Editor v4.2 is selected by default. Text Editor v4.3 does not currently support word wrap, so when editing older templates that use word wrap, use Text Editor v4.2 to keep the template’s fidelity fully

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Template Basics

intact. If your older template does not use word wrap, you can choose Text Editor v4.3 to take advantage of the many new features it offers such as Increase Margins, Decrease Margins, Set Text In All Caps, and Copy Fit Text.

Note: Text Editor v4.2 will eventually be removed as an option in Scene7, so it is recommended that you use Text Editor

4.3 when possible. The Word Wrap option will be incorporated into a future release of the Text Editor.

Canvas

Defines the total available area, in pixels, for defining your template. The default size is 300 x 300 pixels. Layers are placed on the canvas.

Layers list

Lists the name of layers in the template. To select a layer, select its name in the Layers list. The Layers list

offers tools for adding effects to layers, deleting layers, reordering layers, and parameterizing layers. See “ Working with layers ” on page 112.

Layer Properties area

Offers tools for changing the background color, opacity, size, and position of a layer, as well as

the background color, opacity, and size of the canvas. You can also adjust shadow and glow effects. See “ Working with layers ” on page 112.

Create image layers

Drag the image from the Asset Library to the canvas.

The ID name of the image appears in the Layers list.

Note: If necessary, Scene7 shrinks images to make them fit in the canvas when you create an image layer.

More Help topics

“ Working with layers ” on page 112

Create a text layer

1

Select the Text tool .

2

Drag to create a text box on the canvas or on an image.

3

In the Text screen that opens, click the Preview tab (if necessary), and add text by doing any of the following:

Type text in the text box.

• Click Import and import an RTF file.

Paste text from the Clipboard into the text box. See “ View and edit text source code ” on page 112.

4

Click Apply, and then close the Text screen.

Format text

Select Text screen to format text in a text layer:

1

In the Text screen, select the text you want to format. You can select all the text, portions of the text, as well as individual characters.

2

Specify any of these formatting options, and then click Apply.

Font

Choose a font on the Font menu. If a font you want does not appear on the menu, you can upload it into the

Scene7 Publishing System. See “ Fonts ” on page 180.

Font Size

Choose a font size from the menu, type a specific size in the box, or click the up or down arrows to increase or decrease the size by two points.

Color

Click to choose a color for text.

110

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Template Basics

Bold, Italic, or Underline

Select the text, and then click the icon for the type of formatting you want to apply to the text.

All Caps, Superscript, or Subscript

Select the text, and then click the icon for the type of formatting you want to apply to the text.

Alignment

Choose an Alignment button to left-align, center, or right-align text in the text layer.

Tracking

Type or select a numeric value by which to adjust the amount of space between words.

Kerning

Type or select a numeric value by which to adjust the amount of space between characters.

Line Spacing

Type or select a numeric value by which to adjust the amount of space between lines.

Baseline Shift

Type or select a numeric value by which to move a selected character up or down relative to the baseline of the surrounding text. This option is especially useful when you’re hand-setting fractions or adjusting the position of inline graphics.

Click Undo to reverse your last action. Click Redo if you change your mind about reversing an action after you click

Undo.

Format paragraphs

1

In the Text screen, select the paragraph you want to format.

2

Specify any of these formatting options, and then click Apply.

Alignment

Click to specify the type of alignment: align left, align center, align right, or justify.

End of Paragraph Justification

Click to specify the type of justification for the last line in the paragraph: last line aligns left; last line aligns center; and last line aligns right.

Line Spacing

Type or select a numeric value by which to adjust the amount of space between all the lines in the paragraph.

Indent All

Click to increase the amount the text is indented.

Remove Indent

Click to decrease the amount the text is indented.

Indent First Line

Specify the amount by which you want to indent the first line of text.

Space Before Paragraph

Specify the amount of space you want to appear above the first line of text in the paragraph.

Space After Paragraph

Specify the amount of space you want to appear below the last line of text in the paragraph.

Vertical Align

Select where you want the text to appear vertically within the text box: Top, Middle, Bottom.

Text Direction

Select the direction in which you want the text to display: Right-To-Left or Left-To-Right.

Edit a text layer

1

Double-click the name of the layer in the Layers list.

2

In the Text screen, edit the text as desired and click Apply.

To make text fit in a box, select the box, and then select the Shrink Text option. This option is located in the Layer

Properties area. Scene7 makes the font size and line spacing of the text small enough to fit all of the text in the text layer.

Adjust text layer properties

1

In the Template Basics screen, select the text box you want to adjust.

111

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Template Basics

2

In the Layer Properties panel, select any of the following:

Shrink Text

Select to shrink the text to fit within the text box.

Word Wrap

Select a wrap option to specify if or how the text wraps:

Wrap

Wraps the text to fit into a text box that is too small horizontally.

No Wrap

Does not wrap the text when the text box is too small horizontally, and instead, cuts off a portion of the text.

NB Wrap

(Nonbreaking wrap) Wraps text to fit into a textbox, and does not break words.

Position

Specifies the location of the text box on the canvas.

Padding

Adds margins or crops the layer rectangle. Specify the number of pixels to add or remove for Left, Top,

Bottom, and Right. Enter positive numbers to add a margin; enter negative numbers to crop.

View and edit text source code

The information provided in this tab is for your reference. Edit the text only if you are familiar with editing source code.

1

Click the Source tab in the Text screen to reveal the source code for the text.

2

View or edit the text as desired.

Changes remain intact if you switch back and forth between Preview and Source view.

3

Click Apply to render the edits.

Working with layers

Use the Layers list and Layer Properties area to work with layers. You can reorder layers, change their size and position, rotate layers, and determine the background color, foreground color, opacity, and blend mode of a layer.

You can also change the size of the canvas, choose its background color, and change its opacity setting.

Reordering layers

Changing layer order can effect appearance, especially when transparency or overprinting is involved. Be sure to preview the outcome before committing your changes.

Use one of these techniques to reorder the layers in a template:

Select a layer in the Layers list. Then select the Up or Down button as many times as necessary to place it in the correct position in the list.

• Drag a layer up or down in the Layers list.

Changing the size and position of layers and the canvas

Layers must be small enough to fit on the canvas. You can change the size of a layer or the canvas manually or by entering size measurements. You can change the position of a layer manually or by entering offset measurements. You can also rotate a layer.

Scene7 recommends creating an Image Preset that is the exact size of your template. Matching the Image Preset size to the template size ensures that the final output size and sharpening options for the template are set correctly. After you’ve created this Image Preset, you can choose it from the Apply Preset menu on the Template Preview screen. The

screen shows you what the image looks like when it is delivered from the server. See “ Setting up Image Presets ” on page

112

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Template Basics

Changing the size of a layer

To change the size of a layer or the canvas, select the layer or canvas on the Layers list and use one of these techniques:

Manually changing size

Select and drag a corner or side of the layer or canvas.

Entering layer size measurements

Enter pixel measurements in the W (Width) and H (Height) text boxes in the Layer

Properties area. You can also change the size of the canvas by dragging the Canvas Size slider at the bottom of the

Template screen.

As well as changing the size of a layer, you can pad it. To do so, enter a Padding measurement in the Left, Right, Top, and Bottom box of the Layer Properties area. Padding adds a margin to the current layer to offset it from the perimeter of its base layer. Padding is useful if you add a drop shadow or outer glow effect and you want to make the effect more visible. Padding increases the size of a layer and displays its background color in the extended, padded area. The base layer repositions itself relative to the new size of the layer. For example, if the current layer is centered on the base layer, extending the left side of the layer moves it further to the right of the base layer.

Selecting the Shrink Text option shrinks text and line spacing settings so that all text fits in a text layer. Shrinking the text this way is useful when you reduce the size of a text layer but the text no longer fits in the layer. The Shrink Text option is located in the Layer Properties area of the Template screen.

Changing the position of a layer

To change the position of a layer on the canvas, select its name in the Layers list and use one of these techniques:

Manually changing position

Move the pointer near to but not over a layer boundary, and when you see the fourheaded arrow cursor, click and start dragging.

Entering position offset measurements

Enter X and Y offset measurements in the X and Y text boxes. These measurements represent the x, y offset of the anchor point in pixels.

Rotating a layer

The Rotate box lists the angle to which the layer was rotated. To rotate a layer, select its name in the Layers list and use one of these techniques:

Manually rotating

Move the cursor near to but not over a corner of the layer. When you see the rotation cursor, drag the corner of the layer.

Entering a degree measurement

Enter the number of degrees to rotate the layer. Rotation is clockwise; to rotate in a counterclockwise fashion, enter a negative number.

Hiding a layer or a layer effect

You can hide a layer or layer effect by clicking the eye icon next to a layer name or effect name. Hidden layers do not appear in previews or output. The layer information is not deleted from the URL. Instead, “hide=1” is added to the

URL to note that the layer is currently hidden from view. For example: layer=5&src=is{PortalCo/title}&pos=274,192&effect=-1&.effect=Drop Shadow&blendmode layer=5&src=is{PortalCo/title}&pos=274,192&hide=1&effect=-1&.effect=Drop Shadow&blendmode

Determining the background color, opacity, and blend mode

To choose a background color, opacity, and blend mode for a layer or the canvas, select the layer or canvas and use these techniques:

Foreground color

Click the Foreground Color button and choose a color swatch to change the color of the shadow or glow. You can also enter a color-value parameter in the box. The background color applies only to layers

113

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Template Basics

that use transparency. For example, it applies to a partially transparent layer in a price tag or the background of a text field. Layers that consist of a PSD, TIFF or PNG image with transparency turned on can have transparent backgrounds.

Background color

Click the Background Color button padded areas.

and choose a color swatch to change the color of the

Opacity

Drag the Opacity slider to make any layer translucent so that part of the underlying image shows through.

The 100-percent setting is completely opaque; the 0 setting is transparent.

Blend mode

Choose an option to simulate one of the blend modes available in Photoshop. The options are Normal,

Dissolve, Lighten, Darken, Multiply, and Screen. These options are available for layers, not the canvas.

Using shadow and glow effects on layers

You can apply a shadow or glow to a layer. The shadow or glow is applied to the perimeter of the layer and extends inward or outward, depending on the shadow or glow option you choose. If your template originated with a PSD file with shadow and glow effects, you can adjust these effects in the Scene7 Publishing System.

After you apply a shadow or glow effect, you can adjust its size, color, opacity, and position in the Layer Properties area of the Template screen.

Applying a shadow or glow effect to a layer

To apply a shadow or glow effect:

1

Select a layer in the Layers list.

2

Select the Add Effect menu and choose an option:

Drop Shadow

Applies a shadow to the bottom and right side of the layer.

Inner Shadow

Applies a shadow effect inside all edges of the layer.

Outer Glow

Applies a glow effect around all edges of the layer.

Inner Glow

Applies a glow effect inside all edges of the layer.

An effect name appears on the Layers list after you apply an effect. To delete an effect, select its name on the Layers list and then select the Delete button.

Note: You sometimes can’t see the effect of a drop shadow or outer glow if the underlying layer is not large enough to display it. If you can’t see the shadow or glow, consider adding Padding values to the layer or reordering the layer. See

“ Changing the size and position of layers and the canvas ” on page Reordering layers 112.

Adjusting a shadow or glow effect

To adjust a shadow or glow effect, start by selecting its name in the Layers list. Then change its settings in the Layer

Properties area of the Template screen:

Color

Select the Color button and choose a color swatch to change the color of the shadow or glow. You can also enter a color-value parameter in the box.

Opacity

Drag the slider to determine how intense the effect is. Less opaque effects are more transparent.

Blend Mode

Choose an option to simulate one of the blend modes available in Photoshop. The options are Normal,

Dissolve, Lighten, Darken, Multiply, and Screen.

Size

Enter measurements in the X and Y box to enlarge or shrink the shadow effect. Size options are only available for inner shadows and drop shadows.

Grow

Drag the slider to extend the effect inward or outward.

Last updated 5/21/2010

114

USING SCENE7

Template Basics

Blur

Drag the slider to control feathering at the edges of the effect. Effects with more blur are more feathered.

Masking layers

The Layers list offers a Mask button that specifies how the mask or alpha channel of a layer is used. Using the Mask button, you can apply the effect of a background layer to a particular layer or the entire parent layer in your template.

Select a layer in the Layers list and select the Mask button to cycle through these states:

• The background of the layer is opaque.

The layer content is inverted and the background of the layer is filled with solid black.

• The background of the layer is filled with solid black.

115

Creating template parameters

Parameters enable you to use templates with maximum flexibility; they allow you to dynamically customize a template image. You can decide which text and image layers to include in the template, and in each layer, which parameters to display. For example, to call attention to a product that is on sale, you can create an On Sale text layer. Later, you can remove this layer but still retain the rest of the template image by removing the On Sale parameter.

When you create template parameters, you in effect declare which parts of the template to call in a URL string. A URL constructed with parameters exposes those items in the URL string. With parameters exposed, you can create custom results from the way the template image is dynamically constructed from the Image Server. In this way, you can change a template dynamically because you can call some or all of its parameters in a URL.

In text layer parameters, you can also make the text string a dynamic field linked to values in a database. Being able to link text to a database is useful, for example, in promotions. You can customize template images to make them show client or customer names. You can also, for example, link a text layer parameter to a prices database to show the price of an item in a template image.

Parameterizing a layer

For each layer in your template, follow these steps to create template parameters:

1

In the Layers list, select the Parameters button next to the name of the layer you want to create parameters for.

The Parameters screen opens. It lists the names of each parameter on the layer, its value, and its type.

2

Select the On option beside the name of each parameter you want to include in the template image.

3

Select the Close button to close the Parameters screen.

You can rename parameters in the Parameters screen. Renaming a parameter makes the parameter easier to identify in URL strings and easier to use as a database value. To rename a parameter, select its On option, click its name, and enter a new name in the Name field.

To see a list of the parameters you have created for your template, select the Parameter Summary button on the

Template screen. The Parameter Summary screen opens. It lists the name of each layer, and if you have created parameters for a layer, the parameter names and values.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Template Basics

Creating dynamic text parameters

For text layers, you can additionally make the text string a dynamic field linked to a database value. Follow these steps:

1

On the Template screen, select the Parameters button next to the name of the text layer for which you want to create dynamic text parameters. The Parameters screen opens.

2

Select the On option next to the name of the text attribute (textAttr).

3

Select the Text tab in the Parameters screen.

4

Select the Add Parameter button. A default parameter name appears. You can replace this name by selecting it and typing over it. The current text string becomes the new name of the parameter.

5

Select the Close button to close the Parameters screen.

To make the parameter name use a database value, append the following string to the Template URL:

?$_2(parameter name)=(database value)

The parameter name will be replaced by names in a database field or Java code indicating, for example, the current price of an item or a customer name.

116

Publishing templates

Publishing your template places it on Scene7 Image Servers, where it is available to your website and application.

During the publishing process, the Scene7 Publishing System activates the URLs you need for your website and application.

Important: To use your template, publish all content that went into making it, including fonts and images. If you don’t include all the required files, an error message appears when you publish.

Marking templates for publish

Templates and all their support files must be marked for publish in order for them to be placed on Scene7 Image

Servers. You can mark these items for publish in the Browse Panel by selecting the Mark for Publish icon .

More Help topics

“ Marking assets for publish ” on page 41

Publishing your template

To publish templates to Scene7 Image Servers, start by selecting the Publish button on the Global Navigation bar. Then select a When option, optionally enter a name for the publish job, and select the Start Publish button.

More Help topics

“ Creating a publish job ” on page 42

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Template Basics

Linking a template to a web page

Your websites and applications access Scene7 Image Server content via URL strings. After you publish a template,

Scene7 activates a URL string that references the template on Scene7 Image Servers. You can paste this URL in a web browser for testing.

To place URL strings in your web pages and applications, copy them from the Scene7 Publishing System. To obtain a

Template URL string generated with an Image Preset, go to the Preview screen or the Browse Panel (in Detail view).

Then select an Image Preset and select the copy URL button.

Important: The URL is not active until you publish the asset.

Obtaining a template URL

You can obtain a template URL string generated by an Image Preset from the Template Preview screen. After you copy the URL, it lands on the Clipboard so you can paste it as necessary. Follow these steps to obtain a template URL string generated with an Image Preset from the Template Preview screen:

1

Select the template in the Browse Panel.

2

Select the Preview button or choose File > Preview. The Preview screen opens.

3

Select the Apply Preset menu and choose the Image Preset with which you want to deliver the template image. The

Preview screen shows you what the template looks like when it is delivered from the server.

4

Select the Copy URL button to copy the URL to the Clipboard.

Adding template URLs to your web page

To add a template to your web page, consult with your web page development team to modify the

<IMG>

tag in your

HTML web page code using the Scene7 URL string to make a request to Scene7 Image Servers. The commerce engine or dynamic web page code inserts the template image at the size and with the formatting specification defined by the

Image Preset you choose for your template.

More Help topics

“ Adding dynamic images to your web page ” on page 70

117

Last updated 5/21/2010

Chapter 13: Template Publishing

Template Publishing is the web-to-print solution for Scene7. Using resolution-independent FXG files, you can create customizable templates for output to print, web, e-mail, desktop, and devices. You can design templates in Adobe

Illustrator CS4, Adobe InDesign CS4, or Adobe Photoshop CS4, and then convert them to FXG upon upload.

FXG templates use tags to indicate variable objects within a document. You can tag text while designing your template in Illustrator or InDesign, and you can tag objects in Scene7 after you’ve uploaded the document. Variable objects can include properties such as individual text characters, fonts, graphic colors, and graphic size.

Template Publishing is included with the Scene7 Enterprise Unlimited Edition, and is available as an add-on solution with the Enterprise Edition.

Quick Start: Template Publishing

This Quick Start describes the basic workflow for using source design and FXG template files to create high-quality, customizable print or web output.

You can use Illustrator, InDesign, and Photoshop CS4 or later to create your source designs.

1.

(Optional) Design and tag your Illustrator or InDesign file for template publishing

You can tag text as variable in Illustrator or InDesign files while designing your templates, or tag them in the Scene7

Template Publishing screen. If you create your templates in Photoshop, tag variables in the Template Publishing

Screen.

Text characters tagged in Illustrator or InDesign appear automatically as variables in Scene7.

See “ Designing templates in Illustrator or InDesign ” on page 120.

2.

Upload and convert your designed template files, including fonts, graphics, and images

Scene7 automatically converts your native Illustrator, InDesign, and Photoshop files to the FXG format when you choose the FXG Processing option during upload.

If your template file includes embedded bitmap images, Scene7 automatically uploads and converts those files as well.

If your file contains linked images, download the Scene7 FXG plugin. Use the plugin to save the file as a Scene7 FXG file, and then upload it.

If it contains fonts, upload those files to the same folder to ensure the FXG file displays correctly.

See “ Supported design features for FXG templates ” on page 120.

3.

Build the FXG template

Once you build an FXG template, you can view or specify the variable components of your file in the Template

Publishing screen.

Build the FXG template by selecting the FXG file in the Browse Panel, clicking the Build button, and choosing

Template Publishing.

See “ Build an FXG template ” on page 121.

118

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Template Publishing

4.

View or define variables

You specify the variable components of your file in the Template Publishing screen.

In the Template Publishing screen, select a layer property, such as Rect or TextGraphic, in the Objects and Layers panel.

In the Properties panel, do one of the following:

• If you’ve created text variables in Illustrator or InDesign, you can view your variables in the panel.

If you have not created text variables in Illustrator or InDesign, create them now by typing a name in the Name

(or Parameter) box for the property attribute you want to make variable.

You can specify default values for any attribute, regardless of whether you make it variable. See “ Build an FXG template

” on page 121 and “ FXG Elements Guide ” on page 183.

5.

Preview and test templates and variables

From the FXG Template Preview screen, you can change the variable values and instantly preview the changes to the file.

In the Template Publishing screen, click Preview to open the FXG Template Preview screen, and do any of the following:

Type new values for any of the variables and view the changes in the Preview window.

If you’ve tagged text in InDesign or Illustrator, the text appears as variables in the template.

• Choose PDF or SWF from the Format menu, and then click Apply Format to create one-offs of your files using any specific value settings.

• Click Copy URL to copy the preview URL to the clipboard.

To save the file with the currently set values, close the FXG Template Preview screen. Then choose Save or Save As in

the Template Publishing screen. See “ Preview and update template variables ” on page 123.

6.

Publish the FXG template

When you are done defining and testing variables, publish the file. Publishing your FXG template places it on the

Scene7 Image Servers and activates the URL.

Be sure to publish all images and fonts associated with your FXG template. See “ Publish FXG templates ” on page 125.

7.

Link an FXG template to a web page

Scene7 activates the URLs for FXG templates after you publish FXG templates to Scene7 Image Servers. You can copy

these URL strings from the FXG Template Preview screen. See “ Linking an FXG template to a web page ” on page 126.

119

About variables

Variable properties allow other users to swap out the property’s value while retaining the overall document format and style. For example, you can design a promotional flyer that others in your company can customize with their own store location and phone number. Those users can then output the template at high quality to e-mail, web, or print.

You can do any of the following to specify and manipulate variables:

• Tag text characters using {identifier:defaultvalue} in InDesign or Illustrator. Tagged text uploads as variable text in

Scene7. For example, {name:Frank}.

• Assign names to layer attributes in the Scene7 Template Publishing screen.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Template Publishing

If you design your templates in Photoshop, you can specify variable objects only in Scene7.

Designing templates in Illustrator or InDesign

Scene7 recognizes specially formatted text from Illustrator and InDesign as variables. Text variables can be in their own text frame, or combined in a text frame with other nonvariable text. Scene7 pulls the formatted text from the FXG version of the document and displays it as a variable parameter in the Parameter Summary panel.

Use the following guidelines when designing and tagging variable text in Illustrator or InDesign:

To make individual words or characters within a text block variable, use the following format:

{variablename:value} for example: {event:name}

In this example, “event” is the descriptive name for the variable and “name” is the default value. The value can be replaced or customized in the Scene7 Template Publishing Preview screen. Do not include any spaces within the brackets.

For example, the following birthday card text, designed in InDesign, lets you swap out the name and location in

Scene7:

Welcome to our

{event:name} at the {location:name}

{date:year}

Once the template is converted in Scene7 and customized, it could read:

Welcome to our

Annual Summit at the Convention Center

2010

More Help topics

“ FXG Elements Guide ” on page 183

120

Supported design features for FXG templates

Adobe Illustrator, InDesign, and Photoshop CS4 or later offer comprehensive vector and text support, allowing you to create resolution independent files. You can upload an AI, ID, or PSD file and choose to convert it to FXG format in the Upload screen in Scene7.

Important: When using InDesign or Illustrator files, make sure that images are embedded and not linked. If you cannot embed your images, download the Scene7 FXG plug-in. Use the plug-in to save your file from InDesign or Illustrator as an FXG file, and then upload that FXG file to Scene7.

The following Illustrator, InDesign, and Photoshop features are supported:

Pages

Multiple pages, bleed, and print marks.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Template Publishing

Vector images

Support for all shapes, paths, and Bezier curves.

Text

Support for text justification, text on a path, hyphenation, autosizing, paragraph styles, character styles, and

HTML formatting.

Row and column formatting

Support for row and column formatting in Illustrator, including rows, columns row gutter spacing, column gutter spacing, flow direction specified by using Area Type options. Support for column formatting in InDesign, including rows, row gutter spacing, and flow direction specified by using Text Frame options.

When you swap out threaded text, the rest of the text is adjusted so that the threading continues as expected.

Bitmap images

Support for loading bitmaps from Image Server and Render Server, as well as embedding Image Server and Render Server requests. Fit attributes.

Fills and masks

Support for vector and text fills, strokes, and gradients, as well as clipping paths, clipping masks, and layer blending. The following blending modes are supported: Darken, Difference, HardLight, Lighten, Multiply,

Normal, Screen, and Overlay.

Color

Support for CMYK and spot colors, as well as Color Profile support (ACE).

121

Upload files for Template Publishing

To create templates for web and print output, convert your AI, ID, or PSD file to FXG while uploading it to Scene7.

When you convert to FXG, all bitmap images used in the file are saved with the FXG file.

For detailed information on uploading files, see “ Uploading your files ” on page 38.

Do the following when uploading files for Template Publishing:

Upload fonts separately.

• When saving from InDesign, use the Package feature to make sure that all the fonts are included.

When using InDesign or Illustrator files, make sure that images are embedded and not linked. If you cannot embed your images, download the Scene7 FXG plug-in. Use the plug-in to save your file from InDesign or Illustrator as an

FXG file, and then upload that FXG file to Scene7.

Select the FXG option from the Upload Options/Processing menu for Illustrator or InDesign.

• Select the Convert Photoshop File To FXG option from the Upload Options for Photoshop.

More Help topics

“ Uploading your files ” on page 38

Build an FXG template

Defining variable properties for your FXG template allows other users to easily customize the text, images, and graphics within the template. For example, you can define a variable for a line of text, with the default text “May 18,

2010.” Another user can change that text to “May 17, 2010” or any date they choose. Each user can then and print, publish, or save it in different iterations for different uses, such as website banners, in-store posters, or e-mail notifications.

You can create variables for most object properties such as the path color, image size, alignment, and type style.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Template Publishing

You can save multiple versions of an FXG template if you want to make different attributes editable for different users.

1

In the Browse window, select the FXG file.

2

Click Build and choose Template Publishing.

The Template Publishing screen opens. You can define variables in this screen. If you define text variables in

Illustrator or InDesign, they appear as variables in this screen.

122

A

B

C D

Creating variables for a template in the Template Publishing screen

A. Click eye icon to show or hide layer B. Select layer to display its properties C. Assign name to attribute to make it variable D. Specify default value for attribute

Manually define variables in Scene7

In Scene7 Template Publishing, naming an attribute makes it a variable.

Note: If you’ve tagged text in Illustrator or InDesign, it appears as a variable property in the Properties panel.

1

In the Objects And Layers panel, in the Template Publishing screen, select the layer containing the attribute you want to make variable.

Note: Click the eye icon on and off to make sure that you are selecting the object you want.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Template Publishing

2

In the Properties panel, click the Name or Parameter box for the attribute you want to make variable. Then do one of the following:

• For a text property, select the text you want to make variable and click Add parameter. You can create multiple variable parameters from the same text property by selecting different portions of the text and adding parameters for each. To change the name of the parameter, click it type a new name. Then click Close.

• For all other properties, type a name in the Edit Parameter box that opens, and click OK

To customize multiple attributes at once with the same value, use the same parameter name for each attribute. For example, if your template has a rectangle and a star, you can type “newcolor” as the Parameter name for the

SolidColor color attribute of each. Whenever you change the “newcolor” value, both the rectangle and the star change to the new color.

3

Specify a default value for the variable in the Value or Data field. Set all properties for the selected object to specify the exact appearance you want.

4

(Optional) Repeat steps 1- 3 for all objects or layers and their properties that you want to make variable.

Note: Click the up or down arrow buttons to go to different pages of a multi-page template.

5

Click Save or Save As.

6

Click Preview to preview the variable properties in their default state or with new values.

For details about the different FXG attributes and their values, see “ FXG Elements Guide ” on page 183 and

www.adobe.com/go/learn_s7_FXG_Spec_en .

Show or hide an object or layer in the FXG template

Hidden objects and layers are not visible in preview or output, but are not deleted from the file. You can make them visible again as desired. Visibility is an attribute that you can make variable. Clicking the eye icon on or off sets the default value for the visibility of that object or layer.

1

In the Objects And Layers panel, click the eye icon next to an object or layer name to hide it in the file.

2

Click again to make the object visible.

Create different versions of a template

You can edit variables to create different versions of the template for different uses.

1

In the Objects And Layers panel, select the object or layer you want to edit.

2

In the Properties panel, change the value for the variable.

3

Click Save As to save the file as a new FXG template without overwriting the original FXG template.

123

Preview and update template variables

The FXG Template Preview screen displays all the variables for the template. All values reflect the default settings. If you’ve tagged text in Illustrator or InDesign, it appears as a variable property in this screen.

You can change the values for any of the variable properties listed, as well as preview and publish the altered file.

1

If the template is not already open in the FXG Template screen, open the FXG template in Detail view and click Edit.

2

In the Template Publishing screen, click Preview (located at the top of the window).

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Template Publishing

The template displays using all the default values you’ve set.

124

Default parameters in the FXG Template Preview screen

Note: Click the up or down arrow buttons to go to different pages of a multi-page template.

3

To change the value for a parameter, type a new value in the Value box or select a new value from the menu. To swap out a graphic, enter the URL for the new graphic.

The file preview dynamically updates to show the new values.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Template Publishing

New values are dynamically reflected

4

To view the template using a different preset size, choose the size from the Presets menu.

5

To create a file for previewing, choose PDF or SWF from the Format menu, and then click Apply Format.

6

To copy the URL for the template, click Copy URL.

7

To return to the Template Publishing screen and save your changes, click Edit, or close the FXG Template Preview screen.

Note: The URL is available for you to copy, but is not active until the template has been published. The URL automatically includes the selected variable data and preset setting.

Publish FXG templates

Publishing your FXG template places it on the Scene7 Image Servers, where it is available to your website and application. During the publishing process, the Scene7 Publishing System activates the URLs you need for your website or application.

Last updated 5/21/2010

125

USING SCENE7

Template Publishing

Note: To use your FXG template, publish all content that went into making it, including fonts and images. If you don’t include all required files, an error message appears when you publish.

More Help topics

“ Publishing ” on page 41

Mark FXG templates for publish

Templates and all their support files must be marked for publish for them to be placed on Scene7 Image Servers.

1

In the Browse Panel, select the FXG template along with any graphics, images, and fonts used.

2

Click the Mark For Publish icon .

Publish your FXG template

1

Click the Publish button on the Global Navigation bar.

2

Select a When option, optionally enter a name for the publish job.

3

Click the Start Publish button.

126

Linking an FXG template to a web page

Your websites and applications access Scene7 Image Server content by using URL strings. After you publish an FXG template, Scene7 activates a URL string that references the FXG template on Scene7 Image Servers. You can paste this

URL in a web browser for testing.

To place URL strings in your web pages and applications, copy them from the Scene7 Publishing System. To obtain an

FXG template URL string generated with an Image Preset for viewing the template at a specific size, go to the FXG

Template Preview screen or the Browse Panel (in Detail view). Then select an Image Preset and click the copy URL button.

Important: The URL is not active until you publish the asset.

More Help topics

“ Quick Start: Image Sizing ” on page 64

Obtain a template URL

You can obtain a template URL string generated by an Image Preset from the Preview screen. After you copy the URL, it is available on the Clipboard so you can paste it as necessary. Follow these steps to obtain an FXG template URL string generated with an Image Preset from the FXG Template Preview screen:

1

Select the FXG template in the Browse Panel.

2

Click the Preview button or choose File > Preview. The FXG Template Preview screen opens.

3

Select the Copy URL button to copy the URL to the Clipboard.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Template Publishing

Add FXG template URLs to your web page

To add an FXG template to your web page, consult with your web page development team to modify the

<IMG>

tag in your HTML web page code by using the Scene7 URL string to make a request to Scene7 Image Servers. The commerce engine or dynamic web page code inserts the FXG template image at the size and with the formatting specification defined by the Image Preset you choose for your FXG template.

More Help topics

“ Adding dynamic images to your web page ” on page 70

127

Last updated 5/21/2010

Chapter 14: eVideo Serving

The Scene7 Publishing System gives you the opportunity to present videos on your web page (Enterprise users only).

Users can watch presentations and hear audio descriptions.

The Scene7 Publishing System supports Flash FLV and F4V files. Users watch videos in the Video Viewer. You can configure the look of this viewer as well as its audio and video controls. For example, you can choose a size for the viewer, choose a color and skin, and choose how the playback controls work.

You can combine multiple videos into a Video Set, or SWF Set so that they playback together in the same viewer. You use the Video Set Viewer, SWF Set Viewer, Grid Viewer, or Carousel Viewer to view them. You can also add a Video

Set or SWF Set to a Mixed Media Set so that the videos can be viewed with other types of assets, such as spin sets, images, and swatch sets.

As well as serving eVideo, Scene7 Enterprise Unlimited users and Enterprise users who have the eVideo Streaming add-on can deliver reliable, scalable, navigable streaming video to their clients and customers. The eVideo Streaming option also lets you create customized Video Recuts. Streaming video arrives in real time. In eVideo Serving, end users must wait for the video to download before they can begin playing it.

More Help topics

“ Mixed Media Sets ” on page 160

“ eVideo Streaming ” on page 133

“ Video Sets ” on page 154

Quick Start: eVideo

This Video Quick Start is designed to help you get up and running quickly with video in Scene7. Follow steps 1 through

5. Each step includes a cross-reference to a topic heading with more information.

1.

Uploading the video files

Compress your video files and save them as FLV or F4V files before uploading them.

Note: If you have eVideo Streaming, you can select existing video files that are not in the FLV or F4V format, and encode them to a FLV or F4V format by selecting a preset on the Upload screen. eVideo Streaming is available in the Scene7

Enterprise Unlimited Edition, or as an add-on solution with the Enterprise Edition.

When you are ready to upload your video files to the Scene7 Publishing System, mark them for publish and click the

Upload button. On the Upload screen, select the videos, and then click the Start Upload button. See “ Uploading the video files ” on page 129.

2.

Setting up Video Viewer presets

Administrators can create Video Viewer presets; Scene7 offers default Video Viewer presets as well. These presets determine the look of the Video Viewer and how its playback controls work.

To create a Video Viewer preset, click the Setup button on the Global Navigation bar. On the Setup screen, display the

Application Setup options, and then select Viewer Presets. On the Viewer Presets screen, select the Add menu and

choose Video. Then choose options on the Configure Viewer screen. See “ Video Viewer presets ” on page 129.

Last updated 5/21/2010

128

USING SCENE7

eVideo Serving

3.

Previewing videos in the Video Viewer

To see how your video plays when users see it on your website or application, select the video in the Browse Panel.

Then click the Preview button, choose File > Preview, or click the rollover Preview button. The Preview screen opens.

See “ Previewing videos in the Video Viewer ” on page 130.

You can play the video on the Preview screen. You can also choose different Video Viewer presets to find out what your video looks like in different Video Viewers.

4.

Publishing videos

Publishing a video file places it on Scene7 servers so it can be delivered to your website or application. As part of the publishing process, Scene7 activates the URL string for calling the video from Scene7 Image Servers to your website or application.

To publish a video, mark it for publish by selecting the Mark For Publish icon in the Browse Panel. You can also mark a video for publish when you upload it. Click the Publish button on the Global Navigation bar to initiate a

publish. On the Publish screen, click the Start Publish button. See “ Publishing videos ” on page 131.

5.

Linking a video to a web page

Scene7 creates the URL calls necessary for viewing video when you publish video files to Scene7 Image Servers. You can copy these URL strings from the Preview screen. After you copy the URL strings, they are available to your website

and applications. See “ Linking a video to a web page ” on page 131.

129

Uploading the video files

Before you upload video files to the Scene7 Publishing System, make sure that they are compatible with Scene7. The

Scene7 Publishing System supports FLV and F4V files.

If you have the Scene7 Enterprise Unlimited version or have the eVideo Streaming add-on can, you can upload AVI,

MOV, MP4, WMV, or 3GPP files and transcode them to FLV or F4V files by selecting an encoding preset from the

Encoding Preset menu on the Upload screen

For detailed instructions on uploading files, see “ Uploading your files ” on page 38.

Important: Video files take time to download from Scene7 video servers; they are not cached. For that reason, make sure that your video files aren’t especially large. Large videos take too long to start playing.

More Help topics

“ Upload and encode video files for streaming ” on page 135

“ Publishing ” on page 41

Video Viewer presets

Users watch videos on the Video Viewer. How the Video Viewer behaves, what it looks like, and how its playback controls work depends on the Viewer preset you choose for the Video Viewer. Administrators can create new Video

Viewer presets by going to the Configure Viewer screen. This screen offers more than a dozen different settings for configuring the Video Viewer. You can configure its size, color, video and audio controls, progress bar, user-interface skin, and Help features.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eVideo Serving

More Help topics

“ Viewer Presets ” on page 19

“ Setting up Video Set Viewer Presets ” on page 156

Setting up Video Viewer presets

1

Click Setup > Viewer Presets.

The Viewer Presets window opens.

2

Do one of the following:

To create a new preset, click Add and choose Video Viewer.

• To edit an existing Video Viewer preset, select the preset and click Edit.

The Configure Viewer screen opens.

3

Type a name in the Preset Name box for the Video Viewer preset.

4

To add community features (Email, Embed, Link, Visit) to the viewer, specify options for any of the following:

Email

Click On to enable an Email button in the viewer. When users click the Email button while viewing the video, an email containing the link to the video opens.

Embed

Click Enabled. In the Embed Button Label box, type the name you want displayed in the viewer for the

Embed Button. If desired, click Browse to locate and select a custom skin for the button.

Link

Click Enabled. In the Link Button Label box, type the name you want displayed in the viewer for the Link

Button. If desired, click Browse to locate and select a custom skin for the button.

Visit

Click Enabled. In the Visit Button Label box, type the name you want displayed in the viewer for the Visit

Button. In the Visit URL box, type the URL to the website that you want to open when the link is clicked.

Note: Custom skins are available for Enterprise users only.

5

Choose options in the Configure Viewer screen.

To see a description of an option, click the Info Tip icon adjacent to the option.

The preview screen displays the viewer as you update and change settings.

6

Click Save.

Previewing videos in the Video Viewer

Any user can find out what a video looks like in the Video Viewer window. Follow these steps to choose different Video

Viewer Presets and preview videos in the Video Viewer:

1

In the Browse Panel, select the video that you want to preview.

2

Click the rollover Preview button, click the Preview button, or choose File > Preview. The Preview screen opens.

3

Select the Presets menu and choose a Video Viewer Preset.

4

Click the Play button, Pause button, and Audio controls to experiment with the video and see what users see when they play it.

You can preview a different Video Viewer Preset by choosing its name on the Presets menu.

130

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eVideo Serving

Publishing videos

Publishing places your videos on Scene7 HTTP Servers so they can be made available to your website and application.

When you publish videos, the Scene7 Publishing System activates the URL strings for your HTML web page code.

Important: The URL is not active until you publish the asset.

More Help topics

“ Publishing ” on page 41

Mark a video for publish

Videos must be marked for publish in order for them to be copied to Scene7 Image Servers.

Do one of the following:

In the Browse Panel, click the Mark For Publish icon next to each filename that you want to mark.

• In the Upload screen, click the Mark For Publish icon next to each filename that you want to mark.

Publish a video

1

Click the Publish button on the Global Navigation bar.

2

In the Publish screen, select a When option.

3

(Optional) Enter a name for the publish job.

4

Click Advanced and choose a Video Server from the Publish To menu.

5

Click Start Publish.

131

Linking a video to a web page

Web sites and applications access Scene7 Image Server content, including video, via URL strings. These URL strings are activated during the publishing process. To place the URL string for your video in your web pages and applications, you copy it from the Scene7 Publishing System.

Obtaining a video URL

1

Select your video in the Browse Panel.

2

Click the Preview button, click the rollover Preview button, or choose File > Preview. The Preview screen opens.

3

Select the Presets menu and choose a Video Viewer Preset. The Preview screen shows you what the Video Viewer looks like on your website or application.

4

Click the Copy URL button.

The URL is copied to the Clipboard; you can paste it as necessary for your website or application.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eVideo Serving

Adding a video to your web page

Like all viewers, videos are deployed via a dynamic page (ASP or JSP) that displays the video in a window. The URL call to the Scene7 platform follows the same protocol. The Video Viewer serves a video that your web team can upload to the Scene7 Publishing System for publishing to a Scene7 video server.

132

Last updated 5/21/2010

Chapter 15: eVideo Streaming

Adobe® Scene7 eVideo Streaming lets you upload final cut videos; automatically transcode the video to an Adobe

Flash® video format; and manage, edit, publish, and stream the video into configurable video viewers. Scene7 Video

Viewers allow users to switch between progressive delivery and streaming delivery, if they choose.

Scene7 eVideo Streaming uses the Flash Media Encoding Server to transcode video files to the FLV or F4V format for progressive or streaming video delivery from Adobe Flash Players. The Adobe Flash Media Server provides video-ondemand streaming, combined with CDN caching for high-performance delivery to Flash Players.

In addition to creating streaming video, the eVideo Streaming solution lets you remix your master videos into Video

Recuts using Adobe Premiere Express technology. You create Video Recuts in the Video Recut window by combining video clips, audio (for secondary soundtracks or voice-overs), photos, graphics (for overlays), text (for titles and captions) and transitions. You can create Video Recuts for specific promotions or campaigns.

eVideo Streaming is included with the Scene7 Enterprise Unlimited Edition and is available as an add-on solution with the Enterprise Edition.

Quick Start: Video streaming

The following workflow is designed to help you get up and running quickly with eVideo Streaming in Scene7.

1.

Upload and transcode video and audio files

Scene7 delivers streaming video from FLV and F4V files. You can upload AVI, MOV, MP4, WMV, and 3GPP formatted video files and transcode them to FLV or F4V format using one of the encoding presets listed under Evideo

Options in the Upload screen.

To create a Video Recut for streaming, upload the master video files, a soundtrack audio file (if you’ve included one), and any captions, borders, effects, overlays, and transitions you want to use. Use the Scene7 Recut encoding preset

when uploading files for a Video Recut. See “ Uploading files for streaming video ” on page 134.

2.

(Optional) Create a Video Recut

A Video Recut is a remix of your master video and other assets such as text, images, and soundtrack. When you create a Video Recut, your master video file remains intact and unaltered. You create Video Recuts in the Video Recut window (accessed by clicking Build and choosing Video Recuts). You can create scenes by dragging FLV files, and assets from the Asset Library to the stage or to scene tiles in the sceneline. Using the tools in the Video Recut window, you can edit the video and apply borders, captions, overlays, effects, links, and transitions to scenes, as well as preview the final video. You can also create video templates by creating parameters for the URL of content, hotspot tooltips

and links, rollover key, and caption text. See “ Creating Video Recuts ” on page 138.

3.

Set up Video Viewer and Video Recut Viewer Presets

Scene7 offers default Video Viewer Presets and Video Recut Viewer Presets as well. These presets determine the look of the Viewer and how its playback controls work.

To set a Video Viewer Preset or a Video Recut Viewer Preset as a default, choose Setup > Viewer Presets. Select the preset you want to use as a default and click Make Default.

133

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eVideo Streaming

Administrators can create Video Viewer Presets. To add a preset, click the Setup button on the Global Navigation bar.

Click to expand Application Setup, and then select Viewer Presets. Click Add. Then choose options on the Configure

Viewer screen. See “ Video Viewer presets ” on page 129.

4.

Preview videos in the Video Viewer

To see how your video plays when users see it on your website or application, select the video in the Browse Panel.

Then click the Preview button, choose File > Preview, or click the rollover Preview button. The Preview screen opens.

See “ Previewing videos in the Video Viewer ” on page 130.

You can play the video on the Preview screen. You can also choose different Video Viewer Presets to find out what your video looks like in different Video Viewers.

You can choose a Video Recut Viewer Preset from the Video Recut screen.

5.

Publish streaming video

Publishing streaming video places it on Scene7 servers so it can be delivered to your website or application. As part of the publishing process, Scene7 activates the URL string for calling the video from Scene7 Image Servers to your website or application.

To publish videos and Video Recuts, mark the video files, audio files, and assets for publish by selecting the Mark For

Publish icon in the Browse Panel. You can also mark a video for publish when you upload it. In the Publish screen, select a When option, optionally enter a name for the publish job, verify that the job is either all or video, and select

the Start Publish button. See “ Publish a streaming video ” on page 152.

Note: Video Viewer Presets are published as part of the Image Server publish job, not the Video publish job. Perform an

Image Server publish to get your Video Viewer Presets onto the publish server.

6.

Link streaming video to a web page

To obtain the URL for an FLV file, F4V file, or Video Recut, select it in the Browse Panel (or Detail view), click the

Preview button, and click the Copy URL button.

Note: URLs are only active after you publish the video.

For standard videos, you can choose between a streaming video URL or a progressive video URL. For Video Recuts, the only choice is for a streaming video URL. When you click a Copy URL button, the URL is copied to the Clipboard.

Place this code in the HTML of your web page or Application. See “ Link a streaming video file to a web page ” on page 152.

134

Uploading files for streaming video

To create streaming video, first upload your master video files to the Scene7 Publishing System. You can upload various video formats to Scene7, and transcode them to the FLV or F4V for streaming, if necessary. If you intend to create a Video Recut, upload additional asset files, such as audio for a soundtrack, overlay graphics, or SWF content for captions before you create the Video Recut.

Streaming video has many benefits over progressive video. It allows users to quickly play video of any length over the

Internet; there’s no need to wait for an entire file to download. When playing back streaming video from a player (such as Adobe Flash Player), you can jump to different sections of the video and immediately begin play back from that point. Streaming videos are protected from unauthorized downloads; they cannot be tampered with or uploaded to video sharing websites.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eVideo Streaming

Note: Before publishing, set up a Video Viewer Preset and preview your video. To choose a preset for your Video Viewer,

see “ Video Viewer presets ” on page

Previewing videos in the

Video Viewer ” on page

File types for streaming video

Scene7 streams FLV and F4V files. You can transcode other formats to the FLV or F4V format when you upload them to the Scene7 Publishing System. Long video files are difficult to edit in the Video Recut window, so keep them under

9 minutes.

FLV and F4V files

Scene7 video servers stream FLV or F4V format video. When you upload an FLV or F4V file, you don’t have to choose an encoding preset. However, you can encode it if the resolution is not correct for the intended purpose (for example, if you want to create a Video Recut or if the resolution required by client website doesn’t match the resolution of the master file). To create a Video Recut, use the Scene7 Recut FLV encoding preset on upload.

Other video file formats

Use an encoding preset in Scene7 to transcode the following video file formats to the FLV or

F4V format: AVI, MOV, MP4, WMV, and 3GPP.

Audio files (Video Recuts only)

You can use a second soundtrack in a Video Recut by uploading an mp3 audio file.

Assets for use with Video Recuts

You can add any of the following assets to a Video Recut: audio (mp3 asset); backgrounds (any Scene7 asset served from Image Server, such as an image or template); boarders, captions, effects, graphics, and transitions (typically SWF assets); and video (FLV asset). You can use the assets that are included with

Scene7 in the Assets Library, or create and upload your own. Assets can be SWF, PNG, GIF, or JPG files.

Note: After you upload an asset file for use in video recuts, tag the asset so that Scene7 understands that you want to use

it as a transition, border, caption, or overlay. (See “ Tag an asset ” on page

More Help topics

“ Design and tag assets ” on page 146

Upload and encode video files for streaming

Scene7 streams FLV and F4V format files. If your video file is in a different format, or if you want to change the specifications of your FLV or F4V file, choose an encoding preset from the Encoding Preset menu during this upload process. Scene7 uses the Adobe Flash Media Encoding Server for transcoding video files.

For detailed instructions on uploading files, see “ Uploading your files ” on page 38. The original master video file, as

well as all transcoded files, are uploaded and managed. You can download or export any of these files.

You can transcode the following file types: AVI, MOV, MP4, WMV, and 3GPP. Keep in mind the following when choosing an encoding preset:

Choose Scene7 Recut FLV if you intend to use the video files you are uploading to create a Video Recut.

• Choose an encoding preset based on the size and bandwidth with which you plan to play back the video from your website.

You can choose more than one encoding preset per video. (See “ Encoding presets ” on page 136.)

More Help topics

“ Uploading files ” on page 35

“ Assets you can use in Video Recuts ” on page 139

135

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eVideo Streaming

Encoding presets

When you upload a video to Scene7, you can choose to encode the video with a Flash format encoding preset. You can choose the appropriate preset for your video, depending on your needs.

Flash 7 presets use the H263-Sorenson Spark codec, and create mp3 audio and FLV format video files. These presets work well when your users are using older computers.

Flash 8 presets use the VP6 codec, and create mp3 audio and FLV format video files.

• Flash 9 presets use the H264 codec and create AAC audio and F4V format video files. These presets are recommended for best results.

Important: If you intend to create a Video Recut with the video files you upload, choose the Recut preset. You cannot create a Video Recut with Flash 9 formatted video.

NTSC encoding preset options (US and Japan)

H263 - Sorenson Spark (Flash 7 and earlier) - MP3 audio - FLV extension

Encoding Preset Target connection speed (Mbps)

4:3, 640x480px, NTSC,

30fps, Flash-7, (1.3Mbit)

1.5

16:9, 640x352px, NTSC,

30fps, Flash-7, (0.9Mbit)

0.9

4:3, 512x384px, NTSC,

30fps, Flash-7, (.8Mbit)

0.8

4:3, 320x240px, NTSC,

24fps, Flash-7, (0.5Mbit)

0.5

Video bit rate

(Kbps)

Fps

1200

800

700

400

29.97

29.97

29.97

Keyframe interval

120

90

90

23.976

120

Audio bit rate

(kbps)

Recommendations

96

96

64

48

High resolution

Medium widescreen resolution

Medium resolution

3G phone resolution or low bandwidth

VP6 - (Flash 8) - MP3 audio - FLV extension

Encoding Preset Target connection speed (Mbps)

16:9, 1280x720px, NTSC,

24fps, Flash-8, (2.1Mbit)

3.0

4:3, 640x480px, NTSC,

30fps, Flash-8, (1.3Mbit)

(Recut)

1.5

16:9, 640x352px, NTSC,

30fps, Flash-8, (0.9Mbit)

0.9

0.8

4:3, 512x384px, NTSC,

30fps, Flash-8, (.8Mbit)

4:3, 400x300px, NTSC,

24fps, Flash-8, (.8Mbit

(Recut))

0.8

4:3, 320x240px, NTSC,

24fps, Flash-8, (0.5Mbit)

(Recut)

0.5

Video bit rate

(Kbps)

Fps

2000

1200

800

700

329

400

Keyframe interval

23.976

120

29.97

29.97

29.97

120

96

90

23.976

24

23.976

120

Audio bit rate

(kbps)

Recommendations

128

96

96

64

96

48

High-definition widescreen video

High resolution

Medium widescreen resolution

Medium resolution

Maximum resolution for

Scene7 Video Recuts

3G phone resolution or low bandwidth

136

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eVideo Streaming

H264 (Flash 9)- AAC audio - F4V extension

Encoding Preset Target connection speed (Mbps)

16:9, 1280x720px, NTSC,

24fps, Flash-9, (2.1Mbit)

3.0

4:3, 640x480px, NTSC,

30fps, Flash-9, (1.3Mbit)

1.5

16:9, 640x352px, NTSC,

30fps, Flash-9, (0.9Mbit)

0.9

4:3, 512x384px, NTSC,

30fps, Flash-9, (0.8Mbit)

0.8

16:9, 432x240px, NTSC,

24fps, Flash-9, (0.5Mbit)

0.768

4:3, 320x240px, NTSC,

24fps, Flash-9, (0.5Mbit)

0.5

Video bit rate

(Kbps)

Fps

2000

1200

800

700

400

400

Keyframe interval

23.976

N/A

29.97

29.97

29.97

N/A

N/A

N/A

23.976

N/A

23.976

N/A

Audio bit rate

(kbps)

Recommendations

96

48

96

80

128

96

High-definition widescreen video

High resolution

Medium widescreen resolution

Medium resolution

Movie trailer

3G phone resolution or low bandwidth

PAL encoding preset options (Europe and Asia)

H263 - Sorenson Spark (Flash 7 or earlier) - MP3 audio - FLV extension

Encoding Preset Target connection speed (Mbps)

4:3, 640x480px, PAL,

25fps, Flash-7, (1.5Mbit)

1.5

16:9, 640x352px, PAL,

25fps, Flash-7, (0.9Mbit)

0.9

4:3, 512x384px, PAL,

25fps, Flash-7, (.8Mbit)

0.8

4:3, 320x240px, PAL,

25fps, Flash-7, (0.5Mbit)

0.5

Video bit rate

(Kbps)

Fps

1200

800

700

400

25

25

25

25

Keyframe interval

120

90

90

120

Audio format and bit rate

(kbps)

Recommended

96 High resolution

96

64

48

Medium widescreen resolution

Medium resolution

3G phone resolution or low bandwidth

VP6 (Flash 8) - MP3 Audio - FLV extension

Encoding Preset Target connection speed (Mbps)

16:9, 1280x720px, PAL,

25fps, Flash-8, (2.1Mbit)

3.0

4:3, 640x480px, PAL,

25fps, Flash-8, (1.3Mbit)

(Recut)

1.5

16:9, 640x352px, PAL,

25fps, Flash-8, (0.9Mbit)

(Recut)

0.9

Video bit rate

(Kbps)

Fps

2000

1200

800

25

25

25

Keyframe interval

120

120

96

Audio format and bit rate

(kbps)

Recommended

128 High-definition widescreen video

96 High resolution

96 Medium widescreen resolution

137

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eVideo Streaming

Encoding Preset

4:3, 512x384px, PAL,

25fps, Flash-8, (.8Mbit)

4:3, 400x300px, PAL,

25fps, Flash-8, (.8Mbit)

(Recut)

Target connection speed (Mbps)

0.8

0.8

4:3, 320x240px, PAL,

25fps, Flash-8, (0.5Mbit)

(Recut)

0.5

Video bit rate

(Kbps)

Fps

700

329

400

25

25

25

Keyframe interval

90

24

120

H264 (Flash 9) - AAC Audio - F4V extension

Encoding Preset Target connection speed (Mbps)

16:9, 1280x720px, PAL,

25fps, Flash-9, (2.1Mbit)

3.0

4:3, 640x480px, PAL,

25fps, Flash-9, (1.5Mbit)

1.5

16:9, 640x352px, PAL,

25fps, Flash-9, (0.9Mbit)

0.9

4:3, 512x384px, PAL,

25fps, Flash-9, (0.8Mbit)

0.8

16:9, 432x240px, PAL,

25fps, Flash-9, (0.5Mbit)

0.768

16:9, 432x240px, PAL,

24fps, Flash-9, (0.5Mbit)

0.768

4:3, 320x240px, PAL,

25fps, Flash-9, (0.5Mbit)

0.5

Video bit rate

(Kbps)

Fps

2000

1200

800

700

400

400

400

25

25

25

25

25

24

25

Keyframe interval

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Audio format and bit rate

(kbps)

Recommended

64 Medium resolution

96

48

Maximum resolution for

Scene7 Video Recuts

3G phone resolution or low bandwidth

96

48

80

96

Audio format and bit rate

(kbps)

Recommended

128

96

High-definition widescreen video

High resolution

96 Medium widescreen resolution

Medium resolution

Movie trailer

Movie trailer

3G phone resolution or low bandwidth

Creating Video Recuts

About Video Recuts

Video Recuts are remixes of your master video files. You can create Video Recuts by combining FLV formatted video clips (not F4V formatted video), audio, photos, graphics, text, and transitions in the easy-to-use Video Recut window.

Create Video Recuts to easily enhance your video to highlight features and targeted promotions.

The Scene7 Video Recut window, based on the Adobe Flash technology, lets you remix and reorder video clips, split and trim clips, sync audio, and create photo slide shows. You can also add titles using standard text composites, add borders around clips, insert links, add transitions between clips, and overlay photos and videos with graphics

(including animated graphics). In addition, you can create templates for your Video Recuts. Video Recut Templates allow you to modify properties of the Video Recut at runtime.

After you publish a Video Recut, you can obtain its URL by clicking the Preview button or going to Detail view and opening the URLs panel.

138

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eVideo Streaming

Users view Video Recuts in a Scene7 Video Recut Viewer, not the standard Video Viewer (and they must use Flash

Player 10 or later). You can specify a default Video Recut Viewer Preset in the Application Setup. You can brand and customize the Scene7 Video Recut Viewer to the specifications of your company. Contact your Scene7 representative or technical support for more information.

Important: To create Video Recuts, use FLV files encoded with the Scene7 Recut FLV encoding preset option.

Assets you can use in Video Recuts

Use captions, graphics, visual effects, soundtracks, and other Scene7 assets to enhance scenes in your Video Recut.

Each scene can have six different assets.

Scene7 provides sample assets that you can use, or you can upload your own. The sample assets are available in the

Sample eVideo Content panel of the Video Recut window, at the bottom of the Asset Library.

You can use any of the following to create scenes:

Audio

Apply a soundtrack to your entire Video Recut. Use the Property Inspector to control the soundtrack volume in video scenes that contain their own embedded audio.

Background

Apply a custom background color to a scene. You can choose from many different colors in the Property

Inspector.

Border

Add a graphic overlay that frames a scene as it plays. For example, the Drapes border adds curtains over the video to give the effect of watching the video in a theater. Borders are not adjustable, and are always the topmost layer.

You can use one border per scene, or apply the same border to all scenes by dragging it to the Global drop zone.

Caption

Add a text box that appears onscreen. Scene7 offers different kinds of captions, including bubble captions, banners, and sticky notes. After you enter text for your caption, choose a font, font size, and font color for the text. If desired, you can rotate the text. You can use multiple captions per scene, or apply a caption to all scenes by dragging it to the Global drop zone.

Effect

Change the tone or character of a scene. For example, you can blur, lighten, or darken scenes, or add brilliance or contrast to scenes. Effects apply to entire scenes. After you apply an effect, you can fine-tune it in the Property

Inspector window. You can use multiple effects to obtain your desired result. The effects are stacked as you drag-anddrop them. You can change the order of the effects to apply them on different layers. You can apply an effect to all scenes by dragging it to the Global drop zone.

Graphic

Apply a small graphic in the forefront of scenes on top of videos or other images by dragging it to the stage or the sceneline. You can use any image as a graphic if you designate it as an overlay in Scene7. After you place a graphic on the stage, you can open the Property Inspector window and choose transparency commands, depth level (z-order), and layer-blending commands for the graphic. You can specify how long the graphic is displayed onscreen by dragging the image end-time control handle out to as long as 60 seconds. You can use up to six graphics per scene (there is a maximum of six total assets per scene).

Transition

Helps you clearly mark the passage between scenes or ease the transition from one scene to the next. In a blur transition, for example, the first scene ends in a blur; the next scene begins in a blur and gradually comes into focus. In the Property Inspector, you can control the duration of transitions as well as make the audio fade in and out as the transition occurs.

Video

Create scenes using uploaded videos that have been encoded with the Scene7 Recut FLV (VP6) preset. Scene7 can transcode videos from other formats for streaming delivery. You can scrub the video to choose your desired edit point and split the video into two parts using the Scissors button . You can also change the In and Out points of each video.

Note: You can add a link to any visible asset in your Video Recut. You cannot add links to transitions or video frames.

139

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eVideo Streaming

More Help topics

“ Design and tag assets ” on page 146

Video Recut window overview

The Video Recut window provides all the tools you need for creating, editing, and previewing a Video Recut.

To open the window, click the Build button and choose Video Recuts. Scenes you add to your Video Recut appear on scene tiles in the sceneline. To add additional assets, click the Add Assets panel on the left side of the window.

140

A

B

C D

Video Recut window

A. Stage B. Sceneline with scene tiles and transition tiles C. Soundtrack drop zone D. Global drop zone

Use the Play , Rewind , and Pause or to different scenes in the recut, drag the playhead

buttons to preview a recut. To move to different parts of a scene

. To adjust audio, drag the volume slider or click the Mute icon .

Note: The volume controls are for playing video in the Video Recut window, not for choosing volume settings. For

information about choosing volume settings for scenes and Video Recuts, see “ Adjust volume ” on page

The Video Recut window contains the following components.

Stage

Use the stage to create a scene, play a scene, and add or manipulate borders, captions, effects, and overlays in scenes.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eVideo Streaming

Sceneline

The sceneline displays one scene tile for each scene in your Video Recut. Use the sceneline to create a scene by dragging videos or photos, add a transition between scenes, change the order of scenes, and play your Video Recut. The timeline below the sceneline tells you how long your Video Recut is. When you select a scene tile, a portion of the timeline is filled in. This filled-in portion shows you how much of the video the scene you selected occupies. You can drag the

Playhead on the timeline or sceneline to advance or rewind your Video Recut.

Soundtrack drop zone

Use the Soundtrack drop zone to choose an audio file to play throughout your Video Recut. Choose an audio file in the Asset Library and drag it to the Soundtrack drop zone. The audio file loops—it starts from the beginning and

replays after it has finished playing. For detailed information about audio, see “ Adjust volume ” on page 144.

Global drop zone

Choose an asset in the Asset Library and drag it to the Global drop zone to apply the asset to every scene in your Video

Recut. For example, to place the same border on every scene, drag a border from the Asset Library to the Global drop zone. Borders, captions, effects, and graphics can be applied globally to all scenes. Photos, videos, and transitions cannot be applied to the Global drop zone.

Property Inspector

The Property Inspector has various tools for adjusting your scenes. For example, you can control the volume of a scene or the volume of a soundtrack; or reorder, remove, or adjust the captions, graphics, and other effects applied to the scene. You can also use the Property Inspector to add links to scenes, objects, or the entire video. Using the Property

Inspector can be helpful when adjusting an asset or effect that is behind another asset or effect.

To open the Property Inspector, double-click a scene tile or click the Wrench icon . To close the Property Inspector window, click the Return To Sceneline button .

141

Property Inspector

You can do any of the following in the Property Inspector:

Adjust an asset or effects controls. Select an asset or effect from the list on the right to reveal its controls. Its sizing controls also become available in the video window.

• Add a link and tool tip text to any visible asset in the Video Recut.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eVideo Streaming

• Reorder the asset or effects for a scene. Click the Up or Down Arrows next to the selected asset or effect’s icon to reorder them. Topmost assets and effects in the list are frontmost in the video. The video clip must be at the bottom of the list.

• Remove an asset. Select it in the list and click the Trash button .

Control the video volume and soundtrack volume in a scene. Drag the volume sliders to increase or decrease volume.

Add Rollover Key text that appears when

• Parameterize the video, link, tooltip, or rollover key so that you can create a video template.

Edit Parameter options and dialog box

Use the Edit Parameter dialog box to specify and name the different properties of your Video Recut that you want to make variable. The Edit Parameter dialog box is accessed through the Property Inspector for the scene containing the content you want to make variable. Properties that can be made variable have an icon next to their names. For

information on creating Video Recut Templates, see “ Create a Video Recut Template ” on page 148.

To open the Edit Parameter dialog box, click the Parameter button .

Create and edit Video Recuts

You create a Video Recut by combining video scenes, audio, images, transitions, and other assets. You can create a scene from an FLV file, an image template, or SWF file. After you create the initial scene, you can add assets and a soundtrack. A soundtrack is a looping audio file that plays throughout a Video Recut.

Scene7 includes sample assets in the Sample eVideo Content panel of the Asset Library. However, you can create your own assets by using Adobe Flash authoring environment, Adobe Photoshop, and Adobe Illustrator. Assets can use the following file formats: Adobe Flash 9 SWF, JPG, PNG, GIF. To use a SWF file as an asset, mark it as a caption. To use an image or template as an asset in a Video Recut, mark it as an overlay or do not mark it at all.

By default, scenes created with images and backgrounds are 3 seconds long, but you can change this length.

Create a Video Recut

1

Select a video in the Browse panel, and then click Build and choose Video Recut.

2

Select a preset from the Preset menu.

Important: Once you start building your Video Recut, you cannot change this preset or all edits will be lost.

3

In the Video Recut window, drag an FLV file or an image from the Asset Library to the stage or the sceneline.

Dragging an asset to the stage creates a scene at the end of the Video Recut. Dragging an asset to the sceneline creates the scene at the point in the Video Recut where you drop the asset.

4

To customize the Video Recut, do any of the following:

• To add a colored background scene, select a background from the Asset Library to the stage or sceneline.

Double-click the scene tile to open the Property Inspector, click the Background Color button and choose a color.

• To add a border, caption, effect, or overlay, select it in the Asset Library and drag it to the stage or sceneline. Or, to apply it to all scenes, drag it to the Global drop zone.

Note: Once you apply these types of assets, you can adjust them in the Property Inspector window. Borders cannot be adjusted.

142

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eVideo Streaming

• To add a soundtrack, select an audio file in the Asset Library and drag it to the Soundtrack drop zone. You can use an mp3 file.

• To add a transition, select it in the Asset Library and drag it to a transition tile on the sceneline. Transition tiles appear between scene tiles on the sceneline.

Note: Move the pointer over a scene tile to see the name of the video file or image with which it was created.

5

Preview the Video Recut to make sure that it plays as you expect.

6

Click the Save button.

Open a saved Video Recut for editing

1

Double-click the Video Recut in the Browse window.

2

In Detail view, click Edit.

Reorder scenes

Drag scene tiles on the sceneline to change their order.

Scenes are renumbered after you reorder them.

Add a link to a scene or image

You can add links to visible assets such as images, graphics, and captions. By default, links open in a new browser window (and always open in a new browser window when previewing), but you can choose to have the link open in the same window.

1

Do one of the following:

• To apply the link to the entire Video Recut, select an asset in the Global drop zone, and click the Wrench icon for the asset.

To apply the link to one scene, select the asset (border, background, caption, or image) within that scene, and click the Wrench icon for that asset.

2

In the Property Inspector, type the URL for the link in the Link box.

3

To add a tool tip that appears when the cursor moves over the link in the video, type the text in the Tool Tip box.

4

(Optional) Specify any of the following:

Color

Click to choose a color for the tool tip text or tool tip background.

Opacity

Enter a value or drag the slider to specify the level of opacity for the tool tip text.

Open Link In

Specify whether the link opens in a new browser window or the same browser window. By default, the link opens in a new browser window. When previewing in Scene7, the link always opens in a new browser window, regardless of the option you select.

Reorder layers or effects within a scene

In the Property Inspector, click the Up or Down Arrows next to the selected asset or effect’s icon to reorder them.

Topmost assets and effects in the list are frontmost in the video. The video clip must be at the bottom of the list.

Delete a scene or transition

Select a scene tile or transition tile in the sceneline, and click the Trash button .

143

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eVideo Streaming

Adjust volume

In the Video Recut window, you can adjust the volume of a global soundtrack, or the audio included in an individual scene.

1

Select a scene tile on the sceneline and double-click the scene tile or click its Wrench button . The Property

Inspector window opens.

2

Do one of the following:

To adjust the volume for the soundtrack, drag the Soundtrack Volume slider.

• To adjust the volume for the audio in a scene, drag the Video Volume slider.

Note: The volume controls in the lower-left corner of the Video Recut window control the volume level when you play a video in the Video Recut window. These controls do not affect volume levels in the video itself.

Remove a soundtrack

Click the Soundtrack drop zone to select the audio file, and then click the Trash button .

Change the length of an image or background scene

Drag the End Point on the stage timeline.

The stage timeline tells you in seconds how long the scene is. By default, scenes created with images and backgrounds are 3 seconds long.

Remove or restore a portion of a scene

1

To remove a portion of a scene, do and of the following:

• To remove the start of a video scene, drag the start point on the stage timeline to the right until the entire segment you want removed turns gray.

• To remove the end of a video scene, drag the end point on the stage timeline to the left until the entire segment you want removed turns gray.

To remove a section from the center of a video scene, split the scene where you want to remove it, and then remove the beginning or end of one of the split scenes.

2

To restore a removed segment drag the start or end point back over the removed segment (the gray area).

Split a scene

Splitting a scene is necessary if you want to apply assets to different parts of a scene or remove the middle of a scene.

1

In the stage timeline, drag the playhead

2

Click the Scissors button .

to the point at which you want to split the scene.

Two scenes are created, with a segment removed from the end of the first scene and a segment removed from the start of the second scene.

3

(Optional) To rejoin the video scenes, delete one of them and restore the removed segment in the other scene.

Edit applied assets

You can edit applied captions, overlays, and effects by using the Property Inspector window. Borders cannot be edited.

You edit transitions as you apply them.

144

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eVideo Streaming

More Help topics

“ Design and tag assets ” on page 146

Edit an effect

1

Double-click a scene tile or the Global drop zone, or click the Wrench button to open the Property Inspector.

2

Adjust effect settings as desired. (All effects have different settings.) On the stage, you can see the results of your option choices.

Edit a transition

Double-click the transition, and one of the following: Double-click the transition icon and

Drag the Duration slider to change the length of the transition.

• Select the Fade Audio option to make the audio fade out and in as the transition occurs.

Edit a caption

1

Select the caption on the stage, and enter text for your caption in the caption toolbar that appears.

2

Use the toolbar to choose a font, a font size, and a font color, and to align text.

Note: Fonts are embedded in caption SWF files. For that reason, you can’t choose a font for a caption other than the fonts that are available on the caption toolbar.

Edit an overlay

1

Double-click a scene tile or the Global drop zone, or click the Wrench button to open the Property Inspector.

2

Select the name of your overlay.

3

Choose transparency and layer-blending settings for the overlay.

Change the depth level (z-order) of an overlay or caption

Overlays and captions can overlap if more than one is in the same scene. Reordering these assets is necessary when they overlap and you want one asset to appear in front of or behind another.

1

In the sceneline, select the scene tile with the scene that has overlapping assets. Or, if the overlapping assets are applied globally, select the Global drop zone.

2

Double-click the scene tile (or Global drop zone) or click its Wrench button . The Property Inspector window opens. It lists all assets, with the frontmost assets at the top of the list. Arrows appear next to the names of assets that you can move up or down in the list.

3

Click the Up or Down Arrow to change the z ordering in the list.

Important: Global assets that appear on every scene appear in front of other assets. You cannot move these assets behind other assets.

Resize, reposition, and rotate captions and overlays

1

Select the caption or overlay. Boundaries and selection handles appear.

2

Do any of the following:

To resize the asset, drag a selection handle at the corner or side of the boundary.

• To reposition the asset, move the pointer over the asset until the cursor changes to a four-headed arrow; then drag the asset to a new location.

145

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eVideo Streaming

• To rotate the asset, drag the rotation handle.

If the asset you are working with is a global asset—if you placed it in the Global drop zone—the asset is resized, repositioned, or rotated in all scenes.

Set transparency and layer effects for captions and overlays

Captions and overlays appear in the forefront of scenes. By default, these assets are 100 percent opaque—they obscure the assets below them. However, you can choose a transparency setting for these assets as well as a layer-blending option to make them fit better onscreen.

1

On the stage, select the caption or overlay.

2

Double-click the scene tile or click its Wrench button to open the Property Inspector window. If the caption or overlay appears in every scene, double-click the Global drop zone to open its Property Inspector window.

3

Choose options for the caption or overlay:

Transparency

Drag the slider to choose a setting. At 100 percent, the caption or overlay is completely visible; at 1 percent, it is transparent.

Layer blending

Choose an option to define how the caption or overlay blends with the layer below. These options have different effects depending on the background color and the color and transparency of the caption or overlay.

Move the pointer over an option to see its effect on the stage.

Flip Vertical or Flip Horizontal

(Captions only) Select one to flip the caption.

Drop Shadow

(Captions only) Select to make the letters cast a faint shadow on the screen.

Remove an asset

You can remove a border, effect, caption, or overlay applied to individual scenes or to all scenes. Assets you place in the Global drop zone are applied to all scenes.

1

In the sceneline, select the scene containing the asset you want to remove.

2

Select the asset on the stage and click the Trash button , or drag the asset off the stage.

Note: If you have trouble selecting an asset on the stage, open the Property Inspector window (click the Wrench button to open), select the asset in the asset list and click the Trash button.

Design and tag assets

Scene7 provides sample transitions, borders, captions, and overlays in the Sample eVideo Content panel of the Asset

Library. You can create your own assets using the Adobe Flash authoring tool, Adobe Photoshop, or Adobe Illustrator.

Publish asset files as Flash 9 SWF files.

After you create a transition, border, caption, or overlay and upload it to Scene7, tag it as a Video Recut asset. Tagging lets Scene7 recognize it as a Video Recut asset.

Make sure your assets match the preset you are using to view the Video Recut. You can use 640 x 480, 640 x 352, 400 x 300, or 320 x 240.

Design a transition

1

Use Adobe Flash Professional or other application to create a transition, and follow these guidelines:

Flash 9 SWF file format

• ActionScript® 3.0 publish settings

146

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eVideo Streaming

• 24 frames per second (fps)

Use vector graphics whenever possible

• Do not include ActionScript or Document classes

2

Halfway into the transition, cover the entire movie screen. Make the first half of the transition the transition-in, and the second half the transition-out.

3

Upload the SWF file transition to Scene7, and open it in Detail view.

4

Open the Metadata panel, and choose Transition from the eVideoTypeViewerSWF menu.

Design a border

You can design borders for your Video Recuts with the Adobe Flash Professional, Adobe Photoshop, Adobe

Illustrator, or Adobe Fireworks®. Use a static or animated SWF file, a PNG, or a GIF as a border. Scene7 recommends using a static SWF file or a PNG file with a transparent canvas. PNG files produce the best edges for borders.

1

Use Adobe Flash, Adobe Photoshop, Adobe Illustrator, or Adobe Fireworks to create a border, and follow these guidelines:

• Flash 9 SWF (static or animated), PNG, or GIF file format

Set SWF files to ActionScript 3.0

• 24 frames per second (fps)

Do not reference any Document class in a SWF file

2

Create animations in the main timeline only. Do not nest animations within video clips.

If the border doesn’t touch the edges of the stage and you would like that space maintained in the Video Recut, place a transparent movie clip, the size of your preset, over all layers. Scene7 tries to scale the border to fit the stage.

3

Upload the border file to Scene7, and open it in Detail view.

4

Open the Metadata panel, and choose Border from the eVideoTypeImage, eVideoTypeTemplate, or eVideoTypeViewerSwf menu.

Design a caption

1

Use Adobe Flash Professional to create captions in the Flash 9 SWF file format.

Embed the font into the text field on the stage, but specify a character range. Basic Latin is sufficient for captions in English.

2

Upload the caption to Scene7, and open it in Detail view.

3

Open the Metadata panel, and choose Caption from the eVideoTypeViewerSwf menu.

Design an overlay

Use vector graphics to create an overlay to achieve better image quality when scaling. Adobe recommends using PNG files because they produce better transparency, but you can also use JPG and GIF files for overlays.

1

Use a vector graphics application, like Adobe Illustrator to create overlays, and follow these guidelines:

• Flash 9 SWF, JPG, GIF, or PNG file with a transparent canvas (PNG is recommended because they produce better transparency)

24 frames per second

• You cannot reference any Document class in a SWF file.

147

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eVideo Streaming

• Create animations in the main timeline. Do not nest animations within video clips.

2

Upload the graphic file to Scene7, and open it in Detail view.

3

Open the Metadata panel, and choose Overlay from the eVideoTypeTemplate, eVideoTypeImage, or eVideoTypeViewerSwf menu.

Tag an asset

After you create and upload an asset file for use in a Video Recut, tag the asset as a transition, border, caption, or overlay.

1

Display the asset in Detail view.

2

Open the Metadata panel and choose an asset type from the eVideoType menu.

The eVideoType menu changes names depending on the type of asset you are working with. The menu is called eVideoTypeImage, eVideoTypeTemplate, or eVideoTypeViewerSwf.

Note: If the eVideoType menu isn’t available, contact your Scene7 administrator. Your administrator must log in to run the automatic creation of options on the eVideoType menu.

Create a Video Recut Template

Video Recut Templates let you create a single recut, and then modify it as desired by replacing the content at runtime.

You can create templates from Video Recuts that use any number or scenes, soundtracks, transitions, and overlays.

As with Basic Templates and FXG Templates, in Video Recut Templates, you create parameters for the properties you want to make variable. You can create parameters for the URL of content, hotspot tooltips and links, rollover key, and caption text. Creating parameters for the URL of content lets you substitute a different video, image, soundtrack, or overlay. Creating a parameter to change the URL for a video or image, changes all the instances of that video or image in the Video Recut. When you replace content that differs in length, the timeframe in the template changes to match the new content.

You can use the same parameter name for the text in different assets, such as captions, in your Video Recut, to change the text in all instances at the same time.

Create variable properties

1

Double-click the scene tile, or click the Wrench button for the scene containing the property you want to make variable. If the property is global, click the Wrench button in the Global drop zone.

2

In the Property Inspector, click the Parameter button next to the property.

The Edit Parameter dialog box opens, displaying the default parameter name and value.

3

Click OK to accept the default parameter name, or type a new name in the box, and then click Apply.

Note: Properties are not variable by default, you must open the Edit Parameter dialog box and click Apply for any property you want to make variable.

Remove parameterization from a property

1

In the Property Inspector, click the Parameter button next to the property.

2

In the Edit Parameter dialog box, click Remove.

148

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eVideo Streaming

Substitute content in variable properties

After you’ve parameterized properties for a Video Recut, you can substitute values for variable properties while previewing it.

1

In the Video Recut window, click Preview.

The Recut appears in the Preview window, with the variable names and values in a panel along the left side of the window.

2

To change a variable value, type a new value in the variable’s box.

The variable value is replace and appears in the preview.

3

Click Close to return to the Video Recut window.

149

Info Panel content for Video Recuts

You can use an Info Panel to add rollover text, including links to your Video Recuts. You can also manage the

InfoPanel by using timed caching and scheduling content updates.

You can manage your InfoPanel setup and data using the following features in Scene7:

• InfoPanel Setup panel lets you specify the template used to display the Info Panel text, a default response for errors, and the number of hours the information is cached. In addition, you can specify whether the eCatalogs is automatically published.

• InfoPanel Datafeed panel lets you specify a CSV file containing the text you want to appear in the InfoPanel rollover text, as well as schedule times for updating the information.

Set up a Response Template

You can select one of three preset response templates for displaying text in an Info Panel. These preset response templates determine how your information is presented in the Info Panel: how many columns and rows, typeface size, font, and so on. You can select a preset response template or create one of your own.

1

Double-click your Video Recut to open it in Detail View.

2

Click the InfoPanel Setup panel to open it.

3

Select a Response Template:

Select a preset from the Response Template menu. The XML for the template design appears in the User

Template box.

Select User Entered, to create your own response template. Type the template XML definition in the User

Template box. You can use the preset templates as a base for your own.

4

(Optional) In the Default Response box, type the text you want to appear if Scene7 encounters an error in retrieving information for an image map. For example, if the system receives a company name and an eCatalog name, but no rollover identifier, this message appears for the user.

5

In the Response TTL box, enter the number of hours you want to wait before caching the data:

Set a lower number if the data is updated frequently throughout a day.

• Set a higher number if the data is relatively stable and doesn’t require updating frequently throughout the day.

The default is ten hours.

6

Select Enable or Disable from the Automatic Publishing menu.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eVideo Streaming

Note: Disabling automatic publishing is useful when you are testing the response template. You can click Publish To

InfoServer at any time to publish the Video Recut.

Import source content for the Info Panel

You can use comma-separated value files (CSV) or tab delimited files (TXT) for the source text for an Info Panel. Tab delimited files must use UTF16 (Unicode) encoding. You import the different file types using different methods.

When formatting source content, keep in mind the following guidelines:

Make sure that the tab and comma delimited data contains as many columns as are necessary for the rollover template.

• Make sure that the first item or column of data is the rollover identifier (associated with the rollover_key value from the image map URLs).

• Make sure that each tab or comma delimited item after the identifier is the item you want substituted into the response template (so the first column is substituted into $1$, the second column into $2$, and so on).

Import CSV content from an externally hosted location

1

Double-click the Video Recut to open it in Detail View.

2

Click the InfoPanel Datafeed panel to open it.

3

Enter the URL for the CSV file in the Update Source box. You can paste the URL into this field or type it directly.

4

(Optional) Specify a time to update the content using the Schedule Update menus and click Add. You can select multiple times for updating. Each update time appears in the Update Times box. (To remove a time, select it and click Delete.)

5

(Optional) Click Run Update Now to immediately update the content.

Import a tab-delimited or CSV file

1

Double-click the Video Recut to open it in Detail View.

2

Click Edit and then click Map Pages.

3

Click Import Metadata to open the Import Metadata dialog box.

4

Click Info Panel for Metadata Type.

5

Click Browse, select the tab delimited TXT file or CSV file you want to use, and click Open.

6

Click Upload.

Scene7 sends you an e-mail message letting you know if the upload was successful or not.

Preview rollover key text for an Image Map

You can view Info Panel text in the Property Inspector.

1

Double-click the Video Recut to open it in Detail View.

2

Double-click a scene to open the Property Inspector and view the Rollover text.

150

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eVideo Streaming

Video Viewer presets

Users watch Video Recuts in a Video Recut Viewer, and watch videos in a Video Viewer. How the Viewer behaves, what it looks like, and how its playback controls work depends on the Viewer preset you choose. Administrators can create new presets by going to the Configure Viewer screen. This screen offers different settings for configuring the

Viewer. You can configure its size, color, video and audio controls, progress bar, user-interface skin, and Help features.

More Help topics

“ Viewer Presets ” on page 19

Setting up Video Recut Viewer or Video Viewer presets

You can create and customize Video Viewer presets to suit your needs. You can choose from four different sizes of

Video Recut Viewer presets; however, you cannot customize them. You can use rollover keys in Video Recut Viewers.

You can make the rollover key variable in the Property Inspector.

1

Choose Setup > Viewer Presets.

The Viewer Presets window opens.

2

Do one of the following:

• To create a new preset, click Add and choose Video Viewer.

To edit an existing Video Viewer preset, select the preset and click Edit.

The Configure Viewer screen opens.

3

Type a name in the Preset Name box for the Video Viewer preset.

4

To add community features (Email, Embed, Link, Visit) to the viewer, specify options for any of the following:

Email

Click On to enable an Email button in the viewer. When users click the Email button while viewing the video, an email containing the link to the video opens.

Embed

Click Enabled. In the Embed Button Label box, type the name you want displayed in the viewer for the

Embed Button. If desired, click Browse to locate and select a custom skin for the button.

Link

Click Enabled. In the Link Button Label box, type the name you want displayed in the viewer for the Link

Button. If desired, click Browse to locate and select a custom skin for the button.

Visit

Click Enabled. In the Visit Button Label box, type the name you want displayed in the viewer for the Visit

Button. In the Visit URL box, type the URL to the website that you want to open when the link is clicked.

Note: Custom skins are available for Enterprise users only.

5

Choose other options in the Configure Viewer screen. You can specify options for Skin SWFs, Viewer Features,

Video Setting, Audio Settings, Progress Bar Settings.

To see a description of an option, click the Info Tip icon adjacent to the option.

The preview screen displays the viewer as you update and change settings.

6

Click Save.

151

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eVideo Streaming

Previewing videos in a Viewer

Any user can view a Video Recut in the Video Recut Viewer window or a video in the Video Viewer window.

1

In the Browse Panel, select the Video Recut that you want to preview.

2

Click the Preview button to open the Preview screen.

3

Select the Presets menu and choose a Viewer preset.

4

Click the Play button, Pause button, and Audio controls to experiment with the video and see what users see when they play it.

You can preview a different Viewer preset by choosing its name on the Presets menu.

152

Publish a streaming video

You publish a video for streaming delivery so that Scene7 Servers can deliver them to your website and application.

After you publish videos, the Scene7 Publishing System activates the URL strings for your HTML web page code.

FLV and F4V files that you want to stream must be marked for publish so that they can be copied to Scene7 servers.

Also mark for publish Video Recuts and their audio files and assets.

More Help topics

“ Publishing ” on page 41

Mark video and other files for publish

Do one of the following:

In the Browse Panel, click the Mark For Publish icon next to each filename that you want to mark.

• In the Upload screen, click the Mark For Publish icon next to each filename that you want to mark.

Publish your streaming videos

1

Click the Publish button on the Global Navigation bar. The Publish screen opens.

2

Select a When option.

3

(Optional) Enter a name for the publish job.

4

Click the Start Publish button.

Link a streaming video file to a web page

Websites and applications access Scene7 server content, including streaming video, by using URL strings. Scene7 activates these URL strings during the publishing process. To place the URL string for your streaming video in your web pages and applications, copy it from the Scene7 Publishing System.

Important: The URL is not active until you publish the asset.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

eVideo Streaming

Obtain a streaming video URL

1

Select an FLV file, F4V file, or Video Recut in the Browse Panel.

2

Do one of the following:

• Click the Preview button, and in the Preview screen click the Copy URL button.

In Detail view, open the URLs panel and click the Copy URL button for the streaming video or Video Recut.

After you click the Copy URL button, the URL is copied to the Clipboard.

Add streaming video to your web page

Deploy streaming videos by using a dynamic page (ASP or JSP) that displays the video in a Scene7 Recut Player. The

URL call to the Scene7 platform follows the same protocol. The player serves a video that your web team can upload to the Scene7 Publishing System for publishing to a Scene7 video server.

153

Last updated 5/21/2010

Chapter 16: Video Sets

Scene7 Video Sets (for Enterprise users only) let you combine multiple video assets and images into one viewer. You view the videos and images in a Video Set Viewer, which displays the video thumbnails and images in either a carousel, grid, or standard video viewer design (videos only). When using a Carousel or Grid Viewer, users choose a video or image by clicking Next and Previous buttons, moving the cursor over a thumbnail, or clicking directly on a thumbnail.

You can also specify that videos play randomly or sequentially. Standard Video Viewers include all the standard video controls such as Play, Pause, Rewind, and a timeline for scrubbing.

Quick Start: Video Sets

This Video Sets Quick Start is designed to help you get up and running quickly with Video Set techniques in Scene7.

1.

Uploading the videos

Start by uploading video and image files for your Video Sets. You can use Flash SWF, FLV, or F4V formatted video in a Video Set. Video Recuts are not currently supported.

Click the Upload button on the Global Navigation bar to upload files from your computer to a folder on the Scene7

Publishing System. See “ Preparing to upload videos for Video Sets

” on page 155 and “ Uploading your files ” on page 38.

2.

Creating a Video Set

To create a Video Set, click the Build button and choose Video Set. Then drag videos and images onto the Video Set screen. To add a custom thumbnail for a video, drag an image to the Custom Thumbnail placeholder box adjacent to the video. This thumbnail image appears in the Video Set viewer, representing the video.

If you want to include a hyperlink that opens when a user clicks the video or image, type or paste the URL in the URL box. Hyperlinks are only active when viewed using either the Carousel or Grid Viewer.

Click Preview to preview the Video Set in the default Video Set Viewer.

See “ Creating a Video Set ” on page 155.

3.

Setting up Video Set Viewer Presets

Administrators can create or modify Video Set Viewer Presets. Scene7 comes with default Viewer Presets for each rich media type, including Video Sets. Administrators can create new Video Set Viewer Presets as well as modify an existing preset.

You can choose from three different Viewer types: Standard, Grid, or Carousel.

See “ Setting up Video Set Viewer Presets ” on page 156.

4.

Previewing a Video Set

Select the Video Set in the Browse Panel and click Preview. Your Video Set appears in this screen using the default

Video Set Viewer preset. See “ Previewing assets ” on page 52.

5.

Publishing a Video Set

Publishing a Video Set places it on Scene7 servers and activates the URL string.

Last updated 5/21/2010

154

USING SCENE7

Video Sets

Click the Mark For Publish icon to the left of its name in the Browse Panel, and then click Publish. On the Publish screen, click Start Publish.

See “ Publishing ” on page 41.

6.

Linking a Video Set to a web page

Scene7 activates URL calls for Video Sets after you publish them. You can copy these URLs from the Preview screen.

Select the Video Set, and then click the Preview button. In the Preview screen, select a Video Set Viewer Preset and

click the Copy URL button. See “ Link a Video Set to a web page ” on page 159.

155

Preparing to upload videos for Video Sets

Before uploading the video files you need for Video Sets to the Scene7 Publishing System, make sure that the video files are the right format. Scene7 supports Flash FLV and F4V formatted video files.

If you have the Scene7 Enterprise Unlimited version or the eVideo Streaming add-on can, you can upload AVI, MOV,

MP4, WMV, or 3GPP files and transcode them to FLV or F4V files. You can transcode video files by selecting an encoding preset from the Encoding Preset menu while uploading the file.

Video Sets do not support video files with names containing any of the following characters: ( ) { }.

Important: Video files take time to download from Scene7 video servers; they are not cached. For that reason, make sure that your video files aren’t especially large. Large videos take too long to start playing.

More Help topics

“ Uploading files ” on page 35

Creating a Video Set

You can create Video Sets using any Flash-formatted video files, except for Video Recuts. By default, the initial thumbnail for each video is the first frame of the video. However, you can specify an image as the thumbnail that represents the video in the Video Viewer.

You can add a hyperlink to a video or image so that when users click the video or image, a separate website opens.

Hyperlinks are only available when the video or image is viewed using the Carousel Viewer or Grid Viewer.

Create a Video Set

1

From the Browse window, click Build and choose Video Set.

2

Drag a video or image from the Asset Library to the Video Set screen to add it to the set.

3

To add a custom thumbnail to represent a video in the Viewer, drag an image file from the Asset Library to the

Placeholder box.

4

(Optional) Type or paste a URL for the image or video in the URL box. When the user clicks the image or video this URL opens.

5

Click Preview to preview the set in the Video Set Viewer.

6

Click Save, select a folder and name for the set, and click Submit.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Video Sets

Edit a Video Set

1

Display the Video set in Detail view, and click Edit.

2

Do any of the following:

• To delete an image or video, select it and click Delete.

To reorder videos and images, drag them to new locations.

• To change a custom thumbnail, drag a new thumbnail over the existing one.

Setting up Video Set Viewer Presets

Video Set Viewer Presets determine the style, behavior, and look of your viewers. Scene7 comes with default Video Set

Viewer Presets; if you are an administrator, you can create your own Video Set Viewer Presets as well.

In the Video Set Viewer, you can choose to include all or some community features. The Embed feature adds a link to the viewer that users can click to copy the HTML code required to display the viewer in an external page (such as a blog, website, or social networking site). The Link feature provides the URL to the viewer, so users can link back to this viewer. The Visit feature provides a link to the website you specify.

More Help topics

“ Creating and editing Viewer Presets ” on page 20

“ Previewing assets ” on page 52

Types of Video Set Viewers

You can choose between three types of viewers for Video Sets: Video Set, Grid, or Carousel. If you’ve added hyperlinks to your videos, use either the Grid or Carousel Viewer. To add community buttons (Embed, Link, and Visit), use any of the viewers.

156

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Video Sets

A

B

C

You can choose from three Viewer types for displaying Video Sets

A. Video Set B. Grid C. Carousel

Video Set

Displays video thumbnails in a standard video viewer. Users can click different buttons, such as Play, Pause, or Rewind to move through the video. In addition, they can move the toggle on the timeline.

Grid

Displays video thumbnails in a grid pattern. As users move the curser over a thumbnail, the associated video automatically plays. You can specify the number of rows and columns, AutoPlay settings, colors, and various other options.

Carousel

Displays a row of video thumbnails, and automatically plays the center thumbnail. Users can click arrows to move the videos or click directly on a video thumbnail. You can specify the number of thumbnails that appear at one time, AutoPlay settings, colors, and various other options.

Set up a Video Set Viewer preset

1

Choose Setup > Viewer Presets.

2

Do one of the following:

To create a new preset, click Add and choose Video Set Viewer.

• To edit an existing preset, expand Video Set Viewer, select the preset you want to edit, and click Edit.

3

Type a name in the Preset Name box. Choose options in the Video Set Viewer screen.

4

From the Videos menu, choose the size of videos included in the set.

Last updated 5/21/2010

157

USING SCENE7

Video Sets

5

Specify size and color options as desired.

6

To add a customized logo to the viewer, specify the Logo Image and Logo Position.

The Logo2 Style option is for the link to Scene7. Standard displays the “Powered by Scene7” logo, and Brief displays a simplified “Info” button.

7

To add community features (Embed, Link, Visit) to the viewer, specify options for any of the following:

Embed

Click Enabled. In the Embed Button Label box, type the name you want displayed in the viewer for the

Embed Button. If desired, click Browse to locate and select a custom skin for the button.

Link

Click Enabled. In the Link Button Label box, type the name you want displayed in the viewer for the Link

Button. If desired, click Browse to locate and select a custom skin for the button.

Visit

Click Enabled. In the Visit Button Label box, type the name you want displayed in the viewer for the Visit

Button. In the Visit URL box, type the URL to the website that you want to open when the link is clicked.

Note: Custom skins are available for Enterprise users only.

8

Specify tooltip names as desired.

9

Click Save or Save As.

Set up a Grid or Carousel Viewer preset

1

Choose Setup > Viewer Presets.

2

Do one of the following:

To create a new preset, click Add and choose Grid or Carousel.

• To edit an existing preset, expand Grid or Carousel, select the preset you want to edit, and click Edit.

3

Type a name in the Preset Name box. Choose options in the Configure Viewer screen.

4

Do one of the following:

For a Grid viewer, specify the number of rows and columns that you want to use to display the video thumbnails.

• For a Carousel viewer, specify the number of video thumbnails that you want to appear across the screen at one time.

5

For AutoPlay, specify whether you want the videos to play randomly, or in sequential order. Off specifies that videos play only when clicked.

6

To add community features (Embed, Link, Visit) to the viewer, specify options for any of the following:

Embed

Click Enabled. In the Embed Button Label box, type the name you want displayed in the viewer for the

Embed Button. If desired, click Browse to locate and select a custom skin for the button.

Link

Click Enabled. In the Link Button Label box, type the name you want displayed in the viewer for the Link

Button. If desired, click Browse to locate and select a custom skin for the button.

Visit

Click Enabled. In the Visit Button Label box, type the name you want displayed in the viewer for the Visit

Button. In the Visit URL box, type the URL to the website that you want to open when the link is clicked.

Note: Custom skins are available for Enterprise users only.

7

Specify other options as desired. To see a description of an option, click the Info Tip icon adjacent to the option.

The preview screen displays the viewer as you update and change settings.

8

Click Save or Save As.

158

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Video Sets

Make a preset the default for all Video Sets

On the Viewer Presets Setup screen, select the preset and click Make Default.

Preview a Video Set preset using your videos

On the Viewer Presets Setup screen, click Browse, select the videos you want to preview in the viewer, and click OK.

Delete a preset

Select the preset on the Viewer Presets Setup screen and click Delete.

159

Link a Video Set to a web page

After you publish a Video Set, you can obtain its URL for use in your website or application. Then you can deploy the

URL as necessary so users can view the Video Set on your website or application.

More Help topics

“ Previewing assets ” on page 52

“ Publishing ” on page 41

Obtain a Video Set URL

1

Select the Video Set in the Browse Panel, and click the Preview button.

2

Choose a Video Set Viewer Preset from the Presets menu and click the Copy URL button.

Add Video Set URLs to your web page

The most common way to deploy Video Sets is to place a link (via a navigation icon) on your web page. When clicked, the link launches a dynamic page (ASP or JSP) that displays the Video Set in a Video Set Viewer window.

Last updated 5/21/2010

Chapter 17: Mixed Media Sets

Scene7 Mixed Media Sets (for Enterprise users only) give users an integrated viewing experience. Mixed Media Sets can include images, Image Sets, Swatch Sets, Spin Sets, and videos. Users can click different tabs within the Mixed

Media Viewer to see the items in the different viewers. If no tabs are specified, all assets are displayed together in the swatch row.

Mixed Media Set Viewer Presets include community options for end-users to embed code, copy URLs, and link to the main website. Users can use these options to share information about products on their personal websites or social networking sites.

Quick Start: Mixed Media Sets

This Mixed Media Sets Quick Start is designed to help you get up and running quickly with Mixed Media Set techniques in Scene7.

1.

Uploading the images, swatch files, and videos

Start by uploading the images, swatch files, and videos for your Mixed Media Sets. Because users can zoom on images in the Mixed Media Set Viewer, take zooming into account when you choose images. Make sure that the images are least 2000 pixels in the largest dimension.

Click Upload on the Global Navigation bar to upload files from your computer to a folder on the Scene7 Publishing

System. See “ Uploading your files ” on page 38.

2.

Creating media sets for use within the Mixed Media Set

You can add images, Image Sets, Swatch Sets, Spin Sets, and videos to your Mixed Media set. Prepare the media sets before you add them to the Mixed Media Set.

See “ Creating an Image Set

” on page 92, “ Creating a Swatch Set

” on page 97, and “ Creating a Spin Set ” on page 102.

3.

Creating a Mixed Media Set

Click the Build button and choose Mixed Media Sets. Drag the images, Swatch Sets, Image Sets, and videos onto the

Mixed Media Set screen. To add a sound track, drag an audio file to the Soundtrack box.

See “ Creating a Mixed Media Set ” on page 161.

4.

Setting up Mixed Media viewer presets

Scene7 comes with default viewer presets for Mixed Media Sets. Administrators can create or modify Mixed Media Set viewer presets.

When setting up a Mixed Media Set viewer preset, you need to add the viewer presets for all of the other assets in your set. For example, if your Mixed Media Set includes videos you need to add a video viewer preset to the Mixed Media

Set viewer preset. You can also add a soundtrack to the viewer. This soundtrack plays while the viewer is open, but does not play when a video is active.

See “ Setting up a Mixed Media Set Viewer Preset

” on page 162 and “ Creating and editing Viewer Presets ” on page 20.

160

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Mixed Media Sets

5.

Previewing a Mixed Media Set

Select the Mixed Media Set in the Browse Panel and click Preview. The Mixed Media Set appears. You can click the thumbnail and swatch icons to examine your Mixed Media Set in the Mixed Media Set Viewer. You can choose different Viewers from the Presets menu.

See “ Previewing assets ” on page 52.

6.

Publishing a Mixed Media Set

Publishing an Mixed Media Set places it on Scene7 servers and activates the URL string.

Click the Mark For Publish icon to the left of its name in the Browse Panel, and then click Publish. On the Publish screen, click Start Publish.

See “ Publishing ” on page 41.

7.

Linking a Mixed Media Set to a web page

Scene7 activates URL calls for Mixed Media Sets after you publish them. You can copy these URLs from the Preview screen.

Select the Mixed Media Set, and click Preview. In the Preview screen, select a Mixed Media Set Viewer Preset and click

the Copy URL button. See “ Link a Mixed Media Set to a web page ” on page 163.

161

Creating a Mixed Media Set

Create a Mixed Media Set when you want to combine multiple types of viewers in one presentation. Make sure your files, Image Sets, Swatch Sets, and Spin Sets are ready to publish before you add them to the Mixed Media Set.

A B C D

Viewing a Mixed Media Set

A. Image Set B. Spin Set C. Swatch Set D. Videos

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Mixed Media Sets

Create a Mixed Media Set

1

Click the Build button and choose Mixed Media Sets. The Mixed Media Sets screen opens.

2

Drag the videos, Image Sets, Spin Sets, and swatches from the Asset Library to the Mixed Media Set screen.

Note: Mixed Media Sets do not support assets with filenames that contain any of the following characters: ( ) { }.

3

To add a soundtrack, drag an audio file from the Asset Library to the Soundtrack box. The soundtrack plays while images are displayed. It stops when video is played.

4

To change the order of sets, drag them to new locations on the Mixed Media Set screen. The order of sets on the screen determines the left-to-right order in which users see sets in the Mixed Media Set Viewer.

5

Click Save, select a folder for storing your Mixed Media Set, enter a name for the set, and click Submit.

You can select the Preview button to see what your combo Image Set looks like in an Image Set Viewer.

Edit a Mixed Media Set

You can edit a Mixed Media Set. If you want to edit a set within a Mixed Media Set, open that set separately, edit and save it. The edits appear in the Mixed Media set.

1

Display it in the Browse Panel in Detail view and click Edit.

2

Do any of the following:

• To remove items, select them and click Delete.

To reorder items, drag them to new locations.

3

Click Save or Save As.

162

Setting up a Mixed Media Set Viewer Preset

Mixed Media Set Viewer Presets determine the style, behavior, and look of your main viewer. When configuring a preset, you specify which other viewers you want to appear inside the Mixed Media Viewer. For example, if you’ve included an Image Set in your Mixed Media Set, specify an Image Set Viewer Preset for the Mixed Media Set Viewer.

You can choose to include all or some community features in the Mixed Media Set Viewer. The Embed feature adds a link to the viewer that lets users copy the code required to display the viewer in an external page (such as a blog, website, or social networking site). The Link feature provides the URL to the viewer, so users can link back to this viewer. The Visit feature provides a link to the website you specify.

1

Click Setup > Viewer Presets.

The Viewer Presets window opens.

2

Do one of the following:

To create a new preset, click Add and choose Mixed Media Set Viewer.

• To edit an existing Mixed Media Set Viewer preset, select the preset and click Edit.

The Configure Viewer screen opens.

3

Type a name in the Preset Name box for the Mixed Media Set Viewer preset.

4

Specify Tabs or No Tabs. Tabs separate items by type, such as videos, swatches, and spin sets. When you specify no tabs, all items appear in a row under the preview window.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Mixed Media Sets

5

In the Name box, type a name for the viewer you want to add.

For example, if you’re adding a Swatch Set to your Mixed Media Set, type Swatch Set A.

6

From the Viewer menu, choose the type of asset you want to view, such as Swatch Sets.

7

From the Preset menu, choose a preset for the chosen asset type.

For example, if you’re adding a Swatch Set, choose SwatchSet1-Colors.

8

Click Add.

The new Viewer preset appears in the list box.

9

Repeat steps 6 - 9 for all the Viewer presets you want to add.

10

To edit the preset list, do any of the following:

• To delete a preset from the list, select it and click Delete.

To reorder presets in the list, select a preset and click the blue Up or Down arrow.

11

To add community features (Embed, Link, Visit) to the viewer, specify options for any of the following:

Email

Click On to enable an Email button in the viewer. When users click the Email button while viewing the set, an email containing the link to the set opens.

Embed

Click Enabled. In the Embed Button Label box, type the name you want displayed in the viewer for the

Embed Button. If desired, click Browse to locate and select a custom skin for the button.

Link

Click Enabled. In the Link Button Label box, type the name you want displayed in the viewer for the Link

Button. If desired, click Browse to locate and select a custom skin for the button.

Visit

Click Enabled. In the Visit Button Label box, type the name you want displayed in the viewer for the Visit

Button. In the Visit URL box, type the URL to the website that you want to open when the link is clicked.

Note: Custom skins are available for Enterprise users only.

12

Specify other options as desired. To see a description of an option, click the Info Tip icon adjacent to the option.

The preview screen displays the viewer as you update and change settings.

13

Click Save.

More Help topics

“ Creating and editing Viewer Presets ” on page 20

163

Link a Mixed Media Set to a web page

After you publish a Mixed Media Set, you can obtain its URL for use in your website or application. Then you can deploy the URL as necessary so users can view the Mixed Media Set on your website or application.

More Help topics

“ Previewing assets ” on page 52

“ Publishing ” on page 41

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Mixed Media Sets

Obtain a Mixed Media Set URL

1

Select the Mixed Media Set in the Browse Panel, and click the Preview button.

2

Choose a Mixed Media Set Viewer Preset from the Presets menu and click the Copy URL button.

Add Mixed Media Set URLs to your web page

The most common way to deploy Mixed Media Sets is to place a link (via a navigation icon) on your web page. When clicked, the link launches a dynamic page (ASP or JSP) that displays the Mixed Media Set in Mixed Media Set Viewer.

164

Last updated 5/21/2010

Chapter 18: Master files

Master files are files you use to create rich-media assets in Scene7. These files include images, PDF files (for creating eCatalogs), and AI, ID, and PSD files (for creating web-to-print templates). Scene7 also supports SWF files for use as

skins in the different viewer presets—the Zoom Viewer, eCatalog Viewer, and other viewers.

The Scene7 Publishing System offers tools for editing images. Starting in the Browse Panel in Detail view, you can create Image Maps and zoom targets for images. You can also crop, sharpen, and adjust images.

Editing images

The Scene7 Publishing System offers many tools for creating rich-media effects. These tools are available in the Browse

Panel in Detail view. Display an image in Detail view to start doing these image-editing tasks in Scene7:

Create Image Maps

Select the Image Map button to create an Image Map, a hotspot on an image (or eCatalog

page) that displays rollover text. Users can click an Image Map, for example, to launch a new web page. See “ Creating

Image Maps ” on page 165.

Create Zoom targets

Select the Zoom Targets button to create thumbnail targets. Users can click a thumbnail

target in the Zoom Viewer to zoom directly to a particular part of an image. See “ Creating zoom targets for Guided

Zoom ” on page 73.

Crop an image

Select the Crop button

to crop an image. See “ Cropping an image ” on page 170.

Sharpen an image

Select the Sharpen button

distinct. See “ Sharpening an image ” on page 171.

to sharpen an image and make its outlines less blurry and more

Adjust an image

Select the Adjust button

“ Adjusting an image ” on page 172.

to flip, rotate, blur, colorize, or alter the color balance of an image. See

Edit layers

Click the Layers tab to display individual, editable layers in a PSD file. When you upload a PSD file, all layers are uploaded individually as separate files so that you can edit them within Scene7.

As well as using these tools to edit images, you can edit images as you upload them to the Scene7 Publishing System.

For example, you can crop images, create a mask from a clipping path, and select a color profile for an image as you upload it.

Creating Image Maps

An Image Map is a region on an image or eCatalog page that displays a rollover panel with text. When the user clicks an Image Map, an action of some kind is triggered. For example, a web page is launched so that the user can learn more about a product. To call attention to Image Maps, an outline appears around an Image Map when the user moves the pointer over it.

You can create an image map in the Detail view of Scene7, or you can create them while designing your catalog in either

Acrobat or InDesign.

165

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Master files

To create an Image Map in Scene7, start by displaying the image in the Browse Panel in Detail view and click the Image

Map button . If you are working with an eCatalog page, open the Map Pages tab of the eCatalog screen. The screen offers many commands for handling Image Maps. You can do any of the following:

• Enter rollover text.

Enter JavaScript and URLs for launching web pages.

• Create URL templates for Image Maps.

Copy Image Maps to other images (or eCatalog pages).

• Define other actions as determined by the World Wide Web Consortium.

Preview Image Maps.

Drawing and adjusting an Image Map

1

Do one of the following:

• If you are working with an image, open it in Detail view and click the Image Map button screen opens.

. The Map Editor

• If you are working with an eCatalog, open it in Detail view, then click Edit, and then click the Map Pages tab.

166

Create Image Maps on the Map Editor screen.

2

Draw a rectangular or polygonal (many-sided) Image Map:

Rectangular map

Select the Rectangle Image Map tool and drag on the page to create the rectangle.

Polygonal map

Select the Polygon Image Map tool and click points on the perimeter of the area of the image you want to enclose.

3

Enter a name for the Image Map, if desired, in the Image Map list. After you draw an Image Map, Scene7 assigns it a name. To create the name, Scene7 appends a sequential number to the name of the image or eCatalog page you are working with. You can enter a name of your choice.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Master files

4

If you want users to open a new web page when they click the Image Map, enter the URL in the Image Map list. See

also “ Using a template to enter JavaScript and URLs ” on page 168.

5

If you want to display rollover text when users move the pointer over your Image Map, enter the text in the Image

Map list. In the Image Map list, select the Show menu and choose Rollover Text. Then enter the text you want users to see onscreen. You can write the text in a word processor and copy it into the Rollover Text field.

6

If you want another action effect to occur when users move the mouse over an Image Map, define the action. Select the Show menu and choose Other Actions. Then enter the attributes of the action. (Select the Show menu and

choose Both to create rollover text and an action for an Image Map.) See also “ Defining other actions for Image

Maps ” on page 169.

7

Select the Save button.

You can preview Image Maps by selecting the Preview button.

To delete an Image Map, select its name in the Image Map list and select the Delete button. To temporarily remove an

Image Map from an image or eCatalog page without deleting it, deselect the appropriate On option in the Image Map list.

To edit an Image Map, display the image in Detail view and select the Image Map button opens so you can edit your Image Map.

. The Map Editor screen

Adjusting the position, shape, and size of Image Maps

To change the position, shape, and size of an Image Map, select the Image Map button and follow these instructions:

. Then select the Pan tool

Changing position

Move the pointer near to but not over the border of the Image Map. When you see the four-headed arrow icon, drag the map to a new location.

Changing the size and shape

How you change the shape and size of an Image Map depends on whether you are working with a rectangular or polygonal Image Map:

Rectangular Image Map

Move the pointer over a side or corner of the Image Map. When you see the doubleheaded arrow icon, start dragging. Dragging a corner changes the size of a map but not its proportions. Dragging a side changes the size and proportions.

Polygonal Image map

Map and start dragging.

Drag a square selection handle. To create a selection handle, click the border of the Image

You can drag the Size slider at the bottom of the screen to change views and get a better look at your Image Map.

167

Handling overlapping Image Maps

If your image (or eCatalog page) includes more than one Image Map and the maps overlap, you can determine how maps overlap. To do so, change the order of maps on the Image Map list. Drag their names higher or lower on the list.

How high a name is on the list determines whether its Image Map overlaps other Image Maps.

Copying Image Maps to other images

You can copy Image Maps from one image (or eCatalog page) to another. Copy Image Maps to get a head start creating them. You can also copy Image Maps to re-create them in images or pages that share the same layout or mapping structure. To copy all the Image Maps from one image or eCatalog page to another:

1

Display the image or eCatalog page you want to copy.

2

Select the Copy Maps To button. The Select Images screen opens.

3

Select the images (or eCatalog pages) you want to copy the Image Maps to.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Master files

4

Select the Select button.

Using a template to enter JavaScript and URLs

You can define a URL template (also known as an Href template) to make entering Image Map URLs easier and more efficient. Define a URL template if most of your Image Map URLs share a common, fixed format. By entering the portion of the URL that is fixed as the URL template, you don’t have to enter this portion of the URL each time you create an Image Map. Your URL Template can also contain JavaScript commands, pathnames, and parameters. By default, the URL template contains a proprietary Scene7 JavaScript handler called loadProduct

that opens the image in a new window.

About URL templates

The URL template works by substituting the contents of the URL column in the Image Map list with the double dollar signs (‘$$’) in the template:

Javascript:loadProduct('$$');void(0);

You place all of the values that do not change between Image Maps in the URL template. Add only the values that do change in the URL column in the Image Map list. For example:

• URL template: j avascript:loadProduct('http://www.examplesitehere.com/$$');void(0);

URL value: product.htm

• Actual URL generated: javascript:loadProduct('http://www.examplesitehere.com/product.html);void(0);

By default, the URL template includes a proprietary Scene7 JavaScript handler called l oadProduct that opens a new window with the URL destination. However, you can use any JavaScript code to replace this JavaScript handler or use one of these Scene7 handlers:

• loadProductCW

: Displays the URL target specified in the URL column in the current window. This handler is primarily for eCatalogs that are integrated into a page within a website.

• loadProductPW

: Displays the URL target specified in the URL column in the parent window (the page that opened the current one). The current window remains open, but the parent window changes to display the URL target.

Creating a URL template

Follow these steps to create a URL template:

1

On the Map Editor screen (images) or the Map Pages tab of the eCatalog screen (eCatalogs), select the Edit button next to the URL Template option. The Edit Map Template dialog box opens.

2

Enter the JavaScript code and the complete URL (with the variable portion replaced by dollar signs [$$]). You can paste the code by right-clicking and choosing Paste.

3

Select the Save button.

Handling URL templates

The Map Editor page (images) and the Map Pages tab of the eCatalog screen (eCatalogs) offer these commands for handling URL templates:

URL Template option

Select the URL Template option to apply your URL template to all the Image Maps on an image or eCatalog page.

Template option

Deselect a Template option in the URL Image Map list if you do not want an individual Image Map to use the URL template.

Last updated 5/21/2010

168

USING SCENE7

Master files

Defining other actions for Image Maps

You can select the Show menu and choose Other Actions to trigger actions other than rollover text and web page launches. When the user moves the pointer over an Image Map, you can initiate an action. These actions are attributes defined for client-side Image Maps by World Wide Web Consortium HTML specifications. They include:

accesskey

Triggers an action when the user presses a designated key on the keyboard.

onfocus

Triggers an event when the Image Map receives focus—by the cursor, by tabbing, or by pressing an access key. For example, you can launch a web page when the Image Map receives focus and close it when your Image Map loses focus.

onblur

Triggers an event when the Image Map loses focus, either by the cursor or by tabbing.

To define an action for an Image Map:

1

On the Map Editor screen (images) or Map Pages tab of the eCatalog screen (eCatalogs), select the Show menu and choose Other Actions.

2

Using the syntax specified by the World Wide Web Consortium HTML specifications, add the supported attributes in the Other Actions column of the Image Map list.

3

Select the Save button.

Select the Show menu and choose Both if you want an Image Map to have rollover text as well as an action.

Creating Image Maps in Acrobat or InDesign

You can create Image Maps while designing your eCatalog in Acrobat or InDesign.

In InDesign or Acrobat, create hyperlink references where you want the Image Maps to appear, and specify URL locations for the image map. Selecting the Extract Links option when uploading the PDF file into Scene7 automatically converts the links to Image Maps.

For more information, see InDesign or Acrobat Help.

Create Image Maps in InDesign

1

In InDesign, choose Window > Interactive > Hyperlinks to open the Hyperlinks panel.

2

Select the text, frame, or graphic you want to make into an Image Map.

3

In the Hyperlinks panel, choose New Hyperlink from the panel menu.

4

In the New Hyperlink dialog box, choose URL from the Link To menu.

5

Type or paste the product ID in the URL box, and click OK. (Scene7 completes the URL using the Image Map URL template.)

Note: You do not need to set appearance options in InDesign. You can specify appearance in Scene7.

6

Repeat steps 2 through 5 for all the Image Maps you want to create.

7

Export the file as a PDF.

8

Upload the PDF to Scene7 and select Extract Links from the PDF Options.

Create Image Maps in Acrobat

1

In Acrobat, choose Tools > Advanced Editing > Link Tool.

2

Drag to create the Image Map. The Create Link box opens.

3

Select Custom Link, and click Next.

Last updated 5/21/2010

169

USING SCENE7

Master files

Note: You do not need to set appearance options in Acrobat. You can specify appearance in Scene7.

4

In the Link Properties box, click Actions.

5

Select Open A Web Link from the Select Action menu, and then click Add.

6

Type the product ID for the Image Map in the Edit URL box, and click OK. (Scene7 completes the URL using the image map URL template.)

7

Repeat steps 1 through 7 for all the Image Maps you want to create.

8

Save the file.

9

Upload the PDF to Scene7 and select Extract Links from the PDF Options.

170

Cropping an image

You can crop images in the Scene7 Publishing System. The system retains information about images that were cropped so you can restore them to their original state. You can also crop an image and save the cropped version under a new name.

You can crop an image to remove white space around it, or crop an area of the image.

Note: After you crop, you can click the Save As button and save a cropped version of the image under a different name.

In the Save As window, choose Save As New Master to save a second copy of the image. Choose Save As Addition View

Of Master to save the original and its cropped version under a different name. Choose Replace Original to delete the original file from which you cropped your image. Then enter a name for the image and select the Submit button.

More Help topics

“ Image editing options at upload ” on page 173

“ Cropping white space from a PDF file ” on page 175

“ Cropping from the sides of PDF pages ” on page 175

Crop to remove white space around an image

You can crop off the transparent or solid-color pixels from the edge of an image.

1

To crop an image, display it in the Browse Panel in Detail view, and select the Crop button screen opens.

2

Do one of the following:

. The Crop Editor

To trim color pixels, select the Trim menu and choose Color. The Auto Crop By Color dialog box appears. Select the Corner menu and choose a corner with the background color to crop away. Then enter a Tolerance setting from 0 through 1. The 0 setting crops pixels only if they exactly match the color you selected in the corner of the image. Numbers closer to 1 allow for more color difference. Select the Crop button.

To trim transparent pixels, select the Trim menu and choose Transparent. The Auto Crop By Transparency dialog box appears. Enter a tolerance setting from 0 through 1. The 0 setting crops crop pixels only if they are totally transparent. Numbers closer to 1 allow for more transparency. Select the Crop button.

3

Click Save.

Note: To restore an image to its original state after you’ve cropped it, display the image in the Crop Editor screen and select the Reset button.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Master files

Select an area to crop

1

To crop an image, display it in the Browse Panel in Detail view, and select the Crop button screen opens.

. The Crop Editor

2

Place the part of the image you don’t want to crop in the crop box. What appears inside the box remains when you select the Save button and crop the image.

3

To adjust the crop area, do one of the following:

• Drag a side corner of the box.

Enter pixel measurements in the Size boxes.

• Drag to move the crop box. Move the pointer inside the boundary of the box. When you see the four-headed arrow, drag the box to a new location on the image.

4

Click Save.

Note: To restore an image to its original state after you’ve cropped it, display the image in the Crop Editor screen and select the Reset button.

171

Sharpening an image

Sharpening is an image-manipulation technique for making the outlines of a digital image look more distinct.

Sharpening increases the contrast between edge pixels and emphasizes the transition between dark and light areas.

Sharpening increases local contrast and brings out fine detail. There is no strict formula for correctly sharpening all images. Too little sharpening can make for a soft image, but over-sharpening adds halos, artifacts, and noise.

Important: The Sharpen commands override Image Preset settings, including their sharpening effects. An Image Preset governs the size and formatting with which images are delivered from Scene7 Image Servers. Scene7 highly recommends using Image Presets to deliver all images to make sure that images are delivered at a uniform size and sharpening. After the sharpening settings of an individual image have been changed, however, Image Preset sharpening settings no longer apply to the image. It is delivered without Image Preset sharpening settings.

To sharpen an image, open it in the Browse Panel in Detail view and select the Sharpen button

Editor screen opens with sharpening commands. Choose commands and select the Save button.

. The Sharpness

Before sharpening an image, you can select the Apply Preset menu and choose an Image Preset to see what its sharpening effects are. The sharpening effects of an Image Preset may be suitable for your image. The Apply Preset menu is located on the bottom of the Sharpness Editor screen.

Sharpening

Select the Sharpening menu and choose an option:

None

Disables sharpening.

Sharpen

Applies a basic sharpening filter. This filter can help compensate for blurriness.

Unsharp Mask

Choose these options to fine-tune sharpening:

Amount

Controls the amount of contrast applied to edge pixels. The default is 0.0. For high-resolution images, you can increase it to as high as 5.0. Think of Amount as a measure of filter intensity.

Radius

Determines the number of pixels surrounding the edge pixels that affect the sharpening. For highresolution images, enter from 1 through 2. A low value sharpens only the edge pixels. A high value sharpens a wider band of pixels. The correct value depends on the size of the image.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Master files

Threshold

Determines the range of contrast to ignore when the unsharp mask filter is applied. This option determines how different the sharpened pixels must be from the surrounding area before they are considered edge pixels and are sharpened. To avoid introducing noise, experiment with values between .02 and 0.2. The default value of 0 sharpens all pixels in the image.

Apply To

Choose Each Color to apply sharpening separately to each color component; choose Brightness to apply to sharpening to image brightness areas.

Resampling

Select the Resampling menu and choose an option. These options sharpen the image when it is downsampled:

None

Turns off resampling.

Bilinear

The fastest resampling method; some aliasing artifacts are noticeable.

Bicubic

Increases CPU usage on the Image Server, but yields sharper images with less noticeable aliasing artifacts.

Sharpen2

May produce slightly sharper results than the Bicubic option, but at even higher CPU cost on the Image

Server.

Trilinear

Uses both higher and lower resolutions if available; recommended only when aliasing is an issue. This method reduces JPEG size due to reduced high-frequency data.

JPG Quality

The JPG Quality options control the JPG compression level:

JPG Quality

Select this option if you want to control compression levels and chrominance downsampling.

Slider

Determines the JPG compression level. This setting affects both file size and image quality. The JPG quality scale is 1–100.

Enable JPG Chrominance Downsampling

Because the eye is less sensitive to high-frequency color information than high-frequency luminance, JPEG images divide image information into luminance and color components. When a

JPEG image is compressed, the luminance component is left at full resolution, while the color components are downsampled by averaging together groups of pixels. Downsampling reduces the data volume by one half or one third with almost no impact on perceived quality. Downsampling is not applicable to grayscale images. This technique reduces the amount of compression useful for images with high contrast (for example, images with overlaid text).

172

Adjusting an image

Scene7 offers various commands for adjusting the appearance of an image or a layer in a PSD file. You can flip, rotate, blur, alter the color balance, and colorize an image. As you experiment with these commands, you can see their effects on the image you are working with.

1

In the Browse Panel, double-click the image to open it in Detail view.

2

If you are working with a PSD file, click the Layers panel to open it and select the layer you want to edit. To move from layer to layer, click the arrows under the preview window.

3

4

Click the Adjust button .

Under the preview window, select a size and viewer for the image.

5

Use the commands on the right side of the Adjust Editor window to adjust the image:

• Use the Blur slider or its corresponding box to blur an image. The higher the value, the more blurry the image becomes.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Master files

• Use the Flip options to flip an image horizontally or vertically.

Use the Rotate slider to rotate the image. You can enter values in the Rotate field to rotate an image. Positive values rotate it clockwise; negative values rotate it counterclockwise.

Use the Contrast, Brightness, Saturation, Hue, and Color Balance options to adjust the color and brightness.

These effects are cumulative. For example, changes to the Magenta/Green settings are added to changes made to the Hue settings.

Use the Colorize options to colorize an image while preserving shadows and highlights. Changes to the Colorize options are also cumulative. Choose the Brightness menu and choose No Compensation to disable automatic brightness compensation. Set the contrast value to 0 to preserve the contrast range of the original image, or specify a contrast range with a value greater than 0. A value of 100 maximizes the contrast. Typical values are in the 30–70 range.

6

Click Save or Save As.

173

Image editing options at upload

When uploading image files, including AI, EPS, and PSD files, you can take the following editing actions:

Crop white space from the edge of images.

• Crop from the sides of images.

Create a mask from a clipping path.

• Choose a color profile.

These options are located on the Upload screen under Image Editing Options.

Cropping white space from images

To automatically crop white-space pixels from an image, select the Crop menu and choose Trim. Then choose these options:

Trim Away Based On

Choose whether to crop based on color or transparency:

Color

Choose the Color option. Then select the Corner menu and choose the corner of the image with the color that best represents the white-space color you want to crop.

Transparency

Choose the Transparency option.

Tolerance

Drag the slider to specify a tolerance from 0 through 1:

Trimming based on color

Specify 0 to crop pixels only if they exactly match the color you selected in the corner of the image. Numbers closer to 1 allow for more color difference.

Trimming based on transparency

Specify 0 to crop pixels only if they are totally transparent; numbers closer to 1 allow for more transparency.

Cropping from the sides of images

To manually crop from the sides of an image, select the Crop menu and choose Manual. Then enter the number of pixels to crop from any side or each side of the image. How much of the image is cropped depends on the ppi (pixels per inch) setting in the image file. For example, if the image displays 150 ppi and you enter 75 in the Top, Right,

Bottom, and Left text boxes, a half-inch is cropped from each side.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Master files

Creating a mask from a clipping path

Select the Create Mask From Clipping path option to create a mask for the image based on its clipping path information. This option applies to images created with image-editing applications in which a clipping path was created.

Selecting a color profile

Choose a Color Profile option to select a color space for the image:

Convert To SRGB

Converts to SRGB (Standard Red Green Blue). SRGB is the recommended color space for displaying images on web pages.

Keep Original Color Space

Retains the original color space.

Custom From > To

Opens menus so you can choose a Convert From and Convert To color space. You can choose a

standard Photoshop color space or a color space you uploaded to SPS. See “ ICC profiles ” on page 181.

More Help topics

“ Cropping an image ” on page 170

174

Working with PDFs

PDF (Portable Document Format) files are most often used in Scene7 to create eCatalogs. When you upload a PDF file, Scene7 rasterizes, or rips, the pages by default so that the pages can be used to build rich media.

PDF upload options

When you upload a PDF file, you can format it in various ways. You crop its pages, extract search words, enter a pixelsper-inch resolution, and choose a color space. PDF files often contain a trim margin, crop marks, registration marks, and other printer’s marks. You can crop these marks from the sides of pages as you upload a PDF file.

Options for uploading PDF files are located on the Upload screen under PDF Options.

Processing

The Processing options are as follows:

Rasterize

Rips the pages in the PDF file and converts vector graphics to bitmap images. Choose this option to create an eCatalog. (This option is the default.)

Extract Search Words

Extracts words from the PDF file so that the file can be searched by keyword in an eCatalog

Viewer.

Extract Links

Extracts links from the PDF files and coverts them to Image Maps that are used in an eCatalog Viewer.

Auto-Generate eCatalog With Multiple Page PDF

Automatically creates an eCatalog from the PDF file. The eCatalog is named after the PDF file you uploaded. (This option is only available if you rasterize the PDF file as you upload it.)

Resolution

Determines the resolution setting. This setting determines how many pixels are displayed per inch in the PDF file. The default is 150.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Master files

Color Space

Select the Color Space menu and choose a color space for the PDF file. Most PDF files have both RGB and CMYK color images. The RGB color space is preferable for online viewing.

Detect Automatically

Retains the color space of the PDF file.

Force As RGB

Converts to the RGB color space.

Force As CMYK

Converts to the CMYK color space.

Force As Grayscale

Converts to the Grayscale color space.

Color Profile

Choose a Color Profile option:

Convert To SRGB

Converts to SRGB (Standard Red Green Blue). SRGB is the recommended color space for displaying images on web pages.

Keep Original Color Space

Retains the original color space.

Custom From > To

Opens menus so you can choose a Convert From and Convert To color space. You can choose a

standard Photoshop color space or a color space you uploaded to SPS. See “ ICC profiles ” on page 181.

Cropping white space from a PDF file

1

To automatically crop white-space pixels from a PDF file as you upload it, select the Crop menu and choose Trim.

2

Specify the following options:

Trim Away Based On

Choose whether to crop based on color or transparency:

Color

Choose the Color option. Then select the Corner menu and choose the corner of the PDF with the color that best represents the white-space color you want to crop.

Transparency

Choose the Transparency option.

Tolerance

Drag the slider to specify a tolerance from 0 through 1:

Trimming based on color

Specify 0 to crop pixels only if they exactly match the color you selected in the corner of the PDF. Numbers closer to 1 allow for more color difference.

Trimming based on transparency

Specify 0 to crop pixels only if they are totally transparent; numbers closer to

1 allow for more transparency.

Cropping from the sides of PDF pages

You can manually remove printer’s marks from the sides of the pages in a PDF file as you upload it.

1

Select the Crop menu and choose Manual.

2

Enter pixel settings in the Top, Right, Bottom, and Left text boxes to crop from the top, bottom, and sides of pages.

How much of the page is cropped depends on the Resolution PX/Inch setting you enter for the PDF file. For example, if you enter 150 (the default) as the Resolution PX/Inch setting and you crop 75 pixels from the sides of pages, a halfinch is cropped because, at 150 pixels per inch, 75 pixels equals a half-inch.

175

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Master files

Working with PSD files

PSD (Photoshop Document files) are most often used in Scene7 to create templates. When you upload a PSD file, you can create a Scene7 template automatically from the file (select the Create Template option on the Upload screen).

SPS creates multiple images from a PSD file with layers if you use the file to create a template; it creates one image for each layer.

PSD upload options

Options for uploading PSD files are located on the Upload screen under Photoshop Options. You can crop a file, choose a color profile for it, use it to create a template, and select an anchor.

These options are available when uploading PSD files:

Crop

Choose Trim to automatically crop white space from the edges of a PSD file; choose Manual to crop sides of the

PSD file:

Trim

Select the Trim Away Based On menu and choose Color or Transparency.

If you choose the Color option, select the Corner menu and choose the corner of the PSD with the color that best represents the white-space color you want to crop.

Drag the slider to specify a tolerance from 0 through 1:

To trim based on color, specify 0 to crop pixels only if they exactly match the color you selected in the corner of the

PSD. Numbers closer to 1 allow for more color difference.

To trim based on transparency, specify 0 to crop pixels only if they are totally transparent; numbers closer to 1 allow for more transparency.

Manual

Enter the number of pixels to crop from any side or each side of the image. How much of the image is cropped depends on the ppi (pixels per inch) setting in the image file. For example, if the image displays 150 ppi and you enter 75 in the Top, Right, Bottom, and Left text boxes, a half-inch is cropped from each side of the image.

Color Profile

Choose an option:

Convert To SRGB (default)

Converts to SRGB (Standard Red Green Blue). SRGB is the recommended color space for displaying images on web pages.

Keep Original Color Space

Retains the original color space of the image.

Custom From > To

Opens menus so you can choose a Convert From and Convert To color space. You can choose

a standard Photoshop color space or a color space you uploaded to SPS. See “ ICC profiles ” on page 181.

Maintain Layers

Rips the layers in the PSD, if any, into individual assets. The asset layers remain associated with the

PSD. You can view them by opening the PSD file in Detail view and selecting Assets Extracted from This PSD in the

panel. See “ Viewing and editing layers in a PSD file ” on page 177.

Create Template

Creates a template from the layers in the PSD file.

Extract Text

Extracts the text so that users can search for text in a Viewer.

Extend Layers To Background Size

Extends the size of ripped image layers to the size of the background layer.

Convert Photoshop File Into FXG

converts the file into an FXG file for Template Publishing. Using Template

Publishing lets you make different objects in the file variable. The FXG format is optimal for outputting in multiple

ways, from web to print. (See “ Template Publishing ” on page 118.)

176

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Master files

Layer Naming

Layers in the PSD file are uploaded as separate images. Choose an option to name these images in the

Scene7 Publishing System:

Layer Name

Names the images after their layer names in the PSD file. For example, a layer named Price Tag in the original PSD file becomes an image named Price Tag. However, if the layer names in the PSD file are default Photoshop layer names (Background, Layer 1, Layer 2, and so on), the images are named after their layer numbers in the PSD file, not their default layer names.

Photoshop and Layer Number

Names the images after their layer numbers in the PSD file, ignoring original layer names. Images are named with the Photoshop filename and an appended layer number. For example, the second layer of a file called Spring Ad.psd is named Spring Ad_2 even if it had a non-default name in Photoshop.

Photoshop and Layer Name

Names the images after the PSD file followed by the layer name or layer number. The layer number is used if the layer names in the PSD file are default Photoshop layer names. For example, a layer named

Price Tag in a PSD file named SpringAd is named Spring Ad_Price Tag. A layer with the default name Layer 2 is called

Spring Ad_2.

Separate Folders with Layer Name

Creates a folder named after the PSD file and places the images into the folder.

Images are named after their layer names or layer numbers, depending on whether they have default Photoshop layer names (image naming is the same as the Photoshop and Layer Name option). For example, layers in a PSD file named

SpringAd are placed in the SpringAd folder.

Anchor

Specify how images are anchored in templates that are generated from the layered composition produced from the PSD file. By default, the anchor is the center. A center anchor allows replacement images to best fill the same space, no matter the aspect ratio of the replacement image. Images with a different aspect that replace this image, when referencing the template and using parameter substitution, effectively occupy the same space. Change to a different setting if your application requires the replacement images to fill the allocated space in the template.

Viewing and editing layers in a PSD file

If you selected the Maintain Layers option when you uploaded your PSD, Scene7 ripped the individual layers into assets. You can view and edit the asset layers belonging to a PSD file by opening the file in the Browse Panel in Detail view.

1

Double-click the full PSD file in the Browse Panel to open it in Detail view.

Note: Make sure that you open the full asset and not one of the PSD layers.

2

Click Layers to open the Layers panel. All the layers appear as separate images in the Layers panel.

3

Double-click a layer to open it and do any of the following:

Click the Image Map icon to create an image map on the layer. (See “ Creating Image Maps ” on page 165.)

Click the Zoom Targets icon to create zoom targets on the layer. (See “ Creating zoom targets for Guided Zoom ” on page 73.)

Click the Crop icon to crop the layer. (See “ Cropping an image ” on page 170.)

Click Sharpen to sharpen the layer. (See “ Sharpening an image ” on page 171.)

Click the Adjust to adjust the layer. (See “ Adjusting an image ” on page 172.)

4

Click Save or Save As.

5

To view or edit a different layer, click an arrow at the bottom of the layer preview.

6

To exit the layer Detail view, click the Grid view icon.

177

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Master files

Working with PostScript and Illustrator files

You can use Adobe® PostScript® (EPS) and Adobe® Illustrator® (AI) files in the Scene7 Publishing System. Scene7 offers commands for configuring these files as you upload them.

When you upload PostScript (EPS) or Illustrator (AI) image files, you can format them in various ways. You can rasterize the files, convert them to FXG for Template Publishing, maintain the transparent background, choose a resolution, and choose a color space. Options for formatting PostScript and Illustrator files are available on the Upload screen under PostScript Options and Illustrator Options.

Processing

Choose Rasterize to convert vector graphics in the file to the bitmap format. Choose FXG if you want to

use the file for Template Publishing. (See “ Template Publishing ” on page 118.)

Maintain Transparent Background In Rendered Image

Maintains the background transparency of the file.

Resolution

Determines the resolution setting. This setting determines how many pixels are displayed per inch in the file.

Color Space

Select the Color Space menu and choose a color space:

Detect Automatically

Retains the color space of the file.

Force As RGB

Converts to the RGB color space.

Force As CMYK

Converts to the CMYK color space.

Force aA Grayscale

Converts to the Grayscale color space.

178

Working with vignette, window covering, and cabinet files

Users of the Scene7 Image Authoring tool can use vignettes (VNT files), window coverings (VNW files), and cabinets

(VNC files) in Scene 7. These files cannot be created or edited in the Scene7 Publishing System.

Vignettes, window coverings, and cabinets are authored images. Using a different Scene7 program called Image

Authoring, you mask objects in an image so users can see the same image in a variety of textures or colors. For example, users see a couch upholstered with a variety of fabrics, a window decorated with a variety of window treatments, or a cabinet finished with different types of wood.

Upload vignettes, window covering, and cabinets as you would any other file.

Working with Viewer SWF files

In the Scene7 Publishing System, SWF files are used as user-interface skins for the different Viewers. They provide the user interface for the Zoom Viewer, Video Set Viewer, eCatalog Viewer, Mixed Media Viewer, Spin Viewer, Image Set

Viewer, and Video Viewer. When Enterprise users configure a viewer, they can choose a SWF skin for it. Viewer SWFs work in combination with the other viewer configuration settings to determine how a viewer looks and works.

As well as choosing a SWF file that determines the overall look of a viewer, Enterprise users can choose SWFs that do the following:

Display a loading animation when a viewer first appears.

• Determine the appearance of the Help topics available for the viewer.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Master files

• Play a waiting animation when a viewer is waiting for a response.

Note: The Scene7 Publishing System provides default SWFs for the loading animation and waiting animation. You can use these default SWFs or choose loading and waiting SWFs of your own. Unless you choose a Help button SWF for a viewer, the Help button is hidden by default.

Before you can choose SWFs for a viewer, upload the SWF files to SPS and publish the files.

More Help topics

“ Viewer Presets ” on page 19

179

Last updated 5/21/2010

Chapter 19: Support files

Support files are files that Scene7 uses to display fonts and convert image files from one color space to another. Support files also include XML, XSL, and ACO files, as well as various other types of files.

For a complete list of supported file formats, see “ Supported asset file formats ” on page 35.

ACO files

Adobe® Photoshop® ACO files are color panels consisting of multiple color swatches. In the Scene7 Publishing System,

ACO files are displayed in the Browse Panel with an icon showing the first four colors of the panel. In Detail view, all the colors in the panel are displayed.

Fonts

In some cases, the Scene7 Publishing System requires you to upload a font file to enter or render text in a particular font. For example, to use a particular font for text on a template layer, upload the font file. To display eCatalog Viewer page numbers in a particular font, upload the font file.

Scene7 supports these font types:

• All TrueType fonts

PostScript® fonts

• OpenType/TrueType fonts

OpenType/PostScript fonts

• PhotoFonts

After a font file has been uploaded, you can change its SPS ID, font name, and type information on the Edit Info screen.

Important: Scene7 recommends uploading all font styles (bold, italic, bold/italic, and regular) if you plan to use fonts in template layers. Scene7 needs these font styles to process requests. Uploading all PostScript/Adobe Type 1 files associated with a font is also recommended because some of these fonts contain detailed kerning information.

Uploading font files

Upload font files with the same techniques you use to upload other files. You can store font files in any SPS folder. See

“ Uploading your files ” on page 38.

Editing font file information

You can change the ID name of a font as well as its type information. Editing a font file can be helpful in searches and making fonts easier to identify.

In the Browse Panel, display the font file you want to edit in Detail view and choose File > Edit Info. The Edit Info screen opens. Choose the following options and select the Submit button.

Font Name

This name identifies the font when it is published.

Last updated 5/21/2010

180

USING SCENE7

Support files

PostScript Name

This name is the full PostScript name for the font. It usually indicates the weight or style.

RTF Name

This name appears on a pop-up menu in the RTF editor where template text layers are created.

Font Family Name

This name lists the font name without the style, weight, or font-type indicator.

Font Style

The options are Plain, Bold, Italic, and Bold-Italic.

Font Type

The options are TrueType and Adobe Type 1. If you call these fonts by another name, you can enter it.

Font Type Abbreviation

The options are as follows:

TTF

TrueType font files used for PDF/PostScript rendering and image serving.

AFM

Adobe PostScript font files that contain Adobe Font Metrics information and are used for image serving.

PFM

Adobe PostScript font files that contain binary font metric information.

PFB

Adobe PostScript font files that contain binary font outline information and are used for PDF/PostScript rendering and image serving.

Editing font metadata

In Detail view, you can view and edit the font metadata for uploaded fonts. Changing the metadata makes it easy to change the name or type of a font. This is especially useful when working with fonts in templates.

1

In the Browse Panel, double-click an uploaded font.

2

In the SPS Metadata panel, select the metadata you want to edit, and type the new metadata.

Changes are uploaded to the server immediately.

181

ICC profiles

An ICC (International Color Consortium) profile is a file that describes how to correctly convert image files from one color space to another. ICC profiles help you to get the correct colors for your images. For example, to correctly display images designed for printing on a computer monitor, you can choose an ICC profile. This profile converts the image to a different color space and makes sure that the colors display correctly online.

In the Scene7 Publishing System, you can choose an ICC profile to convert images to a different color space when you upload the images. All standard Photoshop ICC profiles are available by default on SPS. To see the names of color profiles on the Upload screen, select the Color Profile menu. Then choose Custom From > To, and choose an ICC

profile name on the Converted From and Converted To menus. See “ Image editing options at upload ” on page 173.

As well as using the default ICC profiles, you can upload other ICC profiles to SPS and make them available for color space conversion. Switch to Detail view in the Browse Panel to investigate the profile class, color space type, and PCS type of an ICC profile.

Uploading ICC profiles

Upload ICC profiles with the same techniques you use to upload files. You can store ICC profiles in any SPS folder.

See “ Uploading your files ” on page 38.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

Support files

Examining an ICC profile

To examine an ICC profile, select it in the Browse Panel and display it in Detail view. Detail view provides this information about ICC profiles:

Profile Class

The ICC (International Color Consortium) defines each class to cover a type of application. For example,

Input profiles apply to devices such as digital cameras and scanners, and Output profiles apply to printers.

Color Space Type

This number is the "input" color space of the profile, as defined by the ICC. The color space type defines the number of components of the color space and the interpretation of those components. For example, RGB is a color space with three components: red, green, and blue. The color space type does not define the particular color characteristics of the space (for example, the chromaticities of the primaries).

PCS Type

This PCS type is the "output" color space of the profile—its profile connection space. For example, a color profile can convert RGB to the PCS, which then converts it to CMYK.

For an input, display, or output profile useful for tagging colors or images, the PCS type is either XYZ or Lab. Interpret this profile as the corresponding specific color space defined in the ICC specification.

182

XML files

Websites that use an XML-based system to manage images and image information can upload XML files to the Scene7

Publishing System. You can designate one of these files as the preprocessing rule set file for Image Serving. This file restructures the standard Image Serving protocol format to meet the business logic of your commerce server. On the

Setup screen, you can specify an XML file to serve as the rule set definitions file path. This path setting is located under

Catalog Management on the Image Server Publishing screen. See “ Image Server ” on page 25.

XSL files

You can upload XSL translation tables into SPS and use them for XML processing within the Scene7 Publishing

System. For example, websites that use an XML-based system to manage images and image information can import

XSL translation tables that map XML field names to SPS metadata fields. XSL files can also include rules for concatenating or truncating field values when these values are imported into SPS.

When you upload JPEG, TIFF, and PSD files, SPS can read the information in the file headers if the information is in the XMP, EXIF, or IPTC format. SPS can extract this header data into user-defined fields associated with each image.

SPS uses an XSL translation table to map the internal field names to the target user-defined field names.

Company administrators can enable this automatic extraction by defining the appropriate user-defined fields and selecting the appropriate XSLT table. A default XSLT table is available that uses field names defined by SPS.

Last updated 5/21/2010

Chapter 20: FXG Elements Guide

You can use elements and attributes to manipulate the content of Web To Print templates in Scene7. You can specify values for elements and attributes in the Scene7 Template Publishing screen. If a Scene7 element:id is defined, you can also use these elements and attributes in the Additional Modifiers panel in the Template Publishing Preview screen.

Type of elements and attributes

An element is an object that you can change by adjusting its attributes. An element can be any object in your design such as a rectangle, vector shape, graphic, or text block. Every element has attributes, such as color, width, or stroke.

Elements are based on your design, and can be static or variable. If the attributes are labeled as parameters, they are variable and you can change their appearance within the final template. Otherwise, they are static and do not change.

A common attribute is one that two or more different elements can use.

A private attribute is one that only one specific element can use.

Elements available for Template Publishing

Following are some of the most common elements you can use when designing templates:

RectEllipse

LineText

GraphicBitmap

Graphic

Group

FXG Paths

LinearGradient

RadialGradient

BitmapFill

SolidColor

FXG Fills, Strokes, Visibility, and Blend Modes

Common attributes available for Template Publishing

Common attributes are common to two or more types of elements. Following are some of the most common attributes you can use when designing templates:

[element] alpha

[element] blendMode

[element] height

[element] id

Last updated 5/21/2010

183

USING SCENE7

FXG Elements Guide

[element] interpolationMethod

[element] maskType

[element] scaleX

[element] scaleY

[element] source

[element] spreadMethod

[element] transformX

[element] transformY [element] rotation

[element] visible

[element] width

[element] x

[element] y

Private attributes available for Template Publishing

Private attributes are only used by one type of element. The following private attributes can be used when designing templates:

BitmapGraphic repeat control1X control1Y control2X control2Y

Group scaleGridBottom

Group scaleGridLeft

Group scaleGridRight

Group scaleGridTop

Line xFrom

Line yFrom

Line xTo

Line yTo

Path data

Path winding

RadialGradient focalPointRatio

Rect radius

SolidColor color

184

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

FXG Elements Guide

TextGraphic

TextGraphic hyphenation

TextGraphic kerning

TextGraphic lineHeight

TextGraphic whiteSpaceCollapse

TextVerticalAlign

Common attributes

You can use the following common attributes in the Scene7 Template Publishing screen:

Note: Common attributes appear with [element] before their name: [element]attribute_name. For example, the common attribute width, appears as [element] width. To find information on the common attribute width for any element, such as rect width, see [element] width.

[element] width

Specifies the width of the object in points. For example, if you enter 300 as the rect width, the rectangle appears 300 points wide.

[element] height

Specifies the height of the object in points. For example, if you enter 300 as the rect height, the rectangle appears 300 points high.

[element] x

Defines the distance from the upper left corner of the bounding box, along the x-axis (horizontal), to where the text or object begins. For example, if you enter 10 points as the rect x value, your text or object appears 10 points from the left of the edge of the rectangle.

[element] y

Defines the distance from the upper left corner of the bounding box, along the y-axis (vertical), to where the text or object begins. For example, if you enter 10 points as the rect y value, your text or object appears 10 points from the top of the edge of the rectangle.

[element] transformX

Allows you to adjust the positioning based on the x and y values of the group and the bitmap fill. You can use transformX and transformY together to position the object horizontally and vertically, or separately for x or y.

[element] transformY

Allows you to adjust the positioning based on the x and y values of the group and the bitmap fill. You can use transformX and transformY together to position the object horizontally and vertically, or separately for x or y.

[element] rotation:

Rotates the object by degrees. For example, if you enter 45, the object rotates 45°.

[element] scaleX

Scales the object horizontally. If you want the object to increase or decrease in size proportionally, change both the scaleX and scaleY. Otherwise, you stretch the object horizontally only.

[element] scaleY

Scales the object vertically. If you want the object to increase or decrease in size proportionally, change both the scaleX and scaleY. Otherwise, you stretch the object vertically only.

[element] blendMode

Blends stacks of objects together using transparency. It is non-destructive, and similar to the blending modes in Adobe Photoshop. Different types of blend modes have different effects. For example, Applying a blend mode to a stack of objects blends the top object into the object below it. The effect changes depending on the degree of opacity, the order of the stacked objects, and the specific blend mode used. Examples of blend modes include: add, alpha, darken, difference, erase, hardlight, invert, layer, lighten, multiply, normal, overlay, screen, subtract.

[element] visible

Shows or hides the object. Choose On to show or Off to hide.

185

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

FXG Elements Guide

[element] alpha

A real number from 0 to 1 that specifies the opacity of the stroke. Transparent is 0, solid is 1. The default is 1.

[element] id

Defines an element ID so the object can be used for DOM manipulation. For example id:image names the object with the variable id of image. When used in DOM manipulations, the image id is used to define which named object is being manipulated.

[element] maskType

Specifies either an alpha mask or a clip mask. Defaults to clip.

[element] spreadMethod

Specifies how to create linear and radial gradients that are filled with pixels. You can choose from the following options:

Pad

Pixels take on the color of the closest point on the gradient vector.

Reflect

The gradient is repeated infinitely, reversing its direction with each repeat.

Repeat

The gradient is repeated infinitely.

[element] interpolationMethod

Specifies how to interpolate between entries of the gradient. These are RGB or linear

RGB, and are in Adobe Illustrator as well.

[element] source

Specifies the file formats that you can use for Bitmap Graphics or Bitmap Fills (must be PNG, JPG, or GIF). This attribute is required for Bitmap Graphics or Bitmap Fills.

186

Element types and their private attributes

You can use the following elements and their attributes in the Scene7 Template Publishing screen, as well as in the

Additional Modifiers panel in the Preview screen:

Rect

Rect is a rectangle.

You can use the following private attributes with Rect elements:

Rect radiusX

For rounded rectangles, specifies the x-axis (horizontal) radius of the curve used to round off the corners of the rectangle.

Rect radiusY

For rounded rectangles, specifies the y-axis (vertical) radius of the curve used to round off the corners of the rectangle.

Ellipse

An Ellipse element is a round or oblong circle based on a bounding rectangle. The bounding rectangle defines the boundary of the actual Ellipse path. Any stroke applied to the Ellipse can extend beyond the bounding rectangle, according to the painting rules of the stroke.

Line

A line is any straight continuous connected path between two or more points. You can use the following private attributes with Line elements:

Line xFrom

The x-axis (horizontal) starting point of the line. Defaults to 0 in points.

Line yFrom

The y-axis (vertical) starting point of the line. Defaults to 0 in points.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

FXG Elements Guide

Line xTo

The x-axis (horizontal) ending point of the line. Defaults to 0 in points.

Line yTo

The y-axis (vertical) ending point of the line. Defaults to 0 in points.

Text Graphic

Text in FXG is defined with the TextGraphic element.

You can use the following private attributes with TextGraphic elements:

TextGraphic textVerticalAlign

Aligns text within the text box. Options are top, bottom, and center.

TextGraphic hyphenation

Specifies hyphenation as On or Off. When On, the text automatically hyphenates and wraps, breaking words as necessary; when Off, words do not hyphenate and break.

TextGraphic kerning

Uses metric kerning to specify space between characters. Metric kerning uses kern pairs, which are included in most fonts. You can choose On or Off.

TextGraphic extendedKerning

Uses optical kerning to specify space between characters. Optical kerning automatically adjusts the space between characters based on their shapes. You can choose On or Off.

TextGraphic lineHeight

Specifies the leading (the distance between the baselines of two lines of text). Can be in points, or as a percentage if % is appended to value.

TextGraphic whiteSpaceCollapse

Enables proper viewing of content by removing extra line breaks and white space.

Options are Preserve and Collapse. Default is Preserve. For more information, see Whitespace Handling in the FXG

Spec at www.adobe.com/go/learn_s7_FXG_Spec_en .

187

TextGraphic element selected

BitmapGraphic

A BitmapGraphic element defines a rectangular region in its parent element's coordinate space, filled with bitmap data drawn from a source file.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

FXG Elements Guide

The BitmapGraphic element renders its source image into a rectangle defined by its parent coordinate system.

The default image rectangle has its top/left as the originating point, with its width/height defaulting to the size of the source image. the image rectangle is smaller than the source image, the bitmap is clipped to fit the rectangle. If the image rectangle is larger, you can choose to tile the image to fill the extra space.

You can use the following private attributes with BitmapGraphic elements:

BitmapGraphic repeat

Specifies whether the image data is tiled to fill the image rectangle. For example, if you have a frame 4 inches square, an image 1-inch square, and Repeat set to True, the image is duplicated next to and below itself, and fills the frame. Default is False.

188

BitmapGraphic element selected

Group

The Group element is a container element for grouping related graphics elements.

A group of elements, as well as individual objects, can be given a name by using the id attribute. Named groups are required in interactive environments for animation and runtime modification.

FXG Paths

A path is defined in FXG by using the Path element. Paths represent the outline of a shape that you can fill and stroke.

A path is described using a current point. To understand current point, imagine you are drawing on paper; the current point is the location of the pen. You can change the position of the pen, and trace the outline of a shape (open or closed) by dragging the pen in either straight lines or curves.

Compound paths (paths with multiple subpaths) allow effects such as donut holes in objects. A Path element can optionally contain one element named fill and one element named stroke. Path elements are transformable and support blendModes and bitmap filters.

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

FXG Elements Guide

Paths represent the geometry of the outline of an object, defined in terms of the following elements:

lineto

Draw a straight line.

moveto

Set a new current point.

closepath

Close the current path shape by drawing a line to the last moveto.

curveto

Draw a curve using a cubic Bezier. You can use the following curve commands to draw curves:

Cubic Bezier commands (C, c, S, and s)

A cubic Bezier segment is defined by a start point, an end point, and two control points. Using C and S indicates absolute coordinates are used; using c and s indicates relative coordinates are used. Every absolute coordinate has a relative coordinate that is determined by adding the previous coordinate position to the current position.

Quadratic Bezier commands (Q, q, T, t)

A quadratic Bezier segment is defined by a start point, an end point, and one control point. Using Q and T indicates absolute coordinates are used; using q and t indicates relative coordinates are used. Every absolute coordinate has a relative coordinate that is determined by adding the previous coordinate position to the current position.

Note: For more information on curve commands, see Path Data in the FXG Specification at www.adobe.com/go/learn_s7_FXG_Spec_en .

You can use the following private attributes with FXG Path elements:

Path data

The outline of a shape. All coordinates are in points.

Path winding

Fill rule for intersecting or overlapping path segments. For example, two circles overlapping and creating a third shape at the intersection. The winding path is the fill rule for that intersection (including some of the color if nonzero). Options are even/odd or nonzero.

189

Last updated 5/21/2010

USING SCENE7

FXG Elements Guide

Path for red rectangle outlining the document is selected

LinearGradient

The LinearGradient element fills a path or shape with a continuously smooth color transition between a list of colors along a vector. The gradient vector stretches from (0,-0.5) to (0,0.5) in the parent element’s coordinate space. Matrix transformations (changes in the angle of the linear gradient) defined for the LinearGradient alter its appearance.

RadialGradient

The RadialGradient element fills a path or shape with a continuously smooth color transition between a list of colors along the radius of a circle. The circle used is the circle bounded by the box stretching from (-0.5, -0.5) to (0.5, 0.5).

Like LinearGradient, matrix transformations defined on the gradient transform the RadialGradient.

You can use the following private attribute with RadialGradient elements:

FocalPointRatio

Defines the location of the focal point of the radial gradient along the horizontal axis (of the untransformed box). A value of one places it at the right edge of the box (at 0.5, 0). A value of -1 places it at the left edge of the box (at -0.5, 0). The default value of 0 places it in the middle of the box.

BitmapFill

The BitmapFill element fills a path or shape with bitmap image. You can choose to have the image repeat (or tile) to completely fill the path by specifying the Repeat attribute as True.

Last updated 5/21/2010

190

USING SCENE7

FXG Elements Guide

By default, the bitmap image paints a fill rectangle stretching from (0,0) at the upper-left to the (width, height) of the bitmap image in the shape's parent grouping element's coordinate system. The remainder of the shape is left unpainted.

You can use the following attribute with BitmapFill elements:

Repeat

Tiles the fill rectangle to fill an infinite plane with the bitmap image data.

SolidColor

The SolidColor element fills a path or shape with a single solid color or solid color with opacity.

You can use the following private attribute with SolidColor elements:

SolidColor color

An RGB value (in the form #rrggbb) that defines the single color value with which to fill the shape.

Defaults to #000000.

SolidColor cmyk

A CMYK value in the form of #ccmmyykk that defines the single color value. The values for each channel are from 00 (0%) to 64 (100%). For example, pure black is #00000064, and pure cyan is #64000000.

SolidColor spotColor

The name of a spot color.

SolidColor spotTint

A value from 0 to 100 that defines the tint of the spot color.

FXG Fills, strokes, visibility, and blend modes

FXG paths and basic shapes can be filled (paint the interior of the object) and stroked (paint along the outline of the object). Filling and stroking are both considered painting operations.

You can fill a path or shape with any of the following:

• a solid color

• a solid color with opacity

• a gradient (linear or radial)

• a bitmap image (optionally tiled)

You can stroke a path or shape with any of the following:

• a solid color

• a solid color with opacity

• a gradient (linear or radial)

191

Last updated 5/21/2010

Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents